JP2019005191A5 - - Google Patents

Description

Amusement machine

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Here, the game machine of the pachinko machine or the like, Ri Monogaa to perform the extraction election, additional possible gaming machine has been proposed benefits to the player based on the lottery result.

JP2012-147965A

However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, the incoming balls unit playing ball capable ball entrance, capable of performing determine constant based on the game ball has ball entrance to the ball entrance means determining and means, executable in the first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displayed on the display unit identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means, the determination on the basis of the establishment of the determination condition The determination means, the second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the determination information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means on the display means, and the first dynamic display means When the specific identification information indicating that the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result is stopped and displayed, or the result of the determination by the determination means is specified by the second dynamic display means. When the specific determination information for indicating the determination result of No. is stopped and displayed, the privilege game executing means capable of executing the privilege game corresponding to each is displayed, and the first effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information. And a second effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the determination information, and an effect execution means capable of executing at least the effect, and the effect execution means emphasizes the second effect more than the first effect. It is possible to execute a first execution and a second execution that emphasizes the first effect rather than the second effect, and the effect result of the second effect that is being emphasized and executed by the first execution is displayed. At the timing when the first effect is being executed and the special condition is satisfied, the effect result of the first effect is displayed regardless of the remaining period of the first effect. It is possible to execute a special effect.

According to claim 1 the gaming machine according the incoming balls unit playing ball capable ball entrance, a viable decision means for determine a constant based on the game ball has ball entrance to the ball entrance means, the determination a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displayed on the display unit identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the means and viable discriminating means discriminating on the basis of the establishment of the determination condition, the The second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the discrimination information indicating the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means on the display means, and the determination by the determination means by the first dynamic display means. When the specific identification information indicating that the result is the specific determination result is stopped and displayed, or the result of the determination by the determination unit by the second dynamic display unit is the specific determination result. When the specific discrimination information for indicating that is displayed in a stopped state, the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game corresponding to each, the first effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information, and the discrimination information A second execution corresponding to the dynamic display of, and a performance executing means capable of at least executing the first performance, wherein the performance executing means emphasizes the second performance more than the first performance, It is possible to execute a second execution that emphasizes the first effect rather than the second effect, and at a timing when the effect result of the second effect that is emphasized and executed by the first execution is displayed. When the first effect is being executed and a special condition is satisfied, a special effect that displays the effect result of the first effect regardless of the remaining period of the first effect is executed. It is possible.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow in the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow in the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine. (A), (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the operation|movement relationship of the storage device and the non-electric accessory which were provided in the game board of a pachinko machine. (A), (b) is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the second variable winning a prize device 650. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display device, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of a small hit game of small hit type B executed based on the entrance of a ball into the first entrance, (b) is the first entrance It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the small hit game of the small hit type A performed based on the entrance of the ball into. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of a small hit game executed based on the entrance into the second entrance, and (b) is based on the entrance into the second entrance. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the jackpot game to be executed. It is a schematic diagram which showed the game flow in 1st Embodiment typically. It is a timing chart (first half) showing the relationship between the game state and the effect state in the first embodiment. It is a timing chart (second half) showing the relationship between the game state and the effect state in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the variation of the first special symbol is started in the game state in a time saving state, and (b) is a game. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the state is a time saving state and 40 seconds have passed since the variation of the first special symbol was started. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device after the game state is a time saving state and the ball has entered the second entrance while the first special symbol is changing. That is, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the gaming state is a time saving state and the variation period of the first special symbol is 1 second remaining. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device at the time when the change of the 1st special symbol performed during a time saving state stopped, (b) is a figure after the end of a time saving state In a normal state, it is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the variation of the second special symbol is started. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the variation of the second special symbol which is a small hit is stopped and displayed in a normal state after the end of the time saving state, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when the big hit game is started based on the small hit game displayed in FIG. 18(a). (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when the second jackpot game is started due to a time saving change executed after the jackpot game due to V winning is finished, ( b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the gaming state is a time saving state and the variation period of the first special symbol is 10 seconds remaining. (A) is a display of the third symbol display device in the case where the game state is a short-time state, and the storage of the second special symbol occurs due to the ball entering the second ball entrance during the battle effect It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of a screen, (b) is a game state is a time saving state, and a 3rd symbol display device in the case of a ball not entering the 2nd entrance during a battle production. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen. (A) is an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in the case where the gaming state is a time saving state and the holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired up to the upper limit during the time saving variation of the first special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, (b), the game state is a time saving state, during the special effect execution is granted by acquiring the reserve ball of the second special symbol up to the upper limit during the time saving fluctuation of the first special symbol It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device. (A) is a schematic view showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the gaming state is a normal state and the small hit game based on the first special symbol is executed, (b) Is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device during the small hit game shown in FIG. 22(a). (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when a right-handed game is performed while the game state is a normal state (left-handed state), and (b) is an electric motor It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in the state in which the accessory is opened. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control unit in the first embodiment, and (b) is a block showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control unit in the first embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the 1st random number table in 1st Embodiment, (b) showed typically the content of the special symbol 1 random number table in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the first embodiment, (d) is the contents of the second per random number table in the first embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table in the first embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a schematic of the content of the special symbol 1 small hit selection table in 1st Embodiment It is a schematic diagram shown in, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 small hit selection table in the first embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the content of the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 1 big hits in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special pattern 1 deviation|shift variation pattern table in 1st Embodiment, (d) is a special figure in 1st Embodiment It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for 1 small hits. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special pattern 1 time saving fluctuation pattern table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the content of the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern table in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram shown. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect state selection table, and (b) is each effect state selected by the effect state selection table and the third symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the three symbols and the holding symbol. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the drawing list in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the special design fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment in 1st execution form. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal fluctuation start process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a time-shortening fluctuation start process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the pre-reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory control process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the universal figure prefetching process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the small hit end processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric auditors article opening/closing process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows storage device control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern related processing performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation sphere number related processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize information related processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. It is a flow chart which shows hit related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the universal figure fluctuation|variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the production state setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the specific production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. 6 is a flowchart showing a counter updating process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process according to the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the change pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing according to the present invention. FIG. 9A is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 9B is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing an error command process performed. It is a flow chart which shows hit related command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows number-of-rounds command processing. 6 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, (b) shows an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, (b) shows an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main controller in the second embodiment, and (b) is a block showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the second embodiment. It is a figure. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special pattern 1 time saving fluctuation pattern table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving end determination processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving fluctuation start processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, (b) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main controller in the third embodiment, and (b) is a block showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the third embodiment. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time saving state selection table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable time setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the modification 1 of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the modification 2 of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing another example of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram which showed the operation|movement of the modification of an electric accessory. It is a schematic diagram which showed the operation|movement of the modification of an electric accessory. It is a schematic diagram which showed the operation|movement of the modification of an electric accessory. It is a schematic diagram which showed the operation|movement of the modification of an electric accessory. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in other effect example 1, (b) shows an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in other effect example 1. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in example 2 of other productions, (b) shows an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in example 2 of other productions. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for public figures in other example 2 of production, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the content of the variation pattern table for normal in other example 2 of production. It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for time saving A in other example 2 of production, and (d) is the variation for time saving B in example 2 of other production. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the pattern table typically. It is the flowchart which shows the normal design fluctuation processing 4 which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit in other production example 2.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 3 and 4 are right side regions of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. 6 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow, FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the operation of the non-electric accessory 710 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an internal structure of a second variable winning device 650 provided in FIG. 7, and FIG. 7 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

In the inner frame 12, a large number of nails, a left first ball entrance 64a, a right first ball entrance 64b (hereinafter, both the left first ball entrance 64a and the right first ball entrance 64b are shown. Is referred to as a first ball entrance 64.), a second ball entrance 640, a through gate 67, a variable winning device (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650), etc. 2) is detachably attached from the front side. A ball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface (game area) of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, a metal hinge 19 is attached to the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinge 19 serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame 14 and the lower plate. The unit 15 is supported to be openable and closable on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface and protruding toward the front, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and during the jackpot or reach production, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, that is, a cash machine, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open. .. On the other hand, on the right side of the lower plate unit 15, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball firing unit 112a is driven. A touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is detected by a change in electric resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, and the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

In the present embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration in which the main control device 110 or another control device detects a sphere fired by the sphere firing unit 112a or the solenoid of the sphere firing unit 112a is used. It may be configured to detect that the ball has been fired. Further, the number of detected balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

A frame button 22 is provided above the lower plate unit 15. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect, background, or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later. As described above, by disposing the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player on the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to arbitrarily select the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10, and the player's willingness to participate in the game. Can be increased.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player is provided as the operation means that can be operated by the player, but other configurations may be used, for example, the player can make contact ( Alternatively, a sensor-type operation means for detecting that the player has approached, a lever-type operation means that can be operated by the player in the left-right (or front-back) direction, and a handle-type operation means that can be rotated by the player are provided. In addition, although the number of operating means is one in the present embodiment, more operating means may be provided, or a plurality of operating means having different operating methods may be provided. With such a configuration, the player can perform more various operations, and the types of effects executed based on the player's operation on the operation means can be increased.

Further, the operating means (frame button 22) is arranged at a position (on the upper left side of the lower plate unit 15) which can be operated by the player while executing the game (while operating the operation handle 51 with the right hand). Therefore, the frame button 22 can be easily operated even while the player is playing the game.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as a “dollar box”) for receiving balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general entrance 63, The first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650), the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame. It is attached to the back side of 12. The general entrance 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650), the variable display device unit 80 is based on the router processing. It is arranged in a through hole formed in the plate 60 and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a wood screw or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted. At the inner position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a starting opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down. In addition, the game area includes all areas in which the ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down until it passes through the outlet 66 and the winning opening (ball entrance).

In the present pachinko machine 10, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (left side when viewed from the front of the game board 13) is formed as a left game area and the right side is formed as a right game area, and a ball is shot at the left game area (hereinafter, In the left hitting game), a game in which a ball is entered into the general entrance 63 or the left first entrance 64a is performed, and a game of shooting a ball aiming at the right game area (hereinafter referred to as right hitting game). In the above), the fired ball passes above the variable display device unit 80, and the right first ball entrance 64b, the second ball entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, and the second are provided in the right game area. A game aiming at the variable winning device 650 or the like is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, the player is allowed to play a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) according to the game state, thereby suppressing monotonous play.

Further, as will be described later in detail, according to various game states (normal state, time saving state, jackpot state, etc.) set in the pachinko machine 10, a game advantageous to the player (left hitting game or right hitting game). Games) are configured to be different. As a result, the contents of the game can be changed while the player is aware of the current game state, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming more monotonous.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation of the game board 13 will be continued. The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball is a through gate (normal). When the ball passes through the entrance slot 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery for the special symbol that is performed for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is done, the jackpot type is also determined. When it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the first specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls are won). It is released, and the opening is repeated the number of times (the number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a small winning that is given to the player with a privilege different from the special gaming state is determined in some cases when a non-big hit (out) is determined by a special symbol lottery. Is configured. If the special symbol lottery is won, the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is for a predetermined period (for example, until 1.8 seconds in total or 10 balls are won). The small hit game that is released is executed. As will be described later in detail, in this pachinko machine 10, a part of the balls that have won the second specific winning opening 650a during this small hit game have passed a specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (see FIG. 6)). In this case, the above-mentioned big hit game is executed after the small hit game is finished. As a result, the player will be able to win the jackpot based on the result of the game that aims to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery and the result of the small jackpot game executed by winning the small jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol. It is possible to perform both a game aiming at that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early because the player can execute various games.

As will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with seven types of "special jackpot A" to "big jackpot G" as jackpot types of special symbols. The two types of “big hit A and B” are the big hit types that can be determined when a big hit occurs in a lottery executed when a ball enters the first entrance 64. Two types of "big hit C, D" are small hits in a lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The “big hit E” is a big hit type that can be determined in the case of a big hit in the lottery executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640, or the ball is the second big hit. It is a jackpot in a lottery executed when the ball enters the ball entrance 640, and is a jackpot type that can be determined when the ball passes through a specific area during the jackpot game. Is a jackpot in a lottery executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640, and is a jackpot type that can be determined when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. .. The plurality of jackpot types provided in this way are bonuses given to the player when the jackpot game is executed, such as bonuses during the jackpot game (eg, number of rounds, opening time, opening pattern), and jackpots. The benefits given after the game (for example, the benefits that give the player a gaming state in which the player can easily win the next jackpot) are set to be different. As a result, in the jackpot game executed at various occasions for the player, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to obtain the jackpot game to which a more advantageous privilege is given, and also to provide various playability. be able to.

When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds to 90 seconds) has passed, the lottery result The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances depends on the type of entrance. Each is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol is drawn. , The variable display according to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal pattern hits, the second ball entrance 640 is changed by changing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 3 seconds). Be released. Note that, in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a is disposed at the closed position, and thus the second entrance 640 is closed. Therefore, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily selected by lottery.

Also, when the lottery for the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 4 seconds) has passed, the lottery is performed. The normal pattern showing the result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passing times is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol. While being displayed by the display device 37, it is also displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate (normal entrance slot) 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is selected and the lottery is performed. The variable display is started.

As described above, seven types of "big hit A" to "big hit G" are provided as special jackpot types. When it becomes "big hit A to C", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 7 rounds (7 round big hit), and when it becomes "big hit D", it becomes a special game state of 2 round numbers (2 round big hit), When it becomes a "big hit E", it becomes a special game state of 15 rounds (15 big hit). When the "big hit F" is reached, a special game state of 5 rounds is reached (5 round big hit), and when the "big hit G" is reached, a special game state of 10 rounds is reached (10 round big hit).

Moreover, when it becomes "big hit A", "big hit C", and "big hit EG", after the big hit ends, the variation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter, and when the normal symbol hits, the second time than in the normal state. A time saving state in which the electric accessory 640a is controlled to be opened so that the ball can easily enter the ball entrance 640 is given until the variation of the special symbol ends once (time saving number once) .. When the “big hit B” and the “big hit D” are achieved, the normal state is not given after the big hit ends and the time saving state is not given.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment has a function (so-called, time saving function) of shifting the game state to a time saving state in which it is easier to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 than in the normal state. Having, the jackpot probability of special symbols and the function of changing the jackpot probability of ordinary symbols (so-called probability variation function), but not limited to this, using a pachinko machine with probability variation function Good.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is changed according to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common to all jackpot types (for example, all eight rounds). In addition, for example, the period of the "normal symbol time saving state" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the time period in which the "normal symbol is in a time saving state", the time to open the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 or the electric accessory 640a is released by hitting one ordinary symbol. The number of times to do may be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the type of jackpot determines the privilege to be given after the jackpot ends. For example, the jackpot finishes on the condition that the ball has passed a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the jackpot. You may make it give the probability change state of a special symbol or the time saving state of a normal symbol later. In addition, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is configured to continue until the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (1 time) that is set in advance, but the number of times saving time is set in advance a plurality of times (for example, 10 times), when the number of times of special symbol variation reaches the number of time saving, or when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result, the time saving state may be configured to end. In addition, a lottery different from the special symbol lottery (lottery for determining whether the time saving state is continued) is executed, and the time saving state is configured to be terminated when the result of the lottery does not continue the time saving state. May be. Further, in the present embodiment, the special short hit type (big hit A, big hit C, big hit E to G) has a configuration in which the time saving state is always provided after the jackpot game is finished, but other configurations may be used. For example, when the time saving application number measuring means for measuring the number of times the time saving state is continuously applied is provided and the measurement result by the time saving application number measuring means is a predetermined number (for example, 10), which jackpot Even if the jackpot game depending on the type is executed, the time saving state may not be given after the jackpot game is over. As a result, it is possible to set the upper limit of the game period that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with excessive gambling. Also, as an example of suppressing excessive gambling, an example is shown in which an upper limit is set for the number of times that the time saving state is continuously given. You may make it set the upper limit to the number of times of change of the special symbol executed during the long holiday period). Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to set an upper limit for the short-time condominium period, so it is possible to suppress excessive gambling. In this case, since the upper limit is not set to the number of times the time saving state is given (that is, the number of jackpots during the time saving holiday period), the period is limited (the time saving period period when the upper limit is set). In the inside, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game in order to win many jackpots.

The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display or a variation by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery for the special symbol that is performed in association with the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting winning) is in progress. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in a lighting state, or a ball entered into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Among them, the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by a lighting state.

When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of times is reserved up to four times for each entrance, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (e.g., 8 times). In addition, it may be set to be held until the total number of balls entering a plurality of ball entrances reaches the upper limit number (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit, error display, and the like. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by combining the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs (high probability state of special symbols) Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as shortening of working hours. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and when it is a big hit, a special according to the big hit type (big hit A to G). The design (first design) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general ball entrances 63 are provided in which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 displays a decorative third symbol (decorative symbol) corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the display of the second symbol display device 83. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. To be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed. Further, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed on the second symbol display device 83 by using it as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol is performed.

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the target of the symbol (main symbol) for notifying the player of the variable display in an easy-to-understand manner by using the third symbol display device 81 is changed according to the game state or the like. Is configured. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player is given is determined based on the lottery result of the special symbol in one game state (for example, normal state), and other This is because the gaming state (for example, a time saving state) is configured to be determined based on the lottery result of the normal symbol. In this way, even with a pachinko machine 10 having a complicated game property, by switching the target of the symbol (main symbol) mainly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the special symbol or the ordinary symbol, the player It suffices to pay attention only to the variable display of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, among the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110, the display regarding the special symbol is performed on the first symbol display device 37, and the display regarding the normal symbol is performed on the second symbol display device 83. On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the display of the second symbol display device 83. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. A plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be movable. Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 9 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 9B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen. As shown in FIG. 9(a), the first display symbol Dm is one of the third symbols in the first display area Dm, a second special symbol, or a normal symbol (depending on the gaming state), left (left side display) Area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2) and right (right side display area Dm3) three symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The design, or the normal design) is variably displayed (dynamic display).

The third symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the normal symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of the main symbols with the numbers "0" to "9". ing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a specific lottery result (a big hit in the case of a special symbol, or a part of a small hit, in the case of an ordinary symbol). In the case, the same third symbol (main symbol) is arranged (for example, “777”) in a variable display, and the jackpot is generated after the variable display ends.

Specifically, in the first display area Dm, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed for each of the left, the center and the right. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column Z1 to Z3 is cyclically scrolled from the top to the bottom for variable display. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1. If the third symbol is stopped in line on the activated line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

A second display area Dn (Dn1 to Dn6) is formed in the upper right area of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol row showing the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and a normal symbol is displayed. Specifically, the second display area Dn1 is an area in which a symbol row indicating the first special symbol is displayed, and the second display area Dn2 is an area in which a symbol row indicating the second special symbol is displayed. The 2 display area Dn3 is formed as an area in which a symbol row showing a normal symbol is displayed, and a variable display corresponding to the variable display of each symbol is displayed.

Further, in the second display area Dn, the number of reserved memories of each of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is also displayed. Specifically, the second display area Ds4 is an area in which the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is displayed, and the second display area Ds5 is an area in which the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is displayed. The 2 display area Ds6 is an area in which the number of reserved storages of normal symbols is displayed.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the display corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol, and the display corresponding to the number of reserved storage of each symbol is the second of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to be displayed in the display area Dn, of which one symbol (the symbol to be notified to the player) is selected as the main symbol, and the other symbols are less conspicuous than the main symbol. It is displayed in the second display area Dn as a design. As a result, the player can execute the optimum game only by confirming the display content of the main symbol.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the subordinate symbols is made smaller than the main symbol to make the display mode less noticeable than the main symbol, but other configurations may be used, for example, the display of the main symbol. It may be configured such that the subordinate symbol is more difficult to identify than the main symbol by increasing the transmittance of the subordinate symbol display mode than the mode or moving the subordinate symbol display area.

Further, as the symbol row mode of each symbol displayed in the second display area Dn, the symbol row displayed as the main symbol may be displayed as it is, or "○" as shown in FIG. 9B. "," two types of symbol rows of "x" are displayed in parallel, and when two "○" symbols are displayed in the left and right columns, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the normal symbol is hit. It may be configured to notify the player of the fact.

Furthermore, the sub-design corresponding to the design displayed as the main design may be configured not to be displayed on the third design display device 81, or the sub-design may be displayed at a place other than the third design display device 81. May be.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the main symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 main symbol Dma) is displayed in the first display area Dm (FIG. 9(b). ))), when the game state is a time saving state, the main symbol corresponding to the normal symbol (universal symbol main symbol Dmc) is displayed in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 16(a)). Furthermore, when the second special symbol is variably displayed, the main symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 main symbol Dmd) is displayed in the first display area Dm regardless of the game state (Fig. 17(b)).

In addition, although detailed description will be given later, in each gaming state, when a predetermined gaming condition is satisfied (for example, when a normal symbol whose fluctuation is started during the time saving state stops changing after the time saving state ends), A combination different from the above-mentioned combination of the main symbol and the subordinate symbol is displayed. Thereby, the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be executed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness with respect to the symbol variation executed so as to span different game states. Further, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, all normal symbols are displayed as subordinate symbols in the second display area Dn, and as the main symbol, the pseudo symbol for effect is variably displayed (see FIG. 22(a)). It is configured as follows. As a result, in a period in which each symbol is not variably displayed (for example, a small hit period), it is possible to make the player think that the symbol variation is being performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

The main symbol (third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured in the display mode consisting of the numbers "0" to "9", but is distinguished from other main symbols. Display modes other than numbers may be used as long as they are possible display modes, for example, a display mode imitating a character or a display mode in which a character and a number are combined. Further, as the symbols displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 of the first display area Dm, symbols other than the main symbol (that is, even if the same symbols are stopped in the activated line L1 are stopped, no bonus is given to the player. You may use the symbol sequence including a subsymbol as (design).

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the lottery result of the special symbol or the normal symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned Is performed and the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

The main symbol (third symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1, and this stopped display state is held for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), whether or not the combination of the 3rd symbol corresponding to the hit by the player (the special symbol, the lottery result of the normal symbol) Can be prevented from being overlooked. In the stop display state described above, only the main symbols stopped and displayed on the activated line L1 are displayed, and the other main symbols (main symbols set in each symbol row, other than the activated line L1) It is advisable not to display (main symbols that are stopped and displayed at places) (display them so that they are not conspicuous). This allows the player to be more clearly notified of the stop display result of the main symbol.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the disengagement and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display for 1 second, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, in the state where there is no holding ball, if the main symbol (third symbol) of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second, the third symbol is also stopped and displayed thereafter. Continues. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new main symbol fluctuation starts. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the main symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not executed is displayed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect.

In the present embodiment, the demonstration effect starts when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) corresponding to the main symbol are stopped and displayed. Although it is configured to be, the demonstration effect may be configured to be started based on the elapsed time after all the symbols are stopped and displayed, regardless of the main symbol and the subordinate symbols, or the main symbol. The display mode of the effect may be different between the demonstration effect when only the symbol is stopped and displayed and the demonstration effect when both the main symbol and the sub symbol are stopped and displayed. In this case, for example, in the demonstration effect that is executed when only the main symbol is stopped and displayed, a notification that prompts the progress of the game is executed, and in the demonstration effect when both the main symbol and the subordinate symbol are stopped and displayed, It is advisable to execute a notification for urging the player to play a game. This allows the game to be played smoothly.

Next, the sub display area Ds provided below the first display area Dm will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9A, a sub display area Ds is formed below the first display area Dm. This sub-display area Ds is an area in which auxiliary display modes for assisting the player's game such as the game situation and game explanation are displayed in correspondence with each game state and game result. Specifically, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed (see FIG. 9(b)), and the content of the variation effect of the main symbol executed in the first display area Dm is assisted. Or (see FIG. 22(a)), guide the contents of the game to be played (see FIG. 22(b)), and display the remaining period of a specific period (time saving period) that is advantageous to the player (see FIG. 15(a)). As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation of the game board 13 will be continued. Below the variable display device unit 80, a left first ball entrance 64a into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the left first entrance 64a, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by turning on the first entrance switch. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the left first ball entrance 64a is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. This left first ball entrance 64a performs a right-handed game when the ball is struck to the path on the left side in front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 (a so-called left-handed game is performed). It is configured to be easier to enter than in the case.

A storage device 750 and a specific general ball entrance 630 are disposed below the left first ball entrance 64a. Although a detailed description of the storage device 750 will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, the storage device 750 has a storage valve 750a that can be variably operated in a closed state and an open state, and when the storage valve 750a is in a closed state, And a side wall for forming a storage region capable of storing one sphere. The storage valve 750a is variably controlled so as to change from a closed state in which balls can be stored when a big hit is won in a lottery of a special symbol to an open state, and when the operation is variably changed to an open state, a storage area The spheres stored in the storage device 750 (or the spheres that have flown into the storage device 750 while the storage valve 750a is changed to the open state) flow down below the storage device 750. The storage device 750 is arranged at a position where the balls can be stored both when the left-handed game is played and when the right-handed game is played.

Below the storage device 750, a specific general ball entrance 630 is arranged so that a ball that has passed through the storage device 750 can enter the ball. The specific general entrance 630 is a winning entrance in which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter, and is used as an opportunity to operate the non-electric accessory 710. Although a detailed description of the non-electrical accessory 710 will be described later with reference to FIG. The provided non-electric accessory 710 is configured to be variable to a position where a ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64b.

On the other hand, in the right side area of the game board 13, two flow paths in which the ball hit by the right-handed game flows down, and a distribution member 700 for distributing the ball launched by the right-handed game to the above-mentioned two paths, The non-electrical accessory 710, the right first entrance 65b, the through gate 67, the second entrance 640 and the electric accessory 640a, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650. It is arranged. Next, with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

The spheres launched by the right-handed game are alternately distributed to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 by the distribution member 700. The ball distributed to the first flow path 701 passes through the curved path 701a (see FIG. 3), passes through the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640, and flows out to the lower side of the right side region. Further, the spheres distributed to the second flow path 702 flow down the third flow path 703a when the non-electric accessory 710 provided on the downstream side is in the closed state (see FIG. 5A). Then, it flows into the inflow port 704a and flows down the fifth flow channel 704b provided on the back surface side (the back side in the viewpoint of FIG. 2) of the first flow channel 701, and the right side region on the game board 13 from the outflow port 704c. It flows down. On the other hand, when the non-electric accessory 710 is in the open state (see FIG. 5B), it flows down through the fourth flow path 703b and enters the right first entrance 64b. When balls enter the right first entrance 64b, three balls are paid out as prize balls.

It should be noted that a detailed description of the non-electrical accessory 710 will be given later with reference to FIG. 5, but in the present embodiment, a ball that has entered the right first entrance 64b when the non-electrical accessory 710 is open. The non-electric accessory 710 is configured to be changed to the closed state by its own weight.

Then, the balls distributed to the two flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) by the distribution member 700 merge in the lower part of the right side area, and then on the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65. And flows into the outlet 66 while flowing down the flow path that can flow into the storage device 750.

Here, the flow of the spheres distributed by the distribution member 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a sphere flow when a ball fired by a right-handed game flows down the first flow path 701, and FIG. 4 is a sphere fired by a right-handed game a second flow path. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a sphere flow when flowing down 702.

As shown in FIG. 3, since the distribution member 700 alternately distributes the spheres fired by the right-handed game to the first flow passage 701 and the second flow passage 702, when 100 spheres are fired per minute In the first flow path 701, 50 pieces are distributed at intervals of 1.2 seconds and 50 pieces are distributed to the second flow path 702 at intervals of 1.2 seconds so as to flow down. The first flow path 701 is composed of a sphere passage formed with a passage width (about 15 mm) for one sphere, and a curved passage 701a provided in the middle thereof reduces the flow velocity of the sphere. The sphere passing time until the sphere that has flowed into the first flow channel 701 flows out from the first flow channel 701 is approximately 2 seconds.

A through gate 67 is provided at a downstream position of the first flow path 701 (downstream of the curved path 701a), and a second ball inlet 640 is provided downstream of the through gate 67. .. The second ball entrance 640 allows the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 when the electric accessory 640a is closed, and passes through the first flow path 701 when the electric accessory 640a is open. The formed ball is configured to enter the second entrance 640.

The ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640 after 0.2 seconds. Although the details will be described later, since the variation time of the normal symbol executed when the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 is 3 seconds at the shortest, the sphere that has passed through the through gate 67 is the through gate 67. It is configured so as not to enter the second entrance 640 by the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a which is executed based on the lottery of the normal symbol executed when the vehicle has passed. That is, the period from passing through the through gate 67 until reaching the second entrance 640 (electric accessory 640a) is shorter than the period required for the lottery for ordinary symbols. This makes it possible to carry out the ordinary symbol lottery and fire the ball into the second ball entrance 640 only by firing one ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inappropriate game from being executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the ball shot by the right-handed game is the first flow path 701 (flow path in which the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 are arranged) by the distribution member 700, and the second flow. Since it is alternately distributed to the road 702, the ordinary symbol lottery is executed (the ball passes through the through gate 67), the ordinary symbol lottery is won, and the electric accessory 640a is opened to the second entrance. Since it is necessary to fire at least three balls in order to enter the balls into 640, it is possible to prevent a more inappropriate game (for example, a single shot) from being executed.

In the present embodiment, the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 are arranged in one of the two flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700. 67 may be provided, and the second inlet 640 may be provided in the other flow path. With such a configuration, for example, when a malicious player destroys the distribution member 700 and creates a state in which the ball flows down into only one of the flow paths, the ball passes through the through gate 67. Then, it becomes possible to regulate the game in which the ball enters the second ball inlet 640 when the normal symbol is won, and it is possible to prevent the illegal game from being played.

Next, a case where the sphere flows down the second flow path 702 will be described with reference to FIG. The second flow path 702 is configured so that the period in which the sphere flows down is shorter than that of the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, the time required for the sphere that has flowed into the second flow path 702 to flow out from the flow outlet 704c is approximately 1.5 seconds. With this configuration, when 100 spheres are fired toward the right side region in one minute, the spheres that have flowed into the first flow path 701 and the spheres that are fired next to the spheres are discharged into the second flow path 702. And the ball that has flowed into the lower right area of the game board 13 (the area where the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged) flows down almost simultaneously (about 0.1 second difference). Become. Therefore, in a game state (a big hit state or a small hit state) in which each variable winning device is opened, it is possible to easily win a plurality of balls at once.

Further, a part of the second flow channel 702 (fifth flow channel 704b) is provided on the back side of the first flow channel 701 (back side from the viewpoint of FIG. 4) and is viewed from the front (front view from the viewpoint of FIG. 4). The plurality of flow paths are configured to overlap. In this way, by forming a plurality of sphere flow paths by utilizing the depth direction of the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the space forming the sphere flow path (the area where the sphere flow path occupies the game board 13). it can.

Further, the ball outlet (outlet 704c) of the second flow passage 702 is located below the outlet (downstream side of the second inlet 640) of the first flow passage 701, and on the right side of the game board 13. In the lower region, the spheres are configured to flow downstream from the spheres flowing out of the first flow channel 701. As a result, the sphere that flows out vigorously from the outlet 704c (the sphere that flows out at a higher speed than the sphere that flows down the first flow path 701) directly collides with the sphere that has flowed out from the first flow path 701 and is irregular. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a ball flow occurs.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the spheres launched by the right-handed game by the distribution member 700 are alternately distributed to the two flow paths, but other configurations may be used, for example, two Instead of alternating (1:1) to the flow channels, the spheres may be distributed at different ratios, or the spheres may be distributed to three or more flow channels. Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution member 700 in which the distribution destination of the sphere to be passed next is changed by the own weight of the sphere that has passed is used. A dividing member may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of the operation of the storage device 750 and the non-electrical accessory 710 used in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 5A is a schematic diagram showing that the storage device 750 and the non-electrical role object 710 are both in a closed state (closed state), and FIG. 5B is a storage device 750 and the non-electric roled part. It is a schematic diagram which shows that both thing 710 is an open state (open state).

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the non-electric accessory 710 is in the closed state (closed state), it is impossible (difficult) to let the ball enter the right first ball inlet 64b. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to perform a right hitting game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 and prevent the ball from entering the right first ball inlet 64b.

The non-electric accessory 710 has an action portion that comes into contact when the ball passes through a specific location, and the action portion is actuated by the weight of the abutting ball and is released based on the action. Is configured. Specifically, the ball entering the specific general entrance 630 comes into contact with the above-mentioned action part, the action connection part 710a operates in conjunction with the action, and the non-electric accessory 710 is opened. As a result, the ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64b.

Further, the right first ball entrance 64b is provided with a second acting portion with which the entered ball can come into contact, and when the ball comes into contact with this second acting portion, the self-weight of the abutting ball is reached. Thus, the second action part is activated to close the non-electric accessory 710. In this way, the non-electric accessory 710 is configured to switch the variable state based on the operation of the member acting by the weight of the ball without using an electric drive source. Note that the non-electric accessory 710 may have a configuration other than the above-described configuration, and a known configuration that operates based on the weight of the ball may be used.

The ball entering the specific general entrance 630, which is a trigger for activating (opening) the non-electric accessory 710, is stored in the storage device 750 provided above the specific general entrance 630 as described above. The ball is allowed to enter the specific general entrance 630 when the storage device 750 is released. And, as described above, this storage device 750 is in a released state until a predetermined closing condition (e.g., 10 seconds has elapsed) is satisfied when a predetermined release condition (e.g., jackpot game start) is satisfied. Variably controlled so that

That is, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the jackpot game is started and the first variable winning device 65 is opened, the storage device 750 is released. Then, the storage device 750 is in the released state, and the non-electric accessory 710 is opened based on the ball entering the specific general entrance 630. In the first embodiment, the storage device 750 is arranged at a position where the ball shot by either the left-handed game or the right-handed game can pass through the storage device 750. Balls that did not win the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game (balls that passed over the first variable winning device 65 during the inter-round interval in which the first variable winning device is temporarily closed) ) Can be entered into the specific general entrance 630.

Therefore, it is possible to obtain both a payout of a prize ball based on a ball entering the first variable winning device 65 and a payout of a prize ball based on a ball entering the specific general ball entrance 630 during a jackpot game. be able to. Furthermore, since the balls that cannot be won in the first variable winning device 65 can be entered into the specific general ball entrance 630, the first variable during the jackpot game which was conventionally a waste ball. It is possible to give an added value that is advantageous to the player to the balls that have not won the winning device 65.

In the first embodiment, the storage valve 750a is set to release the storage device 750 for 10 seconds after the jackpot game is started (after the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 for the first time is executed). It is configured to be variably operated. Therefore, by satisfying the ending condition of the first round in the jackpot game (for example, winning 10 balls) within 10 seconds, the interval from the end of the first round to the start of the second round (inter-round interval) ) It is possible to match the period with the period in which the storage device 750 is released.

As a result, the balls that have passed through the first variable winning device 65 during the interval between rounds can be put into the specific general entrance 630, so that the first round in the jackpot game can be made earlier (within 10 seconds). It is possible to have the player play the game eagerly to finish it.

As the release timing of the storage device 750 executed during the jackpot game, the above-described release timing (after the jackpot game is started (after the first opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 is executed) for 10 seconds The release timing other than the above) may be set, or the storage device 750 may be set to be released at a predetermined interval (for example, 10 second intervals) for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). With such a configuration, if the end timing of each round of the jackpot game (timing at which the interval between rounds is set) and the timing at which the storage device 750 is released all match, many jackpots are played during the jackpot game. The ball can be entered into the specific general entrance 630.

Further, in the case of using the above-described configuration, by adjusting the timing at which the ending condition of each round in the jackpot game is satisfied (for example, the tenth ball which is the round ending condition is won in the first variable winning device). By adjusting the operation timing of the operation handle 51), it is possible to change the number of balls to be entered into the specific general entrance 630 during the jackpot game, so the player can be given a jackpot game. It is possible to provide a new game property in which the end timing of each round is adjusted to a predetermined timing (timing at which the storage device 750 is in the released state), and the player can enthusiastically play the game.

It should be noted that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a display mode for notifying the release timing of the storage device 750 and a display mode in which the player can predict the timing at which the inter-round interval is executed. Thereby, the player can execute the game during the jackpot game while grasping the contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above-described first embodiment, since the non-motorized auditors object 710 is opened (opened state) when the jackpot game is executed, by performing the right hitting game during the jackpot game, the right first It is possible to reliably insert the ball into the ball entrance 64b. Thereby, in the time saving state (time saving when starting the extended game mode when shifting from the jackpot in the normal state (first time saving)) after the jackpot game is over, it is possible to reliably execute the variation of the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the non-electric accessory 710 operates so as to shift to the closed state (closed state) when one ball enters the right first ball inlet 64b, so that the jackpot is a big hit. It is possible to prevent excessive balls from entering the right first ball inlet 64b during a game.

Next, referring to FIG. 6, the game balls guided to the distribution flow paths of the back cover body 650e in the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 650e1 and a special discharge flow path 650e2 described later. Will be described.

FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the balls that have won the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1, and FIG. 6B shows the second variable winning device 650. It is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a winning ball is distributed to a special discharge channel 650e2.

As shown in FIG. 6B, when the switching member 650h is operated, the game ball that has passed through the detection opening 650a1 of the second variable winning a prize device 650 is distributed to the special discharge flow path 650e2. In this embodiment, the retention member 650n is provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2. By this staying member 650n, only one game ball can be retained in the distribution destination area 650h3, which is a destination area where the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 650e2 by the switching member 650h. As a result, when one game ball is retained in the distribution destination area 650h3, the game ball that has passed through the detection opening 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 is not distributed to the special discharge flow path 650e2, It will normally flow down to the discharge channel 650e1.

The staying member 650n is composed of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. The staying member 650n operates in the front-back direction of the game board 13 by the operation of the staying solenoid 209b (see FIG. 8). This retention member 650n can retain one game ball in the distribution destination area 650h3 by advancing forward (closing operation). On the other hand, by retracting backward (opening), the game balls staying in the sorting destination area 650h3 flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2.

Here, in the second variable winning device 650, a game ball can be entered by opening the opening/closing door 650f1 during the small hitting game. Further, the staying member 650n becomes a closing operation during a small hit game (when a ball can enter the second variable winning device 650), and after the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed (new to the second variable winning device 650). The opening operation is performed after a predetermined time elapses after the ball cannot be entered. That is, in this control example, the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 650 is limited to one ball that flows down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 even if the switching member 650h is operating. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 from becoming excessive.

The game ball flowing down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 will pass through the V winning switch 650e3. In the first embodiment, the jackpot game is provided based on the passage of the game ball to the V winning switch 650e3.

In the first embodiment, the game ball flowing down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 is configured to be limited to one ball, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more game balls stay in the distribution destination area 650h3. The number of restricted game balls may be changed as appropriate by making it possible or by allowing the staying member to operate a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) during the small hitting game.

A case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 209c (see FIG. 8) is inactive, and the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2. ..

In the first embodiment, the retention member 650n provided in the special discharge flow channel 650e2 operates even when the flow channel solenoid 209c is inactive. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the processing depending on whether or not the flow path solenoid 9209c is operated, so that it is possible to reduce the design cost and the program capacity.

When the flow path solenoid 650k is inactive, all the game balls that have passed through the detection opening 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 flow down to the normal discharge flow path 650e1. On the other hand, since there is no game ball flowing down to the special discharge flow path 650e2, there is no effect of the staying member 650n newly provided in the first embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the flow of the small hit game in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 10(a) is a small hit game of small hit type B executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a, right first entrance 64b). 10B is a timing chart showing the flow of FIG. 10B, and is executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 (the left first entrance 64a, the right first entrance 64b). It is a timing chart showing the flow of the small hit game of small hit type A. FIG. 11A is a timing chart showing the flow of a small hit game executed based on the entry of a ball into the second entrance 640, and FIG. 11B is the second entrance 640. Is a timing chart showing the flow of a jackpot game executed based on the entry of a ball into the. Details of operation control of the various devices shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 will be described later.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the small hit game for 60 seconds is executed (see FIG. 22). In this small hit game, the game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed, and when the ball winning the second variable winning device 650 passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3), the small hit game ends. The jackpot game is configured to be executed later. If you win the small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) (easy to pass) during the small hit game (small hit type A) One of small hits (small hit type B) in which the ball cannot pass (hard to pass) in the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) is selected.

First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. Based on the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64, the main controller 110 performs the variation control of the first special symbol. At that time, in the display control device 114, the first special symbol variation effect indicating that the first special symbol is changing is executed for the same period (30 seconds) as the variation time of the first special symbol. The time of the first special symbol variation effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later. Then, when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped and the main control device 110 starts the small hit control (when the small hit game is executed), the opening/closing door 650f1 provided in the second variable winning a prize device 650 is opened/closed. The V-inlet solenoid 209a for activating, the retention solenoid 209b for variably operating the retention member 650n, and the flow path solenoid 209c for variably operating the switching member 650h are turned on according to a predetermined opening scenario. Specifically, the V entrance solenoid 209a repeats an opening operation that is turned off for 15 seconds and turned on for 0.5 seconds after the small hit game is executed, and then turned off for 15 seconds and then for 0.8 seconds. An open scenario for a total of 60 seconds is set so that it is turned on and turned off for 13.2 seconds.

Next, the stay solenoid 209b is turned on (the ball is stayed) for 55 seconds after the small hit game is executed, and is then turned off for 5 seconds (the stay of the ball is released) for a total of 60. A second release scenario is set. The above-mentioned opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the stay solenoid 209b is an opening scenario common to the small hit types A and B.

On the other hand, the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 209c is configured so that different opening scenarios are set depending on the small hit type, and a small hit that the ball cannot pass (is difficult to pass) in the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). In the small hit type B, which is the type, an open scenario is set in which the off state is continuously maintained for 60 seconds during the small hit game period (see FIG. 10A), and the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3). In the small hit type A, which is a small hit type that is possible (easy to pass), an open scenario is set in which the small hit game is executed for 40 seconds, turned on for 15 seconds, and turned off for 5 seconds after the small hit game is executed (FIG. 10). (See (b)).

In this way, the ball easily passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) by changing only the driving operation of one solenoid among the three solenoids that are driven during the execution of the small hit game. By configuring the small hit game and the small hit game in which the ball does not easily pass, it is possible to use a common open scenario for small hit games executed in different small hit types, and to reduce the processing load. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the stay solenoid 209b is made common, and the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 209c is made different according to the small hit type, but other configurations may be used. Of course, for example, the open scenario of the stay solenoid 209b and the flow path solenoid 209C may be common, and the open scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a may be different. In this case, a common opening scenario is set so that a period in which the ball can pass and a period in which the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) are set depending on the timing when the ball wins the second variable winning device 650. As the opening scenario of the V entrance solenoid 209a, the opening scenario in which the V entrance solenoid 209a is turned on corresponding to the period in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) and the specific area (V It is preferable to use an open scenario in which the winning switch 650e3) corresponds to a period in which the ball cannot pass and the V entrance solenoid 209a is turned on. Further, in any opening scenario, the period during which the V-entry solenoid 209a is turned on may be unified. With this configuration, it is possible to match the number of balls that can be won in the second variable winning device 650.

Further, as in the above-described example, not only the opening scenario for the V-entry solenoid 209a is different, but the start position (execution start position) of the opening scenario is different even when the same opening scenario is used. Then, the small hitting game in which the ball easily passes the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) and the small hitting game in which the ball does not easily pass may be configured to be executable. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to prepare a different release scenario for each small hit type, so the storage capacity can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11A, a flow of a small hit game executed based on the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 will be described. In the present embodiment, the small hit game executed based on the entry of the ball into the second entrance 640 (that is, the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special drawing 2)). All the small hit games executed based on the same operation control is configured to be executed, so the small hit type will be described without limitation.

In addition, in FIG. 11A, the time for the entire small hit control (small hit game time) is set to 10 seconds for explanation. First, when the set time t1 (6.5 seconds) elapses after the small hit game (control) is started, the V inlet solenoid 209a among the plurality of solenoids described above is turned off, and the open/close door 650f1 is closed. By closing the opening/closing door 650f1, it is possible to prevent a new ball from winning in the second variable winning device 650. Next, the set time t2 (9 seconds) elapses, the stay solenoid 209b is turned off, the stay member 650n is opened (retracted state), and the balls retained by the stay member 650n flow down to the special discharge path 650e2. To go. Since the set time t2 is set to a time sufficient for the balls existing in the second variable winning device 650 to flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 when the set time t1 has elapsed, the set time t2 is set to the first time when the set time t2 has elapsed. Only the balls retained by the retention member 650n in the two-variable winning device 650 will flow down the special discharge flow channel 650e2. Next, the set time t3 (5 seconds) elapses, the flow passage solenoid 209c is turned off, and the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow passage 650e2. The set time t3 is set to a time sufficient for causing the sphere flowing down the special discharge passage 650e2 to flow downstream from the movable range of the guide piece 650h2 when the set time t2 has elapsed.

Thus, by driving the stay solenoid 209b and the flow path solenoid 209c with a time lag, even if the sphere is retained by the retention member 650n within the movable range of the guide piece 650h2, the guide piece 650h2 and the retention member 650n can be used. Since the accumulated spheres can surely flow down to the special discharge flow channel 650e2 without interfering with each other, the apparatus can be made compact.

Finally, based on that the ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2 has passed the V winning switch (specific area) 650e3, the main controller 110 ends the small hit game control and performs the big hit game control. The specific winning opening 65 is opened.

Next, the points different from FIG. 11A will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 11(b), since the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second entry slot 640 is a big hit (per symbol), the operation of the second variable winning device 650 is not performed. That is, after the variation control of the second special symbol by the main controller 110 is finished, the jackpot control is started. Meanwhile, in the display control device 114, the second special symbol variation effect indicating that the second special symbol is changing is executed.

Here, the relationship between the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 11A and the time of the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 11B will be described. In FIG. 11(a), the total of the variation time (2 seconds) of the second special symbol and the small hitting production time (10 seconds) is set to 12 seconds, and in FIG. 11(b), the variation time of the second special symbol. Is set in 12 seconds. This is the timing when the jackpot game is started even if the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is either the V winning or the symbol described above, that is, the first variable winning device 65 (first specific winning prize). This is to match the opening timing of the mouth 65a). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result of the second special symbol, and to entertain the effect performed by the display control device to the end.

Next, the flow of the game in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, when the game state is roughly divided into the normal state, a left-handed game in which a lottery for the first special symbol (special 1) is executed aiming at the left first entrance 64a, and the game state is a time saving state. In this case, a lottery of the second special symbol (special 2) is executed aiming at the second ball entrance 640, or when the game state is a hit (big hit, small hit) state, the first variable winning device 65, It is configured so that a right-handed game aiming at the 2 variable winning device 650 is performed, and the winning (big hit or small hit) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol executed during the left-handed game, and the hit game ends. When the time saving state is given later, the game shifts to the right-handed game (consulting mode), and shifts to the specific game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. This condominium mode (specific game state) ends when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the game state shifts to the normal state, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0), the normal state It shifts to a left-handed game. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, during the left-handed game (normal state), a game is performed aiming to shift to a right-handed game (specific game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a right-handed game is performed. During the extended game mode (specific game state), a game is played aiming to continue the extended game mode (specific game state). In this way, in the gaming machines having different game characteristics, by making the different game characteristics correspond to the games (right-handed game, left-handed game) in which the positions at which the player shoots the ball are made different, An easy-to-understand game can be provided.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, as a timing for shifting from the normal state in which the left-handed game is performed to the specific game state in which the right-handed game is performed (the condominium mode), the symbol that the lottery of the first special symbol wins the jackpot Multiple (two types) triggers of winning and winning of the first special symbol for the small hit, and winning of the V prize by passing the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game and executing the big hit. Since it has, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage during the left-handed game which is a normal state which is disadvantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the normal game state in which the left-handed game is performed, a game aiming at the left first entrance 64a is executed. The first special symbol is drawn based on the ball entering the left first entrance 64a, and if the jackpot type of the result of the lottery is jackpot A (80% of the jackpot winning), after the jackpot is over A time-saving game state (time-saving state) that makes it easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640 is provided. When shifting to the time saving game state (time saving state), a right hitting game in which a ball is shot to the right side of the game board 13 to aim at the second entrance 640 arranged in the right side area of the game board 13 Done. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is jackpot B (20% of jackpot winning), the time saving game state (time saving state) is not given after the jackpot, so the left-handed game is performed after the jackpot game is finished. Normal state). Further, in the present embodiment, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, and the small hit type is a small hit A (10% of the small hit winning), there is also a route that becomes a big hit (V prize). .. In this case, after the jackpot is over, it shifts to a time saving game state. Further, even if the small hit type is a small hit A, if the ball cannot be passed through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game, or the small hit type of the small hit is won. If is a small hit B, it does not shift to a time saving game state (time saving state), but shifts to a normal state where a left-handed game is executed.

Next, in the pachinko machine 10, a flow during a right-handed game that is advantageous to the player will be described. As described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5, in the pachinko machine 10, the right first entrance 64b is arranged in the right side area of the game board 13, and the jackpot game in which the right-handed game is executed. At least one ball is configured to enter the right first ball entrance 64b. In other words, in the normal game state (normal state), if you win the jackpot that the time saving state is given after the jackpot game ends, after the jackpot game ends, at least one reserved memory of the first special symbol (special figure 1) Having, the time saving state is started in a state where there is no pending storage of the second special symbol (special figure 2).

As shown in FIG. 12, in the pachinko machine 10, the second special symbol is present when both the reserved memory of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) exist. The lottery (variation) based on the reserved memory of (Special figure 2) is configured to be executed with priority (so-called, special 2 priority variation), but the reserved memory of the second special symbol (Special figure 2) is In the absence state, the lottery (variation) based on the reserved storage of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is executed. Here, since the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the time saving state is set to be 150 seconds regardless of the lottery result, after the time saving state is started During 150 seconds, the variation of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is being executed. In addition, when the fluctuation (lottery) of any of the special symbols (special drawing 1, special drawing 2) is executed once during the time saving state, the ending condition of the time saving state is established ( 1 time reduction.

During the period in which the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is changing in the time saving state, a game is executed to obtain the reserved storage of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the second special symbol ( You can acquire up to 4 reserved memories of special figure 2). Here, if it is possible to obtain the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops after the end of the time saving, and after shifting to the normal state, the reserved memory of the second special symbol Based on the lottery. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the lottery for the second special symbol is set to win the big hit with a probability of 1/300 and the small hit with a probability of 299/300. The small hit that was won by the lottery of 2 special symbols, the small hit game that can pass (easy to pass) the ball in the specific area (V winning switch 630e3) is executed, and all the big hits that are executed when the V winning is made, A jackpot is set in which a time saving state is given after the jackpot game is over. Therefore, in the time saving game state, as long as it has a reserved memory of the second special symbol, the continuous game mode (specific game state) is continued.

On the other hand, during the period when the first special symbol is fluctuating in the time saving state (during the condominium preparation period), the reserved memory for the second special symbol cannot be acquired, and the reserved memory for the second special symbol is not present. When the time saving state ends, the process shifts to the normal game state as it is, and the extended game mode (specific game state) ends.

Also, during the condominium preparation period, if a plurality (for example, 3) of reserved memories of the second special symbol are acquired, when the time saving state is entered again, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started. Become. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol (special 2 variation time) in the time saving state is set to 2 seconds regardless of the lottery result, and is shorter than the variation time (3 seconds) of the ordinary symbol in the time saving state. Since it is set to be, during the time saving state in which the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is being executed, it is suppressed to newly acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with excessive prize balls. In the present embodiment, once the time saving state is entered, the time saving state is looped with a probability of about 90%.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13 to FIG. 23, the effect display content executed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, a flow of the effect display content that changes corresponding to the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13 is a timing chart (first half) showing the relationship between the game state and the effect state in the present embodiment, and FIG. 14 is a timing chart (second half) showing the relationship between the game state and the effect state in the present embodiment.

Here, the decorative symbol (third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment will be briefly described. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the decorative symbol corresponding to three kinds of symbols of the normal symbol (third symbol) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured, in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 9) of the third symbol display device, the main symbol is a decorative symbol (third symbol) corresponding to the symbol that most informs the player of the lottery result. However, the decorative design (third design) corresponding to the other design is configured to be displayed as the secondary design in the second display area Dn (see FIG. 9) of the third design display device.

Then, in accordance with the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, by switching the symbol to be displayed as the main symbol, the player can only recognize the display result of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to make it easy to understand the complicated playability.

Regarding the control for switching the symbols to be displayed as the above-mentioned main symbols, a detailed description will be given later, but the value of the effect state is set based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the variation of each symbol, and the value of the effect state. Based on, it is configured to switch and display the symbol displayed as the main symbol and the symbol displayed as the subordinate symbol.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the game state is the normal (special 1) state in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is being executed, “state 1” is set as the effect state. During the period in which this "state 1" is set, the first special symbol is displayed as the main symbol and the ordinary symbol is the sub symbol, and the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol (Fig. 9(b)). In this way, in the "normal (special 1)" state in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed, it is possible to display to the player to easily recognize the lottery result of the first special symbol. , It is possible to inform the contents of the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, in the "big hit" state in which the big hit is won by the lottery of the first special symbol and the big hit game is being executed, in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 9(b)) of the third symbol display device 81. The jackpot effect image is displayed. In this case, since the main symbol is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, "-" is set as the effect state.

After the jackpot game is over, the game state shifts to the time saving state and the variation of the first special symbol is executed in the "time saving (special 1)" state, based on the variation state of the normal symbol, "state 3 as the effect state" Or “state 5” is set. Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the "time saving (special 1)" state will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state is "time saving (special 1)", the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol is performed. In order to obtain the reserved memory of the second special symbol, perform a right-handed game, let the ball pass through the through gate 67 (execute a lottery for ordinary symbols), and win the winning symbol (per ordinary symbol) per ordinary symbol. It is necessary to open the electric accessory 640a with a probability of 1/20.

That is, in the case where the gaming state is the "time saving (special 1)" state, the player will play the game while expecting that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a hit. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the ordinary symbol whose fluctuation is started during the time saving state is stopped during the time saving state and the operation of the electric accessory 640a is started, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed. Since it is set to have an opening pattern (long opening) that is advantageous to the player, the universal figure fluctuation starts when the game state is not the time saving state (for example, the big hit state), and the electric motor is operated during the time saving state. When the operation of the accessory 640a is started, or when the universal figure variation is started during the time saving state and the operation of the electric accessory 640a is started after the end of the time saving state (for example, a normal state), the electric role is changed. The normal opening pattern (short opening) is executed instead of the opening pattern (long opening) in which the opening operation of the object 640a is advantageous to the player.

In the gaming machine configured in this way, if the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol on the condition that the gaming state is shifted to the time saving state. However, even though the electric accessory 640a is short-circuited and opened in spite of the time saving state as described above, it will be displayed as the main symbol even if the variation of the ordinary symbol is caused, which gives the player a feeling of distrust. There was a problem that it would end up.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the "time saving (special 1)" state is set as the game state, the variation status of the ordinary symbol is determined, the timing at which the variation of the ordinary symbol is started, and the variation of the ordinary symbol If both the timing (when winning is successful, the timing at which the electric accessory 640a is opened) is in the “time saving (special 1)” state, the state state is “state 5”. Is set, and otherwise, "state 3" is set.

Then, during the period when "state 5" is set as the effect state, the normal symbol is displayed as the main symbol, the first special symbol, the second special symbol is the sub symbol, and the second special symbol is the main reserved symbol. Is displayed (see FIG. 16(a)). In this way, in the "time saving (special 1)" state in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed for a long time (150 seconds), the symbol corresponding to the main symbol is switched from the first special symbol to the ordinary symbol. As a result, the player can easily recognize the lottery result of the normal symbol and inform the contents of the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, during the period when "state 3" is set as the effect state, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the pseudo symbol which does not correspond to any of the normal symbols is the main symbol, the first special symbol, the second special symbol. , The third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed as a subordinate symbol, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16(a)). With this configuration, it is possible to inform the contents of the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the state where the second special symbol is changing, regardless of the game state (regardless of the normal state and the time saving state), "state 4" is set as the effect state. During the period in which "state 4" is set as the effect state, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed as the main symbol (see FIG. 17(b)). Then, as shown in FIG. 14, when the “state 5” is set as the effect state, when the lottery result of the changing first special symbol is a specific result (for example, a big hit), When the remaining variation time of one special symbol becomes a predetermined period or less, "state 6" is set as the effect state.

During the period in which "state 6" is set as this effect state, from the variable display mode in which the main symbol is the third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol executed in "state 5", the first special symbol is selected by lottery. The pseudo symbol based on the result is variably displayed as the main symbol. By doing so, it is possible to secure a period for suggesting to the player the lottery result of the first special symbol that has been won in the jackpot. Therefore, "state 5" is set, the jackpot game of the first special symbol is suddenly started from the state in which the variable display mode in which the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is the main symbol is displayed, and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the problem that the person is confused.

In the present embodiment, the timing at which the effect state is shifted from "state 5" to "state 6" is the timing at which the variation of the normal symbol is executed. As a result, the transition of the effect state can be performed without a feeling of strangeness.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state and the lottery result of the first special symbol is the small hit, the specific effect for the small hit is configured to be executed (see FIG. 22 ). This game state is a normal state, and when the small hit game based on the first special symbol is executed, "state 2" is set as the effect state.

During the period when "state 2" is set as this effect state, in the special effect for small hits, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the pseudo symbol that does not correspond to any of the ordinary symbols are variably displayed as the main symbol. To be done. The pseudo symbol that is variably displayed in this case is a pseudo symbol that is variably displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hitting game. That is, the timing at which this pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, a grid) is a predetermined period before the timing when the second variable winning device 650 is opened, that is, the predetermined stop display mode is displayed. It is a timing at which the ball fired after being played can enter the second variable 650, and the player has the effect of thinking that the second variable winning device 650 is opened based on the pseudo-display being stopped. Executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the small hitting game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened, a small hitting game (a ball easily passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3)) which is advantageous to the player, and a disadvantage. It has a small hit game that becomes, and the type of the stop display mode of the pseudo symbol that is variably displayed during the small hit game is set depending on the type of the small hit game being executed. For example, as a stop display mode of the pseudo symbol corresponding to the timing when the second variable winning device 650 is opened at a timing when the ball can pass through the specific region, a specific stop display mode (for example, the specific number (7)) Eye) is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, by the variable display of the pseudo symbol executed during the small hit game, the type of the small hit game and the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 can be grasped, so that the player can You can entertain the small hit game.

Next, a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 23. In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the variation status and the hold status of each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) Then, the display control for changing the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main symbol displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. By configuring in this way, in the gaming machine designed so that the symbol lottery (lottery of the first special symbol, lottery of the second special symbol, lottery of the normal symbol) that should be noted according to the game state is different, the game It is possible to easily inform the player whether or not the game result is advantageous to the player by simply grasping the display result of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and to the player. An easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided.

FIG. 15(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the gaming state is a time saving state and the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is started. is there. In the present embodiment, since the right-handed game is a game that is advantageous to the player during the time saving state, guidance for guiding the game method in the guide display area Dm4 formed on the upper left side of the first display area Dm. The word "right-handed" is displayed as a display. In the central portion of the first display area Dm, a universal symbol main symbol Dmc having a third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol as the main symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the ordinary symbol. Further, on the left side of the first display area Dm, a main reserved symbol display area Dm5 for displaying the reserved storage number of the second special symbol as a main reserved symbol is formed. In the state shown in FIG. 15A, the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is "0".

The second display area Dn1 formed on the upper right side of the first display area Dm has a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and the second display area Dn2 has a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. However, in the third display area Dn3, the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed as a subordinate symbol, respectively, and the corresponding symbols are changing in the second display region Dn1 and the second display region Dn3. Therefore, the third symbol (subordinate symbol) is variably displayed, and the third symbol (subordinate symbol) is stopped and displayed in the second display area Dn2 to show that the corresponding symbol has not changed.

As for the display mode of the subordinate symbols displayed in the second display areas Dn1 to Dn3, the display mode corresponding to whether or not the corresponding symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) are changing. If Further, as the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol, it is sufficient to understand that it has not changed (stopped), and as shown in the second display area Dn2 of FIG. May be displayed in a stopped state, or may be a display mode in which the stopped display state of the previous variable display is displayed as it is.

Then, in the second display area Dn4, the number "3" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved memories (reserved ball number) of the first special symbol is three, and in the second display area Dn5. , The number "0" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol is 0 (the state in which the reserved memory is not acquired), and the second display In the area Dn6, the number "4" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the normal symbols is four.

As the display mode for indicating the number of reserved memories (reserved sphere number) of each symbol displayed in the second display areas Dn4 to Dn6, the number of reserved memories of each symbol is specifically shown as in the present embodiment. You may use a display mode that shows the value with numbers, or a display mode that shows only the presence or absence of the reserved storage of each symbol (for example, "○" when there is a reserved storage, "-" when there is no reserved storage). You may use. In this case, the number of pending storages may be suggested by changing the color of the display mode of "O" indicating that there is a pending storage. A display mode that abstractly suggests the number of pending storages may be used.

In the state shown in FIG. 15(a), the first special symbol performs a variation of a variation time of 150 seconds, and the second special symbol does not vary, so that the second display area Dn1 has the first variation. The subordinate symbol corresponding to the special symbol is variably displayed, and "-" indicating that the subordinate symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not variably displayed is displayed in the second display area Dn2.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds formed below the first display area Dm, “150 seconds” is displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 as a time display for indicating the remaining period of the time saving state. In the second sub-display area Ds2 on the left side of the display area Ds1, "Countdown!!" is displayed as a guidance display for informing the player that the remaining time period in the time saving state is being subtracted. In the present embodiment, as the remaining period displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1, the remaining period of the fluctuation period (150 seconds) of Toku-zu 1 during the time saving state is calculated, and the calculated value is displayed. Therefore, the accurate period until the time saving state ends can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can play the game with peace of mind until the period elapses. However, a different value may be displayed as the remaining period display displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1, for example, a value with the upper limit of the remaining period of the fluctuation period (150 seconds) of Toku-zu 1 during the time saving state. May be set at random and displayed such that the value is subtracted.

In this case, until the displayed value becomes 0, the difference between the value indicating the remaining fluctuation period of Toku-zu 1 and the value set at random is added and displayed, or the displayed value is displayed as "????". You can change the display to. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time-saving state continues, and it is possible to allow the player to play the game while being thrilled.

FIG. 15(b) is a state in which the game state is a time-saving state, and 40 seconds have elapsed (from the state shown in FIG. 15(a)) since the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) was started. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in. As shown in FIG. 15(b), the normal main symbol Dmc is stopped and displayed in a mode (display mode of "555") of notifying that the winning has been won in the lottery of the normal symbol, and the first display area Dm. On the lower right side of, the electric accessory 640a is long opened by the winning of the normal symbol, and the guide display for notifying that the ball can enter the second entrance 640 is displayed.

Further, “110 seconds” is displayed as the remaining time in the time saving state in the first sub display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, and the ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 in the second sub display area Ds2. A "charge time" indicating that the electric accessory 640a is in a long opening operation is displayed. Then, in the second display area Ds3, a stop display mode (“XX”) is displayed to indicate that the normal symbol is won.

In this way, while the gaming state is in a time-saving state, while the fluctuation of special map 1 is being executed, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (general symbol) is the symbol that the player should pay the most attention to. The lottery result of the universal figure is displayed using the symbol Dmc. Therefore, it is possible to provide a display that is easy for the player to understand.

In the present embodiment, the display position of each main symbol (special figure 1 main symbol, special figure 2 main symbol, general figure main symbol, pseudo main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm, and the display mode, Mainly because the stop display mode for showing the specific lottery result (for example, winning) that is the same and the lottery result of the symbol is advantageous to the player is also the same stop display mode (for example, grid pattern), Even if the target design of the design is changed corresponding to the game state, it is configured so that the player can execute the effect display (effect variation display) without feeling uncomfortable. As a configuration, the display position and the display mode may be different for each main symbol, and if the lottery result of the symbol is a different stop display mode for showing a specific lottery result (for example, winning) that is advantageous to the player, You may let me.

FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a state after the game state is a time saving state and a ball enters the second ball inlet 640 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1). As shown in FIG. 16A, when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a display indicating that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 is displayed at the upper center of the first display area Dm. The word "charge completed" is displayed. Then, in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5, a display mode (black circle in the figure) indicating that the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol has become "1" is displayed. In this state, the number "1" is displayed in the second display area Dn5 as a display mode indicating that the number of the reserved memories of the second special symbol is one.

In the present embodiment, one ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 640 as a condition for closing the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is won during the time saving and the electric accessory 640a is in the long open state. After the operation of the ball or the electric accessory 640a is started, 11 seconds (total opening time of 6 seconds) has been set, and in this figure, one ball enters the second entrance 640, Since the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed and the next normal symbol variation state is being executed, the general symbol main symbol Dmc is variably displayed in the central portion of the first display area Dm. In addition, “100 seconds” is displayed as the remaining period of the time saving state in the first sub display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, at the time when one reserved memory of the second special symbol is acquired, after the end of the time saving state (after the stop of the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is changing), The variable display of 2 special symbols is started, and it is designed so that it is possible to win a symbol or V winning with a high probability. Furthermore, after the jackpot game executed based on the lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving state is always given, so that the chance to obtain the reserved memory of the second special symbol comes again. In addition, one time saving state (during the change of the first special symbol), when a plurality of reserved storage of the second special symbol is acquired, the jackpot game is executed as many as the acquired number Has been done. Therefore, in the time saving state, by displaying "the reserved memory of the second special symbol" most expected by the player as the main reserved symbol on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. it can.

In the present embodiment, as a display mode of the main reserved symbols, a maximum of four “black circles” are configured to be displayed in correspondence with the number of reserved memories, but other configurations may be used, for example, In order to effectively notify whether or not the continuous game mode is continued (whether or not the second special symbol is held and stored), the display mode of the main holding symbol corresponding to the first holding storage of the second special symbol is the other main holding. It may be different from the display mode of the design. In this case, as the display mode, the main hold design corresponding to the first storage memory of the second special design is emphasized more than other main hold designs by changing the size, color, shape and pattern of the main hold design. It may be displayed, or may be displayed in a position different from other main reserved symbols only for the main reserved symbol corresponding to the first reserved memory of the second special symbol. Further, instead of changing the display mode of the main reserved symbol, the mode (display mode of the background image) on the display area side in which the main reserved symbol is displayed may be changed. Further, only when the first reserved memory of the second special symbol is acquired, it may be notified by the voice output means or the light emitting means.

FIG. 16B is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the game state is a time saving state and the variation period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 1 second remaining. In this state, the main symbol is the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the pseudo effect symbol which does not correspond to the display of the normal symbol is displayed in the center of the first display area Dm as the pseudo main symbol Dmb. This pseudo main symbol Dmb is temporarily stopped and displayed in a rocking state until the period when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped (until the remaining period display of the first sub display area Ds1 becomes “0 second”). ..

This pseudo effect design is the game state is a time saving state, and, at the timing when the variation of the ordinary symbol is started (the timing when "state 3" is set as the effect state) when the variation period exceeds the remaining time reduction period. It is what is displayed. With such a configuration, when the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the ordinary symbol whose variation period exceeds the remaining short time period is displayed as the universal symbol main symbol Dmc, even if the universal symbol main symbol Dmc is hit Even if the display is stopped in the display mode, the problem that the electric accessory 640a is opened in a short circuit and gives the player a feeling of distrust of the effect can be suppressed.

Further, the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol whose fluctuation period is longer than the remaining short-term period is displayed as the general-purpose main symbol Dmc, and the display of the general-purpose main symbol Dmc is interrupted at the timing when the time saving state ends ( It is possible to switch to another main symbol display), but if you change the display of the main symbol that is used for the player to gaze at the display contents halfway, it will give the player a large discomfort. There's a problem. By using the configuration described above, such a problem can be solved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the pseudo effect symbol, the display mode showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed. Therefore, in accordance with the timing when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped, the pseudo effect symbol is changed. Only by making the swinging state (temporary stop state) completely stopped, it is possible to smoothly display the lottery result of the first special symbol (see FIG. 17(a)). In addition, when the temporarily stopped main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb) is temporarily stopped in the display mode showing the hit, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit, so the player is surely given a privilege. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem of giving the player distrust of the display mode (display result) of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, you may use the structure other than the structure which displays a pseudo production design during the period which displays the pseudo production design as a main design demonstrated in this embodiment (during the period when "state 3" is set as a production state). For example, during the period, it is possible to execute an effect that fuels the end of the time saving state without displaying any of the main symbols. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the universal symbol main symbol Dmc corresponding to the ordinary symbol in which the variable period longer than the remaining short time period is set from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player feels distrust.

In the state shown in FIG. 16(b), the pseudo main symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the ordinary symbol lottery result is displayed in the second display area Dn3. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode (“◯×”) indicating that it has come off. In this way, the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol is within a predetermined period (for example, within 2 seconds) from the fluctuation stop timing of the special figure 1 (end timing of the time saving state), and the lottery result of the normal symbol is missed. In the case of, the effect display using the pseudo main symbol Dmb is executed.

In FIG. 16(b), the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 displays a display mode showing that the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is 2, so after the time saving state ends, the second special symbol Will start to fluctuate. In order to guide the player to that effect, "Soon to be the charge release time!" is displayed above the first display area Dm. This "charge release time" indicates a period in which a jackpot corresponding to the number of the second special symbols that are stored in reserve is executed.

Then, when the charge release time is entered, as shown in FIG. 17A, "charge release time entry" is displayed in the information of the first display area Dm, and the special symbol 1 main symbol Dma is stopped and displayed. The normal symbol that is displayed in a variable manner at this timing (time saving end timing), that is, the variation that starts during the time saving state is started, and the stop timing of the variation is after the time saving ends, the second display area as a subordinate symbol. Since it is displayed on Dn3, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned inconvenience when the player shows the variable display of the universal figure main symbol Dmc.

Next, when the charge release time is started, as shown in FIG. 17B, the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd is variably displayed in the first display area Dm. In this case, since the variation of the second special symbol is started, the display mode indicating the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved symbols) of the special figure 2 displayed in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 is updated, and the remaining one is reserved. A display mode showing the number of memories is displayed. Further, in the second display area Dn, the subordinate symbols corresponding to Toku-zu 1 are displayed in the second display area Dn1 in the mode in which they are stopped and displayed as the main symbol in FIG. 17A, and in the second display area Dn2. Special figure 2 fluctuation is displayed, in the second display area Dn3 the general figure fluctuation is displayed with the subordinate design.

In the present embodiment, when the variation of Toku-zu 2 is executed, it is designed so that it is easy to win the big hit or the small hit (100% win). , It is not necessary for the player to pay attention to the fluctuation of the universal figure. Therefore, while the special figure 2 is changed, by displaying the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd as the main symbol, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In the present embodiment, the variation time of Toku-zu 2 is set to 2 seconds in both the normal state and the time saving state. This period of 2 seconds is shorter than the shortest period which is usually set as the variation time of the symbol. As a result, during the period in which the special figure 2 is fluctuating, execution and suspension of the general figure fluctuation are suppressed without straddling a plurality of game states. As a result, it is possible to prevent an extra effect from being generated while the special figure 2 is changing. In addition, with such a configuration, when the special figure 2 changes during the time saving state, the hit variation of the universal figure is executed and stopped during the special figure 2 changing period (during time reduction), It is possible to prevent the electric accessory 640a from opening and increase the holding of the special figure 2 during the special figure 2 changing period (during shortening of working hours), thereby providing the player with excessive payout. Can be suppressed.

In addition, the variable period of the normal symbol and the variable period of special figure 2 are configured to be selectable from a plurality of numbers, and only when the selected variable period satisfies a predetermined condition, during the special symbol 2 variable period (time saving ), the electric accessory 640a may be opened. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and to have the game played enthusiastically.

Next, when the special figure 2 variation shown in FIG. 17(b) is won by small hit and is stopped and displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 18(a) is displayed. That is, in the first display area Dm, the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd is stopped and displayed in a display mode (“555”) indicating a small hit, and is opened in the lower right area of the first display area Dm during the small hit game. A guide display for guiding the player to the location of the second variable winning device 650 to be displayed is displayed. Then, "Aim for V" is displayed in the second sub display area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds.

Then, during the small hitting game shown in FIG. 18A, when the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) in the second variable winning device 650, and the big hitting game is started, FIG. The jackpot effect screen shown in) is displayed. In this big hit production screen, the main symbol is not displayed in the main display area Dm, and the third symbol corresponding to each symbol (special 1, special 2, ordinary figure) is in the second display region Dm, as a subordinate symbol. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to entertain the jackpot effect without paying attention to the variable display of the symbols (special 1, special 2, general figure) being executed to the player.

Further, in the jackpot production, "main charge bonus first time" is displayed in the main display area Dm as an indication of the number of jackpots executed during the consecutive villa mode, and below the jackpot currently being executed. “ROUND1” is displayed as the number of rounds indicating the number of rounds. As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of round numbers (2, 5, 7, 10, 15 rounds) are set in the jackpot game. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot can be executed after the end of the time saving state by the number of the special figure 2 holding numbers that are held and stored during the special drawing 1 variation (150 seconds variation) during the time saving state.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment configured in this way, a display for a plurality of jackpots executed during the continuous vacation state is aggregated as a period from the start to the end of the continuous vacation state as one period. It is configured to be able to display a villa period cumulative display and a specific period cumulative display that totals only jackpot games based on the jackpot rights (that is, the number of pending special diagrams 2) that have been acquired in one special map 1 fluctuation. In the example diagram shown in FIG. 18A, the round number display area Dm6 formed on the lower right side of the first display area Dm corresponds to the number of rounds for the jackpot game within the specific period described above. The number display mode is displayed.

In the number-of-rounds display area Dm6, it is determined how many rounds of jackpot games are cumulatively executed based on the pending storage of the special figure 2 obtained by one variation of the special figure 1, and the determination result A display mode that suggests is displayed. Specifically, based on the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation (150 second fluctuation) during the time saving game, the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension (that is, stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a described later). The winning information regarding the special figure 2 is extracted to determine the number of jackpots that can be executed and the number of rounds. Then, the display mode including at least the determination result is displayed in the round number display area Dm6.

The number-of-rounds display mode displayed in the number-of-rounds display area Dm6 is an execution-confirmed number-of-rounds display mode (indicated by a solid circle in FIG. 18B) that indicates the number of rounds that are determined to be executed. , A running round display mode showing the currently running round (displayed by a black circle in FIG. 18(b)) and a jackpot right acquired within a specific period (special figure 1 fluctuation (150 seconds fluctuation) during a time saving game) (A big hit game period that can be executed in), a specific period total round number suggestion display mode (indicated by a dotted circle in FIG. 18B) that indicates the total number of rounds.

By executing the jackpot effect configured in this way, the player, the special figure 2 holding ball number displayed in the main holding symbol display area Dm5, and the specific period total round displayed in the round number display area Dm6 While watching the number suggestion display mode, the jackpot game can be enjoyed while predicting the type (round number) of the jackpot game to be executed in the future.

Further, as described above, the execution confirmation round number display mode and the in-execution round display mode are displayed in the round number display area Dm6, so that the currently executed jackpot game round is within the specific period. Of the total number of rounds that may be executed (the number of rounds displayed as the total number of rounds suggestive display mode for a specific period), or the number of rounds that have been confirmed to be executed (execution confirmed round number display mode), The player can easily understand which area is around. Therefore, it is possible to easily predict the number of remaining rounds to be executed within the specific period.

Note that, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18(b), the "charge bonus first time" is displayed as the number of consecutive vacation games, which indicates the number of jackpots executed during the continuous vacation mode. Show the number of consecutive holidays, the number of big hits (number of consecutive holidays within a certain period) executed based on the jackpot right acquired during the special period (variation of special figure 1 (150 seconds variation) during the time saving game) described above It is also possible to display both the number of consecutive villas and the number of consecutive villas within a specific period. A means for calculating the number of times the special map 1 fluctuation (150 second fluctuation) is executed during the time saving game is provided, and the total number of jackpots in the condominium mode, the number of times of rushing into a specific period, and the number of times of rushing within a specific period of time are executed. It may be configured to display the number of jackpots to be played.By configuring in this way, not only to enjoy the display mode during the jackpot game, but also to grasp the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 and play in the future. Furthermore, after calculating the number of times described above, the average number of jackpots within a specific period executed within one specific period may be displayed.

By displaying the number of average jackpots in the specific period, if the average number of jackpots in the specific period is low, is the drawing result of the ordinary symbol biased to the wrong, or is the condition that the ordinary symbol lottery is executed It is possible to refer to future games while analyzing whether the number of passing balls to the gate 67 was small or not and analyzing possible causes.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode (1 round, 1 display mode) corresponding to the number of rounds is displayed as the display mode displayed in the number-of-rounds display area Dm6. The display mode displayed in the area Dm6 is not limited to this, and may be any display mode in which the player can predict the number of rounds. For example, the size and color of the display mode may be changed according to a predetermined rule in correspondence with the number of rounds.

Further, in the present embodiment, "ROUND1" is displayed as the number-of-rounds display indicating the number of big hits currently being executed, but this number-of-rounds display does not show the number of rounds for one jackpot game. Instead, the number of rounds may be added to the jackpot game executed within the specific period and displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp and store the game result in the continuous game mode. In the second sub display area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds, “5, 10, 20” indicating the number of times of execution in a plurality of jackpot games executed within a specific period is displayed.

When the second big hit game is started by the time saving fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation) executed after the big hit game shown in FIG. 18B is finished, the second big hit game shown in FIG. 19A is made. The inside display screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 19(a), in the state where the second jackpot game is started, the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 is displayed with a display mode indicating that the number of remaining reserved memories is "0". In the main display area Dm, “2nd charge bonus” is displayed as the number of times of continuous play to indicate that the current big hit is the second big hit in the continuous play mode. Then, in the number-of-rounds display area Dm6, the display mode of the number of confirmed execution rounds for 20 rounds in total is displayed. That is, in FIG. 18B, the number of rounds displayed as the total number of rounds suggestive display mode for the specific period is changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode by executing the jackpot game (second time) this time. ing. In this way, by changing the specific period total round number suggestion display mode to the execution confirmed round number display mode, it is possible for the player to execute the jackpot game with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is started, in order to inform the number of rounds of the jackpot game of this time, of the round numbers displayed as the specific period total round number suggestion display mode, the jackpot of this time The configuration corresponding to the number of rounds of the game is changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode, but other configurations may be used, for example, at the timing when the jackpot game is started, the execution confirmed round number is displayed. The mode is displayed as it is, and when a predetermined condition (for example, execution of a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 during the big hit game, or the big hit game reaches the third round) during the big hit game, a specific period total The round number suggestion display mode may be changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode. Thereby, in order to grasp the number of execution confirmed rounds even during the jackpot game, it is possible to make the player interested in the production.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been shown in which all the specific period total round number suggestion display modes are changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode, but other configurations are also possible, for example, the specific period total round number suggestion display mode. It may be possible to change only a part of the execution confirmation round number display mode, or to change the specific period total round number suggestion display mode to the execution confirmation round number display mode at a plurality of timings during the jackpot game. You may As a result, the jackpot game can be executed while always providing a sense of expectation.

Next, referring to FIG. 19B to FIG. 20B, the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period of Toku-zu 1) of the time saving state (time saving state where the Toku-zu 1 fluctuation is being executed) is a predetermined condition ( The effect display (battle effect) executed when the remaining 10 seconds) is satisfied will be described. This effect display (battle effect) is an effect for notifying the player that the extended game mode will end if there is no reserved memory of special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state. As described above, this battle effect is executed when the remaining time of the time saving state is within 10 seconds and the special figure 2 hold is "0". Then, when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during this battle effect and the reserved memory of special figure 2 is generated, a battle victory effect for executing the continuous game mode is executed. (See FIG. 20( a )) If the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during this battle effect, the battle defeat effect is executed to indicate that the extended game mode continues ( See FIG. 20(b)). In addition, in the present embodiment, when the battle effect is executed, the effect that finally loses the battle is set. This is because the battle effect period is set to a period (10 seconds) in which the normal figure fluctuation can be changed 3 or 4 times, and the probability of causing the ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the battle effect is: This is because the probability is lower than the probability that the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during the battle production. That is, since it is sufficient to execute the control for changing the effect contents only when an event with a low probability occurs, the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect result of the battle effect is made different depending on whether or not the special figure 2 is held, but other elements may be included. For example, if the lottery result of Toku-zu 1 that fluctuates during a short period of time is a big hit, the battle win effect may be executed at the timing when the lottery result of Toku-zu 1 is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect to the player who predicts the outcome of the battle effect based on only the content (presence or absence of storage) of the main reserved symbol display area Dm5.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 is updated at the timing when the reserved storage of special figure 2 occurs, but as another configuration, for example, during battle production, Even if the hold storage occurs, the display mode of the main hold symbol display area Dm5 may not be updated, or the main hold symbol display area Dm5 may not be displayed when the battle effect is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 while the battle effect is being executed, and to enhance the effect of the battle effect. You can

In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not the regular symbol is valid based on the winning information of the regular symbol that is stored on hold, and change the content of the battle effect (the opponent, the order of attacks, the type of attack, etc.) based on the determination result. It is good to configure. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect contents of the battle effect. Furthermore, a special effect may be provided that is executed only when a plurality of special figure 2 suspensions are acquired during the battle effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21A, description will be given of effect contents executed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired up to the upper limit during the special figure 1 time saving fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 21(a), when the special figure 2 hold is acquired up to the upper limit, it indicates that the special figure 2 hold is stored up to the upper limit (4 pieces) in the main hold symbol display area Dm5. The main hold design is displayed in the display mode (display mode with four black circles in the figure). Then, in the center of the first display area Dm, a message is displayed to congratulate that the special figure 2 hold has reached the upper limit. After that, as shown in FIG. 21B, a privilege effect (a lively effect using a character) unrelated to the lottery result of each symbol is executed in the first display area Dm.

Then, in the first sub-display area Ds1, the character "??" that hides the short-term remaining period is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which gaming state is in the period in which the above-described privilege effect is executed.

Here, during special time 1 hour shortening fluctuation, the lottery of the normal symbol is repeated, the electric prize 640a is opened by winning the normal symbol, and the ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 640. Then, a game is executed to obtain the reserved memory of the second special symbol. While such a game is being executed, since the player pays the most attention to the lottery result of the normal symbols, the general symbol main symbol Dmc is displayed as the main symbol of the third symbol display device 81 ( When the special figure 2 hold as shown in FIG. 15( b)) and FIG. 21( a) is stored up to the upper limit (4 pieces), the special figure 2 hold cannot be stored any more. , The player no longer pays attention to whether or not the normal symbol is won. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 21A, the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn3 as a subordinate symbol.

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the third symbol corresponding to the symbol that the player does not gaze at from being displayed as the main symbol. In addition, it is possible to suppress a defect in the case where the universal figure main symbol Dmc is displayed in the state of FIG. 21A and is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a description will be given of the effect contents when the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed in the normal game state wins the small hit. 22A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen immediately after the small hit game is started, and FIG. 22B is a specific timing during the small hit game (second variable winning device 650). FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen at the opening timing of FIG.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, when the small hitting game based on the lottery result of Toku-zu 1 is executed, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed in the first display area Dm. This pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed so as to suggest the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hitting game, and the sub display area Ds for explaining the game contents during the small hitting game. The characters "Chance if the symbols (pseudo main symbols Dmb) are aligned" are displayed (see FIG. 22(a)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 22B, when the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (“444” in FIG. 22B), it is displayed on the lower right side of the first display area Dm. A guide display mode for guiding the player to the game aiming at the second variable winning device 650 is displayed, and the character "Aim for V" for explaining the game content is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hit game based on the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is variably displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning a prize device 650 is the first. 1 is displayed in the display area Dm. Thereby, the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650 that is executed a plurality of times during the small hit game can be made to appear to be executed based on the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb.

Further, in the state where the small hit game based on the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the main reserved symbol for displaying the number of reserved symbols by emphasizing the player on the third symbol display device 81 is not displayed. I am configuring. As a result, based on the variable display of the pseudo main symbol that is not related to each symbol (special diagram 1, special diagram 2, public figure), the reserved symbol display indicating the number of reserved memories of each symbol described above is not variable. It can be made difficult for the player to notice. In addition, as a configuration other than this, a pseudo reserved symbol display (pseudo reserved main symbol) that is changed based on the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Furthermore, the pseudo main symbol Dmb also performs a variable display that is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode (for example, a stagger) indicating a deviation during the small hitting game, different from the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650. To be done. Thereby, even if the interval of the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 is wide, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be continuously displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is stopped and displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650, the stop display mode is the corresponding opening timing of the second variable winning device 650, which is advantageous to the player. It is configured to be different depending on whether or not the timing (the opening timing at which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3)), for example, the stop of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing advantageous to the player. As the display mode, for example, a display mode in which a specific same numeral is stopped, such as “777”, is set. As a result, it is possible to grasp the opening timing of the second variable winning a prize device 650 and the advantage degree of the opening timing by the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb executed during the small hitting game, and thus to the player. It is possible to make the effect display contents interesting.

Next, an error display displayed on the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when a right-handed game is played in a normal state where a left-handed game is executed. As shown in FIG. 23A, in the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed, when it is determined that the right-handed game has been performed, the main symbol displayed in the first display area Dm is covered. Thus, the notification display area Dm7 is formed, and the characters "Please return to the left" are displayed. This allows the player to correct the game content.

In the present embodiment, when the error display of FIG. 23(a) detects that the right-handed game has been executed (the ball has passed through the through gate 67) during the normal state in which the left-handed game has been executed. Although it is configured to be executed in the, the ball passes through the through gate 67 immediately after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state in the state in which the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed is set as the game state. Even if it is detected that the error is displayed, the error display should not be executed. Specifically, just before the transition from the time-saving state to the normal state (just before the end of the time-saving state), the variation period of the ordinary symbol started, and the variation (lottery) result that is executed when the result is a hit It is advisable to set a grace period during which the error display is not performed during the operation period of the accessory 640a or a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the time saving state ends.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the error display from being executed even if the ball shot in the game area immediately before the end of the time saving state passes through the through gate 67 after the end of the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play, which had been actively playing until just before the end of the time saving state, from decreasing.

In the case of using such a configuration, when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the above-mentioned grace period, it is preferable to execute a privilege effect different from the normal one, for example, , It is advisable to execute a revival effect that indicates that the state advantageous for the player (the condominium mode) has been restored. As a result, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game until the end.

Next, the display content displayed during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the time saving state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the electric accessory release operation (during long release) in the time saving state. In the present embodiment, by continuing the right-handed game during the time saving state, it is possible to immediately insert a ball into the second entrance 640 if the electric accessory 640a is long open. The game board 13 is configured. In addition, the electric accessory 640a that is to be opened for a long time is opened for 3 seconds as a first opening period, then a closing period of 5 seconds is set, and then an opening period of 3 seconds (second opening period) is set again.

The display screen shown in FIG. 23B is displayed when the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640 during the first opening period during the opening operation (during long opening) of the electric accessory 640a. It is what is done. In other words, if the player normally plays the right-handed game, the first board is surely put into the second entrance 640 during the first opening period. When the ball is not entered into the second entrance 640 during the opening period, it is considered that a normal right-handed game is not being executed, so a display for prompting a right-handed game is displayed in the notification display area Dm7. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, even if the right-handed game is started after seeing the contents displayed in the notification display area Dm7, each period is set so that the ball can be inserted into the second entrance 640 during the second opening period. Is set. Specifically, it is designed so that the period from when the ball is shot in the right-handed game to when the ball reaches the second ball entrance 640 (electric accessory 640a) is about 2 seconds, The closing period provided between the first opening period (3 seconds) and the second opening period (3 seconds) is set to be 5 seconds. Therefore, by performing a right-handed game within 3 seconds after the closing period is started, it becomes possible to allow the ball to enter the second entrance 640.

In the present embodiment, the first opening period and the second opening period are set to the same number of seconds, and the means for measuring the elapsed period of the first opening period and the means for measuring the elapsed period of the second opening period. Although it is made common, for example, the second opening period may be set longer than the first opening period. Thereby, based on the display for urging a right-handed hit to be displayed in the notification display area Dm7, when the right-handed game is played, the ball can be more surely put into the second entrance 640. it can.

Further, in the present embodiment, the closing period is set to 5 seconds, but a closing time longer than that (for example, 30 seconds) may be set. In this case, as a condition for ending the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, if the right hitting game is normally executed, the number of balls that can enter the second entrance 640 during the first opening period ( For example, one ball may be entered as the ending condition. As a result, even if the closing period executed during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (the closing period executed after the lapse of the first opening period) is lengthened, the player who normally plays the right-handed game is As a result, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be completed before the closing period is executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmitting/receiving circuit in order to instruct the sub control unit such as the payout control unit 111 and the voice lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

In the main controller 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 24) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 24, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, in order to perform jackpot lottery, setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, etc., the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Used in.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery, and the selection of the jackpot type (jackpot symbol) The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type counter C3 used for selecting the stop type, the small hit type counter C5 used for selecting the small hit type (small hit symbol), and the selection for the variation pattern And a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Moreover, the second per random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second per random number counter C4.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 53). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, in the RAM 203, the first ball entrance 64 (the left first ball entrance 64a, the right first ball entrance 64b (hereinafter referred to as the first ball entrance 64 when both are shown). )) special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for winning and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored for winning for the second ball entrance 640 are provided. There is. In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are respectively provided with up to four holding balls, and a total of up to eight holding balls can be stored. Therefore, when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, or during the period when the special symbol can be drawn by lottery, such as when the special symbol jackpot is not being played, each counter value is a special symbol when the ball wins the first entrance 64. When the sphere is stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the second ball entrance 640 is won, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic display). Various settings and control processes for executing are performed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, for variably displaying the second special symbol. Various settings and control processing are executed.

In the present embodiment, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol set the upper limit of the number of holdings (holding storage number) to four, but the upper limit of the number of holdings corresponding to each symbol is Not limited to this, different values may be set, or only one special symbol may be held.

On the other hand, during the period during which the special symbol cannot be selected by lottery, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball is the first entrance 64 or If the number of holdings for the winning entrance (starting entrance) is less than the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment) when the second entrance 640 is won, each counter value is acquired. Then, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning ball entrance is stored. Further, when the number of holdings for the winning entrance is equal to or larger than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 in this embodiment) are not acquired. Only prize balls are treated as invalid balls paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, but is not limited to this and is less than four (for example, 3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). Further, the upper limit value may not be provided.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 53).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, it is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it coincides with the value of the random number to be a jackpot defined in 202a, it is determined as a jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, the first random number table 202a, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 used in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 used in the lottery of the second special symbol are provided. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3," it is determined to be a small hit.

On the other hand, in the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0", and if "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is "1 to 299", and if it is "1 to 299", it is determined to be a small hit.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a jackpot for the special symbol. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a special symbol big hit time. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. As described above, there is one value of the first per random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value “0” is stored in the per first random number table 202a as described above. In this way, the total number of random number values is 300, the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 1, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/300". Further, the value of the first per random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the first special symbol is 3, and the value of the first per random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the second special symbol is 299, so the first The probability of a small hit of the special symbol is "1/100", and the probability of a small hit of the second special symbol is "299/300".

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 27(a)). The Rukoto. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after a reach is generated, it is different from the symbol that the reach is applied as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: "reach loss" (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) where the symbol stops, and "complete loss" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) in which the reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a normal state table and a time saving state table, and the range of the random number value set for each outage stop type is changed according to the table. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol or in the time saving state.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 53) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 29 and FIG. 30) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided inside.

The fluctuation pattern table 202d defines a plurality of data tables for selecting a fluctuation pattern (see FIGS. 29 and 30). In this fluctuation pattern table 202d, a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables respectively corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set, and for each of them, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to each of the game state and the result of the judgment. The table is set. Details of each fluctuation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting opening (through gate) 67. When it is detected, it is acquired and stored in the universal figure execution area of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 26C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4. However, when it matches with the value of the random number defined as the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol (second symbol). For example, in the second random number table 202c, there are twelve random number values that are normally winning symbols, and the range is "0 to 11". The total number of random number values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random number values to be a hit is 12, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is "12/240 (1/20)". It becomes.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a normal state and a time saving state can be set as a game state, and a variation time of a normal symbol or a second when a normal symbol is hit depending on the game state. The opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the ball entrance 640 is different, and the ball is easier to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the time saving state than in the normal state. As a result, when the gaming state is the normal state, a game (left striking game) that aims at the first ball entrance 64 (the left first ball entrance 64a) is performed, and when the game state is the time saving state , A game (a right-handed game) in which the second entrance 640 is aimed at can be performed.

In a normal state, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for 4 seconds on the second symbol display device 83. It Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 11”, it is determined as winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened (short open) for “0.1 seconds×2 times”. On the other hand, in the time saving state, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device 83, and the obtained value of the second random number counter C4. Is determined to be a win in the range of "0 to 11", and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory 640a is opened (long open) only for “3 seconds×2 times”. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary electric accessory opening time and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the playability.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C4 is acquired (ordinary symbol lottery execution timing) and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 The timing at which the operation ends (the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) is configured such that the electric accessory 640a is opened long only when both are in the time saving state. Alternatively, for example, when the timing of the value of the first random number counter C4 is acquired (the timing when the lottery for the normal symbol is executed) is a time saving state, the timing at which the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends Even if (the timing when the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) is in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a may be configured to be opened for a long time, or the value of the first random number counter C4 is acquired. Even when the timing (ordinary symbol lottery is executed) is in the normal state, the timing at which the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends (the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) is The electric accessory 640a may be configured to be opened long if it is in the time saving state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see 53).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 24, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

It should be noted that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer when the power is cut off (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by elimination of power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power-off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 53) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 52). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 51) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

Next, the contents of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30. FIG. 25A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to this embodiment. The ROM 202 is provided with at least a first hit random number table 202a, a first hit type selection table 202b, a second hit random number table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, and a small hit type selection table 202e.

Next, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 26(a), in the first random number table 202a, a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 used for the lottery of the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 used for the lottery of the second special symbol. And are specified.

Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is, as shown in FIG. 26(b), for entering the first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a, right first entrance 64b). Based on the first special symbol lottery, a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a win is a table set. In the lottery for the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first per random number counter C1 is "0", and if "0", it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the obtained value of the first random number counter C1 is "1 to 3", and if the value is "1 to 3", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is “4 to 299”, it is determined that the value is out of range.

On the other hand, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is, as shown in FIG. 26(c), a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entrance into the second entrance 640. ) Is a set table. In the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first per random number counter C1 is “0”, and if “0”, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the obtained value of the first random number counter C1 is "1 to 299", and if it is "1 to 299", it is determined to be a small hit.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 26(d)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 26(d), regardless of the state of the gaming machine, when the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the per-second random number counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 11, the normal symbol is hit. To be judged.

In addition, when it is determined that the normal symbol is hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory is also displayed. 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

Here, the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment operates in the front-back direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (one of the other solenoids 209z) not shown, as described above with reference to FIG. The electric accessory 640a functions to guide the ball to enter the second entrance 640 by advancing forward (opening). On the other hand, by retracting backward (closing), the ball does not guide to the second ball entrance 640 (does not enter).

Although the details will be described later, the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment opens again for 3 seconds after a closing period of 5 seconds after the opening period of 3 seconds (first opening period) in the time saving state. When the opening operation (long opening) in which the period (second opening period) is set is executed and the time is not in the short-time state (during the normal state), after the elapse of the opening period of 0.1 seconds (first opening period) After the closing period of 0.1 seconds, the opening operation (short opening) in which the opening period (second opening period) of 0.1 seconds is set again is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game in which the player tries to enter the ball into the second ball inlet 640, even though the time saving state is not in effect (the normal condition is in effect).

In addition, the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is designed such that when one ball enters the second ball inlet 640, the ending condition of the opening operation is satisfied and the opening operation is ended. As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second ball inlet 640 by one opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, since the sphere flowing down the flow path capable of entering the second ball inlet 640 is regulated, Since it is possible to suppress the situation where a plurality of balls enter the second entrance 640 at one time, the plurality of balls enter the second entrance 640 by one opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. It is possible to further suppress the sphere.

Next, details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 27A to 27C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b.

The first hit type selection table 202b, when the big hit of the first special symbol is won, or the small hit of the first special symbol is won, the ball is in a specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (Fig. 5))) special symbol 1 for selecting the jackpot type when passing through the jackpot selection table 202b1 and the jackpot of the second special symbol, or winning the jackpot of the second special symbol, It has a special symbol 2 big hit selection table 202b2 for selecting the big hit type when the ball has passed a specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (see FIG. 5)) during a small hit game (FIG. 27 ( See a)).

As shown in FIG. 27(b), when the first special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 79", and the big hit A (7R time shortened big hit) is selected, and "580" is selected. In the case of "~99", the big hit D (16R hour short no big hit) is selected. In addition, at the time of the small hit of the first special symbol, the big hit type is selected corresponding to the small hit type described later. Specifically, when the small hit type is the small hit A, the big hit C (7R time, short, big hit) is selected, and when the small hit B is the big hit D (2R, short, no big hit) is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27(c), during the big hit of the second special symbol, regardless of the value of the first hit type counter C2 (when the value is "0 to 99"), the big hit E (15R hour-shortened big hit) ) Is selected. Moreover, at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol, the big hit type is selected corresponding to the small hit type described later. Specifically, when the small hit type is small hit C, the big hit F (5R short time with big hit) is selected, when the small hit D is big hit G (10R short time with big hit), the small hit E Is selected as the jackpot E (15R hour shortened jackpot).

In addition, in this embodiment, in each of the above jackpot types, when "time saving with jackpot" is selected, a time saving state of "one time saving time" is given after the jackpot game ends. However, the number of time saving provided after the jackpot game is not limited to this, the number of times may be set to two or more times, and a different number of time saving states are selected based on the selected jackpot type. You may do it. In addition, a different number of time saving states may be selected based on the selected jackpot type and the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot (the ball has passed the specific area). Based on the number of times that "big hit" is continuously selected, different numbers of time saving states may be selected based on the type of big hit selected at the time of winning the big hit. With such a configuration, in addition to the contents of the jackpot game (the number of rounds of the jackpot game, etc.), the contents of the privilege (the number of time saving states) given after the jackpot game can be changed, and the game during the jackpot game It is possible to make a player enthusiastically play the game while expecting what kind of privilege (time saving state) will be given after the jackpot game is over.

Further, in the present embodiment, a preset time saving number of times, by changing the special symbol, a time saving ending condition for ending the time saving state is set, but a time saving ending condition different from this embodiment is set. May be set, for example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol are respectively measured, and different end conditions may be set for the variation of each special symbol. Specifically, as a time saving end condition, the number of times the first special symbol has changed four times, or the number of times the second special symbol has changed once has been set as the time saving end condition, or the first special symbol and the first special symbol. The total number of changes with two special symbols may be four times, or the number of changes of the second special symbol may be one as a time saving end condition.

Other than that, each time a change in the special symbol is executed, a lottery may be executed to decide whether or not to end the time saving state, and the time saving state may be ended based on the lottery result, or the special symbol is predetermined. The time saving state may be terminated when the stop display is performed with the symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to complicatedly set the timing for ending the time saving state, and to let the player who is playing the time saving game play while expecting the time saving state to continue for a long time. You can In this case, at least a part of the period in which the time saving does not end may be notified to the player. As a result, there is an effect that the player can grasp a part of the period in which the time saving does not end and the player can play the game with peace of mind during the period.

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 28A to 28C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e.

The small hit type selection table 202e, the special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1 for selecting the small hit type when the small hit of the first special symbol is won, and the case of winning the small hit of the second special symbol It has a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202e2 for selecting a small hit type (see FIG. 28(a)).

As shown in FIG. 28(b), at the time of winning the small hit of the first special symbol, when the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 10," the small hit A (V passable) is selected. In the case of "11 to 99", the small hit B (V cannot pass) is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28C, at the time of winning the small hit of the second special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 9", and the small hit C (V passable) is selected. In the case of "10 to 24", the small hit D (V can be passed) is selected, and in the case of "25 to 99", the small hit E (V can be passed) is selected.

In the present embodiment, the operations of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the passage solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 are set according to the small hit type. Specifically, in the small hit game with the small hits A and C to E, the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 is operating, and the ball can enter the special discharge flow path 650e2. There is. On the other hand, in the small hit game with the small hit B, the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 is not operating. A ball cannot enter the special discharge channel 650e2. That is, the small hits A and C to E are small hits in which the big hit game can be given by passing the ball through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3), and the small hits B are small hits not given the big hit. ..

Further, in the small hit game by small hits A and B (small hit type selected by the small hit prize of the first special symbol), the V entrance solenoid 209a operates so that the opening/closing door 650f is opened for a short period of time (FIG. 10). In the small hitting game by small hitting C to E (small hitting type selected by the small hitting prize of the second special symbol), the V inlet solenoid 209a operates so that the opening/closing door 650f is opened for a long time (Fig. 11). That is, the small hits A and B are small hits in which the ball is hard to enter the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game, and the small hits C to E are the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game. It is a small hit that makes it easy for a ball to enter.

In this control example, the type of jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of small hit, and the jackpot to be given after the small hit A is the large jackpot C (7R hour short-lived big hit) and the small hit B The jackpot that will be given later will be a jackpot D (2R, short, short and big jackpot), the jackpot that will be given after the small jackpot C will be a jackpot F (5R, short and short jackpot), and the jackpot that will be given after the small jackpot D will be a jackpot It is configured so that the jackpot E that is given after the small hit E is the big jackpot E (15R hourly jackpot).

In addition, in the present control example, the type of the big hit to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of the small hit, but as a specification other than that, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is the small hit. Also, the type of jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and in the subsequent jackpot game, the ball passes through the V prize switch 650e3 so that the jackpot that has just won the jackpot is executed. May be. By doing so, the player can select a small hit to pass the V prize switch 650e3, and the interest of the game can be improved. Also, a predetermined lottery may be executed based on the fact that the ball has passed a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game, and the big hit type may be determined based on the result of the lottery. Good. As a result, the contents of the jackpot game executed depending on the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area can be made different, so that the player will be willing to play the jackpot game, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. it can.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used for determining the display mode (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the type of special symbol, the lottery result, and the game state are defined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29(a), the special pattern 1 large hit variation pattern table 202d1, the special figure 1 deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2, and the special figure 1 small hit variation pattern table 202d3. And at least a special pattern 1 time saving variation pattern table 202d4 and a special figure 2 variation pattern table 202d5.

First, referring to FIG. 29( b ), the special pattern 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202 d will be described. This special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 selects the variation pattern (variation time) when the jackpot is won, out of the variation patterns (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the normal state. And a random number value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the type (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, when the jackpot is determined as the stop type, the change pattern of the normal reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 50” as the value of the change type counter CS1, and the change pattern of “51 to 179” is set. The variation patterns of super reach (60 seconds) are associated with the range, and the variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198".

Next, with reference to FIG. 29C, the contents of the special pattern deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 will be described. This special figure 1 deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is, when the lottery result of special figure 1 is out of the fluctuation patterns (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) during the normal state. The random number value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is defined.

Specifically, when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type, the fluctuation pattern of short deviation (7 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 98” as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and “99 to The variation pattern of long deviation (10 seconds) is associated with the range of "198". In addition, when it is missed in the lottery of the first special symbol and the miss reach is determined as the stop type, various normal reach types (30 seconds) are associated with the range of “0 to 149” as the value of the variation type counter CS1. , "150 to 197" are associated with various types of super reach (60 seconds), and "198" is associated with various types of special reach (90 seconds).

Next, with reference to FIG. 29D, the contents of the special pattern 1 small hit variation pattern table 202d3 will be described. This special figure 1 small hit variation pattern table 202d3 is the first special symbol in the normal state ( Of the variation patterns (variation time) of special figure 1), the random number value (variation type counter value CS1 counter value) for determining the variation pattern (variation time) when the lottery result of special figure 1 is a small hit ) Is specified.

Specifically, when the small hit is determined as the stop type, the type of small hit (small hit A, small hit B) and the super reach variety (60 seconds) are set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is associated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, various variation patterns are selected corresponding to each stop type, and in particular, the variation time The long (for example, 90 seconds) variation pattern is set to be easily selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, if the player has been continuously variably displayed for a long period of time, isn't the player winning the jackpot? I expect to play a game. Therefore, the game result can be predicted by the period length of the set variation pattern, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 30A, the contents of the special pattern 1 time saving variation pattern table 202d4 will be described. This special figure 1 time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d42, the random number value (counter value of fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) during the time saving state It is prescribed.

Specifically, a fluctuation pattern of 150 seconds is associated regardless of the determined values of the stop type and the fluctuation type counter CS1.

FIG. 30B is a diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern table 202d5 for special figure 2. The variation pattern table 202d5 for special figure 2 defines the random number value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the normal state and the time saving state.

Specifically, when the determined stop type is a big hit, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, a short and big hit (7 seconds) is set, and when the determined stop type is a small hit, the variation type is Short and small hits (2 seconds) are associated regardless of the value of the counter CS1.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 25(b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, and a special symbol. 2 holding ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f, time saving medium counter 203g, big hit start flag 203h, big hit medium flag 203i, small hit start flag 203j, small hit medium flag 203k, V passing big hit type storage area 203m , V flag 203n, storage release flag 203p, release counter 203qa, time saving medium hit flag 203q, and other memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a first random number counter The values of C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 are stored.

More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and C5 are acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four reserves. Among the vacant areas of the areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the prize that is older in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbol lottery is performed, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, only the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored are shifted.

The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the starting winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. Since the storage method of the counter value and the like are the same as those of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Normal symbol reserve sphere storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 reserve sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserve sphere storage area 203b, one execution area and four reserve areas (reserve first area to reserve fourth) Area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is available in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas is packed into the holding area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

Special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 (starting prize) (third symbol) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time a sphere enters the first ball inlet 64 and the number of spheres of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 4 The value is incremented by 1 (see S704 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 38).

The value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of variable display holding in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding sphere number command (see S211 of FIG. 38). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the sphere itself can be acquired. Thereby, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, and the variable display holding ball number managed by the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, due to the influence of noise or the like, to the main controller 110. Even if the number of balls actually held is deviated from the number of balls held in the variable display, the deviation can be corrected by the command of the number of balls held next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to be held, and displays the number of balls to hold to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

Special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e, variable display of the special symbol (the 1st symbol) which is done with the 1st symbol indicator 37 on the basis of the entry to the 2nd entry port 640 (starting winning) (the 3rd symbol) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e, the initial value is set to zero, each time a sphere enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of spheres of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 4 One is added (see S710 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 38). The value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a maximum of 4 times the number of holding spheres (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67. Is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 and the number of spheres for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 ( (See S1104 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S905 in FIG. 45).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S1105 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1103 of FIG. 47: No). ).

The time saving counter 203g is a counter for counting the remaining time saving period (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the time saving state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. This time saving medium counter 203g is set to 1 at the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is other than "jackpot B, D" (that is, "jackpot A, C, E to G") (see S1815 in FIG. 54). .. That is, in this embodiment, when the time saving state is given after the jackpot game, the time saving state is given once.

The jackpot start flag 203h is a flag used to determine whether or not it is the jackpot start timing. This jackpot start flag 203h is set to ON when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) (see S219 in FIG. 38), and the jackpot start timing in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) 54 is referred to (step S1801 in FIG. 54), and when it is determined that it is the big hit start timing in the big hit control process, it is set to OFF (see step S1802 in FIG. 54). As a result, it is possible to execute processing according to the jackpot start timing. Although not shown in the drawings, the jackpot start timing is similarly determined in each of the control examples described above.

The big hit medium flag 203i is a flag used to determine whether or not a big hit is being made, that is, whether a big hit game is being executed. This big hit medium flag 203i is set to ON when the lottery result is a big hit in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), similarly to the above-described big hit start flag 203h (see S219 of FIG. 38). Then, the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) is referred to for determining whether or not the jackpot is in progress (see S1805 in FIG. 54), and in the jackpot control process, it is determined to be the timing of ending the jackpot. In this case, it is set to off (see S1813 in FIG. 54).

The small hit start flag 203j is a flag used to determine whether it is the start timing of the small hit. This small hit start flag 203j is set to ON in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42) executed when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38). (See S610 in FIG. 42). Then, it is referred to in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55) to determine whether it is the small hit start timing (see S1901 in FIG. 55), and the small hit start timing in the small hit control process. If it is determined to be off, it is set to off (see S1902 in FIG. 55).

The small hitting flag 203k is a flag used for determining whether or not the small hitting is in progress, that is, whether or not the small hitting game is being executed. The small hitting medium flag 203k is set to ON in the small hitting start setting process (see FIG. 42), similarly to the small hitting start flag 203j described above (see S610 of FIG. 42). Then, the small hit control process (see FIG. 55) is referred to in order to determine whether or not the small hit is in progress (S1906 in FIG. 55), and it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the end timing of the small hit. If it is turned off, it is turned off (S1911 in FIG. 55).

When passing V, the jackpot type storage area 203m is an area for storing the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot type of the winning jackpot when the jackpot is won, and the ball is a specific area during the jackpot gaming state. The type of jackpot that is executed based on the fact that the game has passed is stored. In the small passing start setting process (refer to FIG. 42), the jackpot type corresponding to the selected small hit type is set (see S608 in FIG. 42), and the V passing process (see FIG. 50) ), the set jackpot type is read (see S1401 in FIG. 50), and the corresponding V flag is set to ON (see S1401 in FIG. 50).

The V flag 203n is a flag for storing that the ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650, and sets the jackpot type based on the value of this V flag 203n at the end of the small hit game. It is a thing. The V flag 203n is set in the V passage process (see FIG. 50) based on the value of the V passage jackpot type (S1402 in FIG. 50), and is referred to in the small hit ending process (S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 56). After that, it is turned off (S2006 in FIG. 56).

The storage release flag 203p is a flag used to indicate a period during which the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is released (opened), and when set to ON, the storage device 750 stores When the state is released and set to OFF, the storage device 750 enters the storage state. The storage release flag 203p is set to ON (S1804 in FIG. 54) when it is determined that the big hit start timing is reached in the big hit control process (see FIG. 54) (S1801: YES in FIG. 54), and the storage device is set. When it is referred to in the control process (see FIG. 58) (see S2202 in FIG. 58) and the value of the release counter 203Pa reaches the upper limit value (25000) (see S2205 in FIG. 58), it is set to OFF (FIG. 58). S2208). In other words, in the present embodiment, the storage device 750 is in the released state (the storage valve 750a operates to open) at the timing when the jackpot game is started, and the storage state is set when the predetermined period (10 seconds) has elapsed (the storage valve 750a performs a closing operation). With this, it is possible to increase the privilege given to the player when the jackpot is won.

A configuration other than the present embodiment may be used as a configuration for changing the state (storage state, release state) of the storage device 750. For example, a jackpot for shifting the storage device 750 to the release state, and the storage device 750. The jackpot that does not shift to the released state may be set according to the selected jackpot type, or a plurality of winning holes (for example, the first specific winning opening 65 and the second specific winning opening 650) are predetermined. When a jackpot game in which opening operations are performed in the order described above, the storage device 750 may be shifted to the released state at the timing when a specific winning opening is opened.

Further, regarding the configuration in which the storage device 750 is shifted from the released state to the stored state (termination condition of the released state), the configuration in which the released state is terminated when 10 seconds have passed after the transition to the released state in this embodiment. Then, even if the sphere is not stored in the storage device 750, the sphere can pass through the storage device 750, but the period during which the storage device is in the released state is shortened (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the storage device 750 is stored. Only the balls stored may be allowed to pass through the storage device 750. This allows the player to enthusiastically play the game so as to store the balls in the storage device 750 until the release condition (big hit) of the storage device 750 is satisfied.

The release counter 203pa is a counter for measuring a period during which the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 is released (opened). The release counter 203pa is set to "1" (see FIG. 58) when it is determined in the storage device control process (see FIG. 58) that the storage release flag 203p is turned on (see S2202 in FIG. 58). After that, each time the storage device control process is executed, the value is incremented by 1 (see S2206 in FIG. 58). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter has reached “25000” (see 2205 in FIG. 58), based on the determination result, the variable operation of the storage valve 750a is controlled, and the storage valve 750a is variably controlled to be in the closed state. Then, the value of the cancellation counter 203Pa is set to "0" (see S2209 in FIG. 58).

The time saving medium hit flag 203q is a flag for indicating in which gaming state the lottery (general drawing lottery) of the ordinary symbol whose lottery result is a hit is executed, and when the lottery is executed during the time saving state, Set on. The time saving medium hit flag 203q is referred to when setting the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a which is executed based on the winning in the universal drawing lottery.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the first specific winning opening 65a, or the like. A solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201, and various commands and control signals are transmitted to the MPU 201 via the input/output port 205.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 7) circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in the power supply device 115. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 7) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 51) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice in the voice output device (a speaker (not shown) or the like) 226, and outputs or fluctuates the lighting of the lamp display device 227 (the decoration lamp 227a, the transmission lamp 227b, the other lamp 227c, etc.). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display effect (variable display). The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the situation of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control for displaying an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay is performed.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. 31A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 31A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an effect state selection table 222b.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the voice lamp control device 113, and the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. ) Is used to determine the details of variation. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

The effect state selection table 222b is a table for selecting an effect state for setting the display mode of the effect image (third symbol image, reserved symbol image, background image, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the state of establishment of various flags, based on the lottery result of the special symbol or the normal symbol, any one of the six state of the effect state is selected.

Here, the contents of the effect state selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect state selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 32( a ), the effect state selection table 222b is in a state of establishment (on or off) of the condominium flag 223i, the universal figure effective flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, and the special 2 variation flag 223s. Any of the effect states “1” to “6” is selected depending on the setting.

Specifically, in the state where the condominium flag 223i is set to OFF, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is also set to OFF, the effect state “1” is selected. On the other hand, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON, the effect state “2” is selected. In addition, in the state in which the flag 223i is set to ON and the universal figure valid flag 223q is set to OFF, when the special map 2 variation flag 223s is set to OFF, the effect state “3” is set. Selected. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variation flag 223s is set to ON, the effect state "4" is selected. Then, when the condominium flag 223i is set to ON and the universal figure valid flag 223q is set to ON, the production state "5" is selected. In the state in which the effect state "5" is selected, the variation stop timing of the first special symbol (special figure 1) being executed and the variation stop timing of the normal symbol (general figure) are at predetermined intervals (special figure When the variation stop timing of the normal figure is earlier than the variation stop timing of 1 and each variation stop timing is within 2 seconds), the effect state "6" is selected.

Here, the relationship between the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 32(b). 32B is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between each effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the third symbol and the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. Note that the target whose display mode is changed depending on the effect state that is set is not only the above-described third symbol and the hold symbol, but also various effect images displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Although it is possible to change to the effect image corresponding to, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), by the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b, the third symbol (main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). And, the design (the first special design, the second special design, the normal design) which is made to correspond to the main reserved design (see FIG. 9) displayed in the first sub display area Ds1 of the third design display device 81 is different. Stipulated in. In this way, depending on the effect state, the main symbol, the symbol corresponding to the main pending symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the normal symbol) is different, in the pachinko machine 10 having a complicated game, It is possible to inform the result of the main game in an easy-to-understand manner only by making the player understand the symbol and the main hold symbol.

Specifically, when the effect state "1" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) becomes the main symbol, and is held to indicate the number of holding memories of the special figure 1. The symbol becomes the main reserved symbol and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). The effect state "1" is selected as the game state during the normal state in which the left-handed game is being executed.

Next, when the production state "2" is selected, the pseudo symbol for production that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) becomes the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). , The main reserved symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as not to display any reserved symbol (see FIG. 22(b)). The effect state "2" is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the small hit game of special figure 1 is executed.

The pseudo main symbol Dmb displayed as the main symbol when this effect state “2” is selected is the variable display (see FIG. 22(a)) and the stop display (FIG. 22) like other main symbols. (B)) is executed, in the small hit game of special figure 1, based on the timing when the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is predetermined. The display is controlled so that it is stopped and displayed in the display mode (the same symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 22(b)). It is possible to notify the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the winning game, and it is possible to think that the privilege to open the second specific winning opening 650a is given as a result of the fluctuation (lottery) of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. be able to.

Further, the number of times the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed is set to be at least larger than the number of times the second specific winning opening 650a is opened during the small hitting game, and corresponds to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a. The variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is not displayed is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in a display mode other than the predetermined display mode (for example, a mode in which non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed (so-called, stagger)). ing. Thereby, regardless of the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the small hitting game, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be constantly variably displayed, and the effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, when the production state “2” is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variation of the pseudo main symbol Dmb and the increase/decrease relation of the reserved symbol. That is, since the pseudo main symbol Dmb is not a symbol corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) that is actually stored on hold, when the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb is started. The number of any of the reserved symbols (special figure 1 reserved symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, general figure reserved symbol) does not increase or decrease. Therefore, in the production state "2" in which the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed, any of the reserved symbols (special symbol 1 reserved symbol, special symbol 2 reserved symbol, ordinary symbol reserved symbol) is displayed as the main reserved symbol. Then, when the main symbol starts to change, the state where the main reserved symbol does not decrease and the player feels uncomfortable occurs. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the effect state “2” is selected, the main hold symbol is not displayed, so that the above-described situation can be suppressed from occurring.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production state "2" is selected, it is configured not to display the main hold symbol, but other configurations may be used, for example, a pseudo main symbol. You may make it display the pseudo main hold symbol corresponding to Dmb. In this case, it is advisable to increase or decrease the number of pseudo main reserved symbols in correspondence with the variable display of the pseudo main symbols Dmb. As a result, it is possible to execute the variable display of the pseudo main symbol without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

Furthermore, when displaying the pseudo main holding symbol, it is preferable to set the number and display mode of the pseudo main holding symbol to be displayed based on the type of the small hit game to be executed. By configuring in this way, the content of the small hit game of this time is predicted to the player by the pseudo main hold symbol displayed as the main hold symbol at the timing when the small hit game in which the effect state "2" is selected is started. It is possible to perform the small hit game while having fun.

Further, the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the timing when the second specific winning port 650a is opened is the display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed, but in addition, it enters the second specific winning port 650a. Display control is performed so that the same symbol that is stopped and displayed is different based on the content of the privilege given by the sphere. Specifically, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a, which is opened at a timing when the ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). The display mode (for example, "777") in which a specific same number is stopped and displayed as the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a opened at other timings The stop display mode is set to a display mode (for example, "444") different from the specific same number. As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed with the same number, thereby notifying the player of the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a, and further, depending on the type of the number that is stopped and displayed, the privilege granted. The content can be reported (indicated). Therefore, the effect of the effect using the pseudo main pattern Dmb can be enhanced.

Next, when the production state "3" is selected, the pseudo symbol for production which does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) becomes the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). , The reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the main reserved symbol in the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16(b)). The effect state "3" is selected when the gaming state is a time saving state and the small hit game is executed.

Next, when the production state “4” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 becomes the main symbol (special symbol 2 main symbol Dmd), and the main reserved symbol is a hold corresponding to the special symbol 2. The symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 18(a)). The effect state "4" is selected when the game state is the normal state and the variation of special figure 2 is executed.

Next, when the production state “5” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the universal symbol is the main symbol (general symbol main symbol Dmc), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 is the main reserved symbol. It is displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15B). The production state “5” is selected when the gaming state is a time saving state and during the time saving state, a universal figure variation capable of executing the lottery and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed.

When the production state “6” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 is the main symbol (special symbol 1 main symbol Dma), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 is the third as the main reserved symbol. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 17A). The production state "6" is selected when the gaming state is a time saving state and the universal figure variation is started in a state where the remaining variation period of the changing special figure 1 is within 2 seconds.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. 31A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 31A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an effect state selection table 222b.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the voice lamp control device 113, and the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. ) Is used to determine the details of variation. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

The effect state selection table 222b is a table for selecting an effect state for setting the display mode of the effect image (third symbol image, reserved symbol image, background image, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the state of establishment of various flags, based on the lottery result of the special symbol or the normal symbol, any one of the six state of the effect state is selected.

Here, the contents of the effect state selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect state selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 32(a), in the effect state selection table 222b, the establishment state (whether the flag is set to ON, whether or not the flag 223i for continuous play, the general figure effective flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, and the special figure 2 variation flag 223s are set. Any of the effect states “1” to “6” is selected depending on whether it is set to OFF.

Specifically, in the state where the condominium flag 223i is set to OFF, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is also set to OFF, the effect state “1” is selected. On the other hand, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON, the effect state “2” is selected. In addition, in the state in which the flag 223i is set to ON and the universal figure valid flag 223q is set to OFF, when the special map 2 variation flag 223s is set to OFF, the effect state “3” is set. Selected. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variation flag 223s is set to ON, the effect state "4" is selected. Then, when the condominium flag 223i is set to ON and the universal figure valid flag 223q is set to ON, the production state "5" is selected. In the state in which the effect state "5" is selected, the variation stop timing of the first special symbol (special figure 1) being executed and the variation stop timing of the normal symbol (general figure) are at predetermined intervals (special figure When the variation stop timing of the normal figure is earlier than the variation stop timing of 1 and each variation stop timing is within 2 seconds), the effect state "6" is selected.

Here, the relationship between the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 32(b). 32B is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between each effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the third symbol and the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. Note that the target whose display mode is changed depending on the effect state that is set is not only the above-described third symbol and the hold symbol, but also various effect images displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Although it is possible to change to the effect image corresponding to, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), by the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b, the third symbol (main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). And, the symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the normal symbol) to be associated with the main hold symbol (see FIG. 9) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are defined to be different. In this way, depending on the effect state, the main symbol, the symbol corresponding to the main pending symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the normal symbol) is different, in the pachinko machine 10 having a complicated game, It is possible to inform the result of the main game in an easy-to-understand manner only by making the player understand the symbol and the main hold symbol.

Specifically, when the effect state "1" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) becomes the main symbol, and is held to indicate the number of holding memories of the special figure 1. The symbol becomes the main reserved symbol and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). The effect state "1" is selected as the game state during the normal state in which the left-handed game is being executed.

Next, when the production state "2" is selected, the pseudo symbol for production that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) becomes the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). , The main reserved symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as not to display any reserved symbol (see FIG. 22(b)). The effect state "2" is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the small hit game of special figure 1 is executed.

The pseudo main symbol Dmb displayed as the main symbol when this effect state “2” is selected is the variable display (see FIG. 22(a)) and the stop display (FIG. 22) like other main symbols. (B)) is executed, in the small hit game of special figure 1, based on the timing when the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is predetermined. The display is controlled so that it is stopped and displayed in the display mode (the same symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 22(b)). It is possible to notify the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the winning game, and it is possible to think that the privilege to open the second specific winning opening 650a is given as a result of the fluctuation (lottery) of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. be able to.

Further, the number of times the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed is set to be at least larger than the number of times the second specific winning opening 650a is opened during the small hitting game, and corresponds to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a. The variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is not displayed is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in a display mode other than the predetermined display mode (for example, a mode in which non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed (so-called, stagger)). ing. Thereby, regardless of the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the small hitting game, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be constantly variably displayed, and the effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, when the production state “2” is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variation of the pseudo main symbol Dmb and the increase/decrease relation of the reserved symbol. That is, since the pseudo main symbol Dmb is not a symbol corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) that is actually stored on hold, when the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb is started. The number of any of the reserved symbols (special figure 1 reserved symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, general figure reserved symbol) does not increase or decrease. Therefore, in the production state "2" in which the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed, any of the reserved symbols (special symbol 1 reserved symbol, special symbol 2 reserved symbol, ordinary symbol reserved symbol) is displayed as the main reserved symbol. Then, when the main symbol starts to change, the state where the main reserved symbol does not decrease and the player feels uncomfortable occurs. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the effect state “2” is selected, the main hold figure is not displayed, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above situation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production state "2" is selected, it is configured not to display the main hold symbol, but other configurations may be used, for example, a pseudo main symbol. You may make it display the pseudo main hold symbol corresponding to Dmb. In this case, it is advisable to increase or decrease the number of pseudo main reserved symbols in correspondence with the variable display of the pseudo main symbols Dmb. As a result, it is possible to execute the variable display of the pseudo main symbol without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

Furthermore, when displaying the pseudo main holding symbol, it is preferable to set the number and display mode of the pseudo main holding symbol to be displayed based on the type of the small hit game to be executed. By configuring in this way, the content of the small hit game of this time is predicted to the player by the pseudo main hold symbol displayed as the main hold symbol at the timing when the small hit game in which the effect state "2" is selected is started. It is possible to perform the small hit game while having fun.

Further, the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the timing when the second specific winning port 650a is opened is the display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed, but in addition, it enters the second specific winning port 650a. Display control is performed so that the same symbol that is stopped and displayed is different based on the content of the privilege given by the sphere. Specifically, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a, which is opened at a timing when the ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). The display mode (for example, "777") in which a specific same number is stopped and displayed as the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a opened at other timings The stop display mode is set to a display mode (for example, "444") different from the specific same number. As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed with the same number, thereby notifying the player of the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a, and further, depending on the type of the number that is stopped and displayed, the privilege granted. The content can be reported (indicated). Therefore, the effect of the effect using the pseudo main pattern Dmb can be enhanced.

Next, when the production state "3" is selected, the pseudo symbol for production which does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) becomes the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). , The reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the main reserved symbol in the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16(b)). The effect state "3" is selected when the gaming state is a time saving state and the small hit game is executed.

Next, when the production state “4” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 becomes the main symbol (special symbol 2 main symbol Dmd), and the main reserved symbol is a hold corresponding to the special symbol 2. The symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 18(a)). The effect state "4" is selected when the game state is the normal state and the variation of special figure 2 is executed.

Next, when the production state “5” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the universal symbol is the main symbol (general symbol main symbol Dmc), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 is the main reserved symbol. It is displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15B). The production state “5” is selected when the gaming state is a time saving state and during the time saving state, a universal figure variation capable of executing the lottery and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed.

When the production state “6” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 is the main symbol (special symbol 1 main symbol Dma), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 is the third as the main reserved symbol. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 16B). The production state "6" is selected when the gaming state is a time saving state and the universal figure variation is started in a state where the remaining variation period of the changing special figure 1 is within 2 seconds.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, special figure winning information storage area 223a, special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c, special figure variation start flag 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, Performance counter 223f, time saving medium flag 223g, time saving remaining period storage area 223h, continuous vacation flag 223i, variable time counter 223j, state storage area 223k, performance state storage area 223m, special 2 hold flag 223n. And the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p, the universal figure valid flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, the special 2 variation flag 223s, the universal figure prize information storage area 223t, the universal figure variation start flag 223u, and the replacement At least a flag 223v, a privilege effect execution flag 223w, an end effect execution flag 223x, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The special information winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas has a special symbol (first special symbol and Winning information of the second special symbol) is stored respectively. The information stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a allows the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery result or the like of the reserved balls before the fluctuation starts.

The special symbol 1 reservation sphere number counter 223b, and the special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 223c is a variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is the main control. It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect held in the device 110 up to four times for each special symbol type. The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b corresponds to the holding ball number of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, the second special symbol (special symbol Corresponds to the number of balls reserved for the variation effect based on the lottery in 2).

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c are used. , The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, the main controller 110 holds the variable display by entering the first entrance 64 (the left first entrance 64a, the right first entrance 64b) and the second entrance 640. When the number of spheres is added, or when the variable display in the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of reserved spheres is subtracted, after addition or after subtraction The value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d, or a holding sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, from the holding ball number command, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c (see S3207 in FIG. 61). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c are updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d of the control device 110 and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e.

The value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c is used to display the holding sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c in response to receiving the holding ball number command. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c after storage, a display holding sphere number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c, while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110. , Its value is changed. Therefore, the number of holding sphere numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 also changes while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Can be made. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable display (right of the symbol lottery) can be reserved (upper limit of 4) for the ordinary symbol as well as the special symbol described above, and the number of ordinary symbol retaining balls of the main control device 110 is configured. When a command that is set when the value of the counter 203f is increased or decreased is received, a normal symbol holding ball number counter (not shown) is provided as a counter that increases or decreases the value according to the content of the received command. However, regarding the processing executed in the voice lamp control device 113, and the processing executed in the display control device 114, only the target command for the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b is different. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The value of this normal symbol holding sphere number counter is used, for example, when displaying the number of holding spheres of a normal symbol on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, about the detailed content when displaying the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter on the third symbol display device 81, it is the same as when displaying the holding sphere number of the special symbol described above on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the display control device 114, when each of the reserved ball count commands for display is received, the predetermined area (subordinate reserved symbol display areas Dn4 to Dn6 (see FIG. 9A)) is received. Displayed to show the number of hold balls corresponding to the command is made, based on the received display effect state command, select the hold ball number command to be displayed in the main hold symbol display area, hold as the main hold symbol A display is made to show the number of balls. With this configuration, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 in synchronization with the increase or decrease of the number of holding balls set by the main controller 110, and to notify the player in the current effect state. It is possible to inform the player of the number of reserved balls of the symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the present embodiment, in the display control device 114, all the reserved balls of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) are in a predetermined area (subordinate reserved symbol display areas Dn4 to Dn6 (see FIG. 9 ( (a)))), and is configured to be able to display a part of it as a main pending symbol, but the method of displaying the pending symbol is not limited to this, and for example, each symbol (special symbol 1 , Special figure 2, public figure), when the number of hold balls corresponding to the command is received, based on the received display state command for display, the hold symbol to be displayed in the main hold symbol display area (main hold symbol), and A hold symbol (subordinate hold symbol) to be displayed in the hold symbol display area is discriminated, and on the basis of the discrimination result, the third symbol display device 81 is held corresponding to each symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, general symbol). You may make it display a design.

The variation start flag for special figure 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command (for special figure) transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3304 in FIG. 62), and the variation display on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is turned off when the setting is made (see S3702 in FIG. 66). When the special figure variation start flag 223d is turned on, the special figure display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command (see S3706 in FIG. 66).

The special figure display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this special figure display variation pattern command, with the variation pattern indicated by this special figure display variation pattern command, the variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the display control of the variation effect is started.

In the present embodiment, as the special figure display variation pattern command, the special figure 1 display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol, and the special figure 2 display variation corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol. Pattern commands and are configured to be settable. In the display control device 114, the variation pattern corresponding to the type of the variation pattern command for special figure display received (variation pattern command for special figure 1 display, variation pattern command for special figure 2 display) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to do.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the display control device 114, when the display variation pattern command is received, a predetermined area (the symbol display areas Dn1 to Dn3 of the second display area Dn (see FIG. 9A)) is displayed. A display for showing the symbol sequence (fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the received display variation pattern command is made, and based on the received display effect state command, the symbol to be displayed in the first display area Dm (main symbol). Is selected from each of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure), and the selected symbol is displayed as the main symbol. With this configuration, the display synchronized with the variation pattern of each symbol set by the main control device 110 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player should be informed in the current effect state. It is possible to notify the player of the change in the pattern in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the present embodiment, in the display control device 114, the variable display (symbol row) of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) is all in a predetermined area (secondary symbol display in the second display area Dn). Areas Dn1 to Dn3 (see FIG. 9(a)) are displayed, and a part of them is configured to be displayed in the first display area as a main symbol, but each symbol (Special symbol 1, Special symbol 2, Normal symbol) (Fig.) is not limited to this, for example, when the display variation pattern command corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) is received, the received display Based on the production effect state command, the symbol (main symbol) to be displayed in the first display area Dm and the symbol (subordinate symbol) to be displayed in the sub symbol display area are discriminated, and the third symbol is displayed based on the discrimination result. You may make it display the variable display (symbol sequence) corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) in the apparatus 81.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3204 in FIG. 61), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3708 in FIG. 66). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command (see S3710 in FIG. 66).

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223f is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is incremented by 1 and updated each time the main processing (see FIG. 60) is executed. .. The effect counter 223f has a plurality of counters (not shown), and when the effect pattern is determined by referring to the plurality of counter values in one loop processing, different counter values are used. Used. As a result, when setting one effect pattern, the same counter value is not used at a plurality of places, so that it is possible to suppress the deviation of the effect pattern to be set. The effect pattern may be set using each value calculated by performing different processing on the value acquired from the same counter. Specifically, among the effect patterns, one digit of the obtained value is referred to in one selection, ten digit of the obtained value is referred to in another selection, and one digit of the obtained value is referred to in another selection. Alternatively, the value obtained by multiplying the value obtained by multiplying the tens place by 3 and the value obtained by increasing the tens place by 5 may be referred to. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the effect patterns to be set, while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect patterns.

The time saving flag 223g is a flag for indicating that the current time is being saved. If the time saving medium flag 223g is ON, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the time saving state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not the time saving state. The time saving flag 223g is set to ON (3906 in FIG. 68) when it is determined in the effect state setting processing (see S3114 in FIG. 68) that the time shifts to the time saving state after the jackpot is over, and the variable display setting processing (FIG. 66). In S3113), it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223d is on (S3701: Yes in FIG. 66), and if it is determined that the time saving flag 223g is on (S3704: Yes in FIG. 66). ) Is set to OFF (S3705 in FIG. 66).

In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation (lottery) is executed once (that is, the time saving number is once) as the end condition of the time saving state, so that the time saving medium flag 223g is turned on as described above. When the variation of the special symbol is started in the state set to, the time saving medium flag 223g is configured to be set to OFF, but the voice lamp control device 113 indicates that the gaming state is the time saving state. It suffices if the configuration can be discriminated on the side, for example, if the number of hour reductions is set to 100, a time reduction counter capable of determining the number of remaining periods is provided and every time the special symbol is changed (lottery). Alternatively, the value of the counter may be updated, and the time saving flag 223g may be set to OFF when the value of the counter is updated to a value indicating that the time saving state ends. Accordingly, even if the pachinko machine 10 is set to have the number of times reduced in time (two times or more), the voice lamp control device 113 side can surely determine whether or not the current gaming state is in an hour reduced state. You can

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (one time), the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. , Other configurations may be used, for example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations t of the second special symbol can be separately measured, and the end condition of the time saving state is the first special symbol. May be changed 10 times (lottery), or until the second special symbol is changed once (lottery), and the time saving state may be ended when either one of the ending conditions is satisfied. Alternatively, the time saving state may be ended under a condition other than the number of times the special symbol changes. In this case, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) or the normal symbol becomes the predetermined lottery result, the ending condition for ending the time saving state is established, or the pachinko machine 10 It is also possible to use a configuration in which an ending condition for ending the time-saving state is satisfied when the various driving members (the electric accessory 640a, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650) provided are driven. The number of times of driving the various driving members described above may be configured to be measurable, and when the number of times of driving reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2 times), the ending condition for ending the time saving state may be satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the time saving state ends, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The time saving remaining period storage area 223h is an area for storing the variable time of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured such that, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) changes once during the time saving state, the time saving state ends. That is, the variation time of the special symbol set during the time saving state becomes the remaining period during the time saving state.

The condominium flag 223i is a flag for indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the right hitting game state (condominium state), and the present flag is set by turning on the condominium flag 223i. It indicates that the gaming state is the right-handed gaming state, and when set to OFF, it indicates that the current gaming state is the normal state. This extended-compartment flag 223i is set to ON (see S3903 in FIG. 68) when it is determined that the big hit has started in the production state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68), and the production state is selected based on the production state selection table 222b. It is referred to when selecting a state (see S3918 in FIG. 68), and when it is determined that the time saving state does not enter after the jackpot is over, or when the time saving state ending condition is satisfied without the pending storage of special figure 2. Is set to OFF (see S3907 and S3912 in FIG. 68).

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a gaming state advantageous to the player (right-handed gaming state), shifts from the short-time state with the jackpot state, the short-time state, and the state having the reserved memory of special figure 2. The game state includes a normal state (see FIG. 12), and whether or not the current game state is advantageous to the player (right-handed game state) is output from the main control unit 110. The audio lamp control device 113 is configured to make a determination based on a command, various status commands, and the like. This eliminates the need for the main controller 110 to execute the process of determining whether or not the current game state is the advantageous state, and has the effect of reducing the processing load of the main controller 110.

It should be noted that the main control device 110 side may perform a process of determining whether or not the current game state is advantageous to the player. In this case, a command indicating that a gaming state advantageous to the player (right-handed gaming state) is set is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the fact that the right-handed gaming state is in progress is externally sent. It may be configured to output a signal for notifying (right hitting signal). In this case, in addition to the period in which the gaming state itself such as the jackpot state and the time saving state is advantageous to the player, the gaming state is not an advantageous gaming state as a gaming state (although it is a normal state), but the predetermined condition is satisfied, , If it is determined to shift to the jackpot state, it is configured to continuously notify the outside that it is in the right hitting game state, thereby causing the player to continuously execute the right hitting game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the troublesome game.

The fluctuation time counter 223j is a counter for measuring the Toku-zu 1 fluctuation time during the time saving state, and the remaining period of the time saving state is calculated based on the measured counter value. When the fluctuation time counter 223j determines in the counter updating process (see S3311 in FIG. 70) that the fluctuation in Toku-zu 1 has started during the time saving (during the time saving) (S4103: YES in FIG. 70), The value of the counter is set to "1", and thereafter, every time the counter update processing (see S3311 in FIG. 70) is executed, "1" is added until the counter value becomes "150,000" (S4108 in FIG. 70). If the counter value is "150,000" (S4107: Yes in FIG. 70), the counter value is set to "0" (S4109). Then, based on the value of the variable time counter 223j, the short-term remaining period (remaining period in the short-term state) is calculated (S4105 in FIG. 70).

The status storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the status when various status commands output from the main control device 110 are received, and in the command determination processing (see S3112 in FIG. 61), When the status command is received (S3215 of FIG. 61: Yes), the status information based on the received status command is stored (S3216 of FIG. 61). The display state command is set based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k, and various images (background image and demo image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set by the main control device 110. Images corresponding to various states are displayed.

The effect state storage area 223m is a display mode of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114, and each reserved symbol (special figure 1 hold). This is an area for storing the effect state used for setting the display effect state command to be referred to when deciding the display mode of the symbol, the special figure 2 reserved symbol, the universal symbol reserved symbol). This effect state is the setting status of various flags set by various processes of the voice lamp control device 113 (the condominium flag 223i, the general figure effective flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, the special figure 2 variation flag 223s), and Based on the variation stop timing of the symbol, it is selected in the effect state setting process (S3114 in FIG. 68) (see S3918 in FIG. 68), and the selected effect state is stored in the effect state storage area 223m. The selected effect state is stored (stored) in the effect state storage area 223m several times in the past. This makes it possible to compare and determine the effect state before the transition and the effect state after the transition. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine a migration pattern that cannot be transferred when a normal game is being performed, and to determine whether there is an illegal game.

In addition, when the production state is transitioned in a predetermined transition pattern a plurality of times (for example, when the transition from the production state 4 to the production state 5 is repeated five times or more without passing through the production states 1 and 2). It is possible to provide a performance state that is selected only in (for example, the Dalian Zhuang performance state), and it is possible to enhance the production effect. In addition, when the Dalian Zhuang production state is set, it is preferable to display the privilege image that the player cannot normally see in the first display area Dm without displaying the main symbol on the third symbol display device 81. ..

The special 2 hold flag 223n is a flag for indicating that the special figure 2 (special 2) hold storage is available in the time saving state. By setting the special 2 hold flag 223n to ON, It is shown that the reserved memory (reserved symbol) of FIG. 2 exists, and by being set to OFF, it shows that the reserved memory (reserved symbol) of the special figure 2 does not exist. The special 2 reserved flag 223n is set to ON when the special 2 reserved ball number is updated to 1 in the reserved sphere number related process (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (see S3403 in FIG. 63). The special 2 hold flag 223n is referred to in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) when it is determined that the time saving state has ended (see S3911 in FIG. 68), and the special 2 hold ball count becomes 0. Is set to off.

The special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the reserved storage of the special figure 2 (special 2) has reached the upper limit (4 pieces) in the time saving state. By being set to ON, it is indicated that the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 (special 2) has reached the upper limit (4) in the time saving state, and by setting the special 2 pending upper limit flag 223p to OFF, It is indicated that the number of reserved storages in special figure 2 (special case 2) is not the upper limit (4).

The special 2 reserved upper limit flag 223p is set to ON when the special 2 reserved ball number is updated to the upper limit in the reserved sphere number related process (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (S3406: Yes in FIG. 63) ( It is referred to in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69) and is set to OFF when the special 2 reserved number of balls is not the upper limit.

The universal figure effective flag 223q is a flag for indicating a universal figure variation (normal symbol variation) in which the operation of the electric accessory 640a executed at the time of winning is a movement pattern (long opening) advantageous to the player, When the universal figure valid flag 223q is set to ON, it indicates that the electric figure object 640a is a general figure variation at a time when it can be opened for a long time, and when it is set to OFF, the electric figure object 640a is short-circuited. It shows that the figure changes at the timing of opening.

The universal figure valid flag 223q is set to ON when it is determined in the universal figure variation display setting process (see S3712 in FIG. 67) that the timing of the variation start and the variation end are both in the time saving state (FIG. 67). S3806), if it is determined that the change start timing is not in the time saving state, or if the change end timing is not in the time saving state, it is set to OFF (S3809 in FIG. 67). reference). The setting status of the universal figure valid flag 223q is referred to when the effect state is selected based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

The pseudo effect flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 small hit is executed when the game state is the normal state, and when set to ON, the special figure 1 small hit is set in the normal state. Is executed. By setting this pseudo effect flag 223r to ON, effect display with the pseudo symbol as the main symbol (pseudo main symbol) is executed during the small hitting game (see FIG. 22). This pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON by the effect state setting process (see S3114 of FIG. 68) when the small hit prize of special figure 1 occurs in the normal state (see S3915 of FIG. 68), and the small hit. Is set to OFF when the process ends (S3917 in FIG. 68). The setting status of the pseudo effect flag 223r is referred to when the effect state is selected based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

The special 2 variation flag 223s is a flag for indicating that the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) has started, and by being set to ON, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) It indicates that the fluctuation has started. This special 2 variation flag 223s is set to ON when the received variation pattern command is the variation pattern command for special figure 2 in the variation pattern related processing (see S3202 in FIG. 62) (S3302 in FIG. 62). Then, when the fluctuation pattern command for special figure 1 is received, it is set to OFF. The setting status of the special 2 variation flag 223s is referred to when the effect state is selected based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

Here, in the present embodiment, when the special 2 variation flag 223s is set to ON, that is, when the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the variation result (lottery result) ) As a big hit or a small hit is configured, further, the small hit game executed based on the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special drawing 2), the ball is a specific area (V It is configured to be a small hit game that easily passes through the winning switch 650e3). That is, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is configured to be advantageous to the player only by being executed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured as described above, while the special 2 variation flag 223s is set to ON (that is, while the second special symbol is varying), the second special symbol is It is variably displayed as a main symbol (special symbol 2 main symbol). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the variable display of the second special symbol to which the advantageous state for the player is given is overlooked.

The ordinary figure prize information storage area 223t is an area for storing the prize information included in the prize information command when the prize information command of the normal symbol is received. The detailed configuration is the same as that of the special figure winning information storage area 223a described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223u for the general figure is a flag indicating that the fluctuation of the normal symbol has been executed, and by being set to ON, it indicates that the normal symbol is fluctuating. This fluctuation start flag 223u for general-use patterns is determined in the fluctuation pattern-related processing (see S3202 of FIG. 62) that the received fluctuation pattern command is not a special-pattern fluctuation pattern command (it is a general-purpose fluctuation pattern command). If it is set to ON (see S3306 in FIG. 62) and it is determined to be set to ON in the universal figure variation display setting process (see S3712 in FIG. 67) (S3801: Yes in FIG. 67), It is set to OFF (see S3802 in FIG. 67).

The replacement flag 223v is a flag indicating that the end timing of the time saving state (the end timing of the variation of Toku-zu 1 where the variation started in the time saving state) and the end timing of the universal figure variation satisfy the predetermined condition. By setting it to ON, the end timing of the universal figure fluctuation is within 2 seconds of the end timing of the time saving state. When the replacement flag 223v is set to ON, the production state “6” is selected as the production state.

The privilege effect execution flag 223w is a flag for indicating that the privilege effect is being executed, and when set to ON, indicates that the privilege effect is being executed. While this privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON, a privilege effect (see FIG. 21) that cannot be normally seen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This privilege effect execution flag 223w determines that the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 of FIG. 69) (see S4002 of FIG. 69), and the privilege effect command for display. After setting (see S4004 in FIG. 69), it is set to ON (S4005 in FIG. 69), and in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68), after the condominium flag 223i is set to OFF (FIG. 68 (see S3907) and is set to OFF (see S3908 in FIG. 68). That is, even if the special effect execution flag 223w is set to ON even in the state where the continuous vacation flag 223i is set to ON (during the continuous vacation mode) (the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 becomes the upper limit). (If it has arrived), the privilege effect is continuously executed until the end of the extended game mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the privilege effect ends immediately even if the privilege effect is in a state of being executed. That is, after the number of reserved balls in special map 2 reaches the upper limit, at least all of the reserved balls in special map 2 are exhausted, and then the special effect 1 during the time saving state ends until the bonus performance is finished. Is configured to be executed, the privilege effect can be continuously displayed.

Further, with such a configuration, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 that the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has reached the upper limit for a long period of time, so to the surrounding players. It can be appealing and satisfying. Furthermore, in order to obtain the satisfaction, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the specific privilege effect is executed even if the number of reserved balls in the special map 2 reaches the upper limit even once, but the present invention is not limited to this. A means for measuring the number of times the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 has reached the upper limit may be provided therein, and different privilege effects may be executed based on the measurement result by the means. This allows the player to play the game more enthusiastically.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the special effect execution flag 223w is set to ON, the special effect is set to be executed until the extended game mode ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may set the period until all the reserved balls of special figure 2 are exhausted as a period when a privilege production is performed. As a result, in the continuous vacation mode, the effect can be switched every time the special map 1 variation is executed during the time saving state, and the player can enthusiastically perform the game with a new feeling to continue the continuous vacation mode. You can

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for executing the privilege effect is satisfied, the privilege effect is automatically executed, but other configurations may be used, for example, pachinko. By operating the operation means (frame button 22) provided in the machine 10, the normal effect and the privilege effect may be switched to be executable. Thereby, a desired effect can be provided to the player.

In the present embodiment, the case where the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 reaches the upper limit is set as the condition for executing the bonus effect, but other conditions may be set as the condition for executing the bonus effect. Of course, for example, in addition to the case where the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, it may be set as a condition that the changing special figure 1 has been won (big hit, small hit). As described above, when the number of reserved balls in the special map 2 reaches the upper limit and the lottery result of the changing special map 1 is a big hit, it is practically 5 times (one big hit based on the special map 1, Since the big hit game of big hit 4 times based on FIG. 2) will be provided, a more advantageous game state for the player will be provided. By allowing the privilege effect to be executed only when such a condition is satisfied, the value of the privilege effect can be enhanced, and the player can be motivated to play the privilege effect.

In this case, when the number of reserved balls in the special map 2 becomes 3 (a semi-upper limit number smaller than the upper limit number), whether or not the privilege effect is executed based on the lottery result of the special map 1. It is advisable to perform a display (privilege effect execution suggestion display) for informing (indicating) the player. As a result, the player can enthusiastically play the game while expecting the lottery result of the special map 1 and the provision of the special effect. In addition, when the special map 2 number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit number (4), the special effect is configured to be executed, and the content of the special effect is changed to the lottery result of the special figure 1 being changed, At the time when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit (at the time when the execution condition of the special effect is established), it is changed based on the remaining period of the time saving state (remaining change time of the changing special figure 1). May be. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly.

The end effect execution flag 223x is a flag for indicating that the end effect (refer to FIG. 19B to FIG. 20B) for suggesting the end of the extended game mode is executed, and is ON. Is set to indicate that the end effect is being executed. This end effect execution flag 223x is turned on when the special time saving flag 223n is set to off in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 of FIG. 69) and the time saving period is 10 seconds. It is set (see S4010 in FIG. 69), and is referred to when the special 2 suspension flag 223n is set to ON in the number of reserved balls related processing (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (see S3404 in FIG. 63). Here, when the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON and the second hold flag 223n is set to ON, it is assumed that the current time saving state has ended (the fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 has ended). Also, the fluctuation (lottery) of the special map 2 is started, and the extended game mode is continued. Therefore, the display victory command is set for the ending effect being executed, and the effect suggesting the recovery from the ending effect is executed. As a result, the player can be expected to continue the extended game mode even after the end effect is executed, and the player can enthusiastically play the game until the end.

Then, in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68), the in-long-compartment flag 223i is set to OFF and then to OFF (see S3909 in FIG. 68). The end effect executed in the present embodiment may be configured to be executed even when the special figure 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON. In this case, the extended game mode is always continued. Therefore, the appearance continuation mode continuation probability in the end effect can be increased. Further, when a plurality of special figure 2 suspensions are acquired during the period in which the end effect is being executed, the corresponding effect may be executed.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. , A command storage area is provided.

This command storage area is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display controller 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. .. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot is different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. Instead of storing the data, the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged in a plurality of pages consecutively, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a low read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions that form the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is not corrected based on the erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids the access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data blocks. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (eg, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside or uses the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to specify the data while setting the data in one bank while using the other bank. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 is first stored after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be set to be equal to or less than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, all the control programs are not stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" and then the instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. A fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a is transferred. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a causes the instruction pointer 231a to be stored in the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various kinds of processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) executed after the boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 71) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73(b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction, so that the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

In addition, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction and transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored at the storage source start address and the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

The image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, the character symbol area In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f being provided, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 and the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variation effect when the entry into the mouth 640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. The transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S5003 and S5004 in FIG. 71).

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image on the third symbol display device. 81 to display.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is a variation start instruction command, is received, the display controller 114 causes the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, the fluctuation period. Display alternately and alternately. Then, from the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed in the main controller 110 is selected. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", a "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period after stopping the fluctuating effect, and if it is "out of special symbol", a "x" symbol is stopped after the fluctuating effect. Display for a certain period.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, an image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In addition, the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a, right first entrance) 64b), or when a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image is generated using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Is drawn, and the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to alternately display the power-on fluctuation image on the third symbol display device 81. Accordingly, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect by using the variation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, so the power-on When a ball is detected at the first entrance 64 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can

Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, a city, the sea, the sky, etc. are displayed. A right-hand navigation image (see FIG. 15A) and the like are also stored in the rear image area 235c as rear images.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten kinds of main symbols with the numbers "0" to "9" which are the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the occurrence of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, although the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without numbers from "0" to "9", the main symbols consisting of the rear symbols such as a wooden box, the rear symbols and the planer, the furoshiki, the helmet character, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without the number as the third symbol is displayed in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the device 114 stores it in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND ROM 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even when the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and includes at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined for each sub area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads out the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for the previously developed one frame is read out from the other frame buffer, and to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 have a drawing process for the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, and an effect state storage area 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are displayed for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. The data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110, and, for example, a variable effect and an opening effect. Display data tables corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the fluctuating effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the disengagement is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating effect is a big hit A and a big hit B. If any of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is now in a special game state and the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a that are normally closed are opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of notifying the player of the end of the special game state (big hit state).

As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variable effect was stopped. That is, the third symbol, which is a main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9”, is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall related person can recognize that the game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. As for the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table for each variable effect pattern, that is, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a larger size than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the rear surface image, the display position is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information and the filter designation information, with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image. This back surface type displays one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected from the player (any one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”), or the back surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by this back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the backside type is defined as the drawing content of the backside image in the display data table, but instead of this, the backside type and the range of the backside image corresponding to the backside type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

Further, the position information is the drawing of the image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time since the display of the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position according to the back surface type (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be one of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating whether or not) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Has the symbol type offset information as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information indicating the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information by managing the offset information with the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, and the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 30) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents cannot be predicted because the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the rendering mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized only based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data of the sprite (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) which should start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponds to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 35). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data that means is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 35).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

Note that, as in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 35, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data that should be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is selected. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the predetermined sprite image data to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 35, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the sprite image data used in the display data table is It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is used after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 (see S5005 in FIG. 71). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S6605 in FIG. 82B).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S5301 in FIG. 73(b)). If the image display flag 233c is turned on, the simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 73(b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 73B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 73(b) S5309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 74 to 78) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 79 to 81) are executed.

When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6501 in FIG. 82A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 82B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, describing the content of the image drawing instruction for is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 36) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 36) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes the drawing process of the image for one frame (see FIG. 73(b (See S5303)), the pointer update processing (see S6205 in FIG. 81) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such updating of the pointer 233f is performed, and the drawing list described later. (Refer to FIG. 36), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 36, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,...), number of reserved balls, symbol 1, number of reserved balls, 2,..., error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of a corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. In addition, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information designated by the filter designation information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number that displays the number of held balls). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) is generated for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 is dependent on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy that information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the backmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2,..., Error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter for counting the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. ) Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S6207 of FIG. 79). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Performs various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to the one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6717 in FIG. 83). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S6718 in FIG. 83). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "ON", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6802 in FIG. 84).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 simultaneously reads the drawn image information that has been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is executed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 73B) is executed (see S6802 in FIG. 84).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The effect state storage area 233k is an area for storing effect state information included in the display effect state command output from the voice lamp control device 113. The effect state information stored in the effect state storage area 233k is referred to when determining the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that the present embodiment has variation pattern data corresponding to each effect state information, and is configured such that different variation patterns are determined even when the same display variation pattern command is received. ..

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 37 to 58. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is regularly started (at an interval of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 is incremented by one, and their counter values are maximum. When the value (in this embodiment, 299, 99, 99, 239, 99, respectively) is reached, each value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, special symbol variation processing for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104). Then, the left first entrance 64a and the right first entrance 64b (hereinafter, when both the left first entrance 64a and the right first entrance 64b are shown, the first entrance 64 and Or a start winning process associated with winning (starting prize) into the second entrance 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 44.

After executing the start winning process, the second symbol display device performs a normal symbol variation process which is a process for displaying (S106), the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 with the passage of the ball through Gate passing processing is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 to 48.

After the through-gate passage process is executed, the V-entrance passage process associated with the ball entering the second variable winning device 650 is executed (S108). After that, the V passing process associated with the winning of the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 is executed (S109). The details of the V entrance passage process and the V passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 59.

Next, the firing control process is executed (S110), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and the third symbol. It is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol big hit (including during the special symbol big hit game) is being displayed, During the predetermined time after the big hit game of symbols is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. The special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e which shows the value of reservation sphere number command (special figure 2 reservation sphere number command) is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value of the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c are respectively stored.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (N2) is determined to be 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (N1) The value of is acquired (S208). It is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is subtracted (S210), and is changed by calculation. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d value (N1) indicating the holding sphere number command (special figure 1 holding sphere number command) is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Then, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. When this special symbol variation start processing is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the special symbol lottery is performed. Be seen. More specifically, depending on the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss, and the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. In this case, one of the big hits A to G or one of the small hits A to E is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 or the small hit type counter C5.

In the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. If the hit is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if the hit is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process However, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, a scenario for opening a specific winning opening is set (S217), and then the jackpot start is set (S218). Next, the big hit start flag 203h and the big hit medium flag 203i are set to ON (S219), the time saving medium counter 203g is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. In the processing of S221, a stop command is set (S221), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S222).

In the process of S222, when it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is the small hit (S222: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed (S223). Next, the processing of S221 is executed, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not the small hit (S222: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S224). When it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is 0 (S224: No), the process of S221 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S224: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S224), and the process of S221 is executed. After that, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and special Based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 hold sphere storage area 203b, a lottery of "special symbol big hit", "special symbol small hit" or "special symbol miss" It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the fluctuating effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 together with the determination).

In the special symbol variation start processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is during time saving (S301). When the time is not shortening (S301: No), the normal fluctuation start process (S302) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is during the time saving (S301: Yes), the time saving variation start processing (S303) is executed, and the present processing ends.

Next, the normal variation start processing (S302) and the time saving variation start processing (S303) executed in the special symbol variation start processing (S213) described above will be described.

First, the normal fluctuation start process (S302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the normal variation start process (S302) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see S213 in FIG. 39).

In the normal variation start process, first, the data of the execution area in the corresponding special symbol reserved sphere storage area (special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b) is acquired (S401). Then, the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S402). Specifically, if it is the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 26 (b)) Judgment, if it is a lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, refer to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 26 (c)) determination of big hit or small hit I do.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S403). When the lottery result is a big hit (S403: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401, the display mode at the time of a normal big hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set ( S404). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 or the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2, 7 Among the big hits (special hits A to G) of special symbols having kinds, it is determined what the big hit type is (see FIG. 27(b) or (c)).

In the process of S404, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to G). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A to G) is set as the stop type.

After that, the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S405, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third until the big hit symbol is stopped in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the variation pattern table 202d1 for big hit for special figure 1 or the variation pattern table 202d5 for big hit for special figure 2 (common for both normal and time saving). By comparing with, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined (FIG. 29(a) or FIG. 30(b)).

In the processing of S406, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S405 is set (S406). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S404 is set (S407). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (see FIG. 53). To be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S407 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big hit (S403: No), it is further determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S408). When the lottery result is a small hit (S408: Yes), the display mode at the time of a normal small hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S409). Then, the normal small hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S410). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variable time of the third symbol until the small symbol symbol stops on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similar to the processing of S405, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the variation pattern table 202d3 for small hit for special figure 1 or the variation pattern table 202d5 for big hit for special figure 2 (Common to normal/time saving) is compared to determine the variation time of symbol variation (FIG. 29(d) or FIG. 30(b)). Next, the processes of S406 and S407 are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

When the lottery result is not a small hit (S408: No), the display mode at the time of the normal deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S411). After that, the variation pattern at the time of normal deviation is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S412). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similar to the processing of S405, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the deviation pattern table for out-of-special figure 1 202d2 or the special jackpot for fluctuation pattern table 202d5 for special figure 2 ( Normal/short time common) is compared to determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation (FIG. 29(c) or FIG. 30(b)). Next, the processes of S406 and S407 are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the time saving variation start processing (S303) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a time saving variation start processing (S303) executed in the special symbol variation start processing (S213, see FIG. 39). The time saving variation starting process (S303) is different from the above-described normal variation starting process (S302) in that a display mode for time saving and a variation pattern are set (determined), and other points are the same. , Its detailed description is omitted. In the processing of S505, S510, S512, when determining the variation pattern for the time saving of the first special symbol, as described above, it is determined based on the special pattern 1 time saving variation pattern table 202d4 (Fig. 30 (a )reference). On the other hand, when determining the variation pattern for time saving of the second special symbol, it is determined based on the variation pattern table for special figure 2 202d5 (common for both normal and time saving) as in the normal variation start process (S302) (Fig. 30(b)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a small hit start setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S222). This small hit start setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is a small hit type (small hit A to E). Based on, is a process for setting the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a, the stay solenoid 209b, and the flow path solenoid 209c in the small hit game.

In the small hit start setting process (S222), first, the small hit type selected in the process of S409 of the normal fluctuation start process or the process of S509 of the time saving change start process is read (S601), and then the small hit type A Alternatively, it is determined whether or not it is B (S602). When it is the small hit type A or B (S602: Yes), the opening scenario for special figure 1 is set (S603). The opening scenario for Toku-zu 1 specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 650f1 and the staying member 650n of the second variable winning device 650. That is, the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the retention solenoid 209b is set so that the opening/closing door 650f1 and the retention member 650n are opened for a predetermined period during the small hitting game effect (see FIG. 10).

When the process of S603 ends, it is determined whether or not the small hit type is B (S604). When the small hit type is B (S604: Yes), the flow path solenoid operation is set so that the V winning is impossible (S605). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the ball cannot flow down into the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 10A). Then, the process proceeds to S608. In the process of S604, when the small hit type is not B (that is, the small hit type is A) (S604: No), the flow path solenoid operation is set so that the V winning can be performed (S606). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the sphere can flow down into the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 10B).

On the other hand, in the process of S602, when the small hit type is not A or B (that is, the small hit type is C, D, or E) (S602: No), the opening scenario for special figure 2 is set (S606). ). The opening scenario for Toku-zu 2 specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 650f1 and the staying member 650n of the second variable winning device 650. That is, the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the retention solenoid 209b is set so that the opening/closing door 650f1 and the retention member 650n are opened for a predetermined period during the small hitting game effect (see FIG. 11A). When the process of S607 ends, the flow path solenoid operation is set so that the V winning can be achieved (S606). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the sphere can flow down into the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 11A).

When the processes of S605 and S607 are completed, the V passage big hit type corresponding to each small hit type is set in the V passage big hit type storage area 203m (S608). More specifically, based on the small hit type and the special symbol 1 big hit selection table 202b1 or the special symbol 2 big hit selection table 202b2 acquired in the process of S601, the V passing big hit type (big hit C to G) is determined. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined to be the big hit C (7 rounds, short and big hits), and if the small hit type is B, it is the big hit D (2 rounds, short and no big hits). If the small hit type is C, it is determined to be a big hit F (5 rounds with short and large hits), and if the small hit type is D, it is determined to be a big hits G (10 rounds with short and big hits). If the small hit type is E, it is determined to be a large hit E (short win with 15 rounds of time) (see FIG. 27(b) or (c)).

Next, the small hit start is set based on the small hit type (S609), and the small hit start flag 203j and the small hit medium flag 203k are set to ON (S610). After that, this processing ends.

Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize (start prize) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process of the values when there is a start winning.

When the start winning process (FIG. 43, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) (S701). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (S701: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S702). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Then, whether there is no prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S701: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), the process proceeds to S707. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the special symbol 1 is held. The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S705).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S705, after the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type that have been updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Each value of the counter C5 is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S706). In the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from S707 to S712, the same processing as the processing from S701 to S706 is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance 640. With respect to the winning of the second entrance 640, only the difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed, the other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When it is determined in the process of S707 that the ball has not won the second ball entrance 640 (S707: No), the prefetch process is executed after the process of S712 (S713). Then, this process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the prefetching process (S713) which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 of FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S713).

In this prefetching process (FIG. 44, S713), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S801). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S801: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S801: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the win is a prize of the first special symbol (S802). ).

In the process of S802, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S802: Yes), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the special symbol 1 big hit selection table 202b1 and the special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1 Based on, the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S803), and the process proceeds to S804. In the process of S804, the winning information command including the big hit determination result, the big hit type, the small hit determination result, and the small hit type acquired in S803 (or S805) is set (S804), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S802, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S802: No), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table 202b2 and the special symbol 2 small hit selection Based on the table 202e2, the lottery result, the big hit type, and the small hit type are acquired (S805), the process of S804 is executed, and this process is ended.

Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device, and the electric motor attached to the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory.

In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S106), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hitting (S901). As the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hitting, while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is made. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S901: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S901: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S902: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S904), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 0 (S904: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S904: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S905).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S906). In the process of S906, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S907).

Next, the lottery result is acquired based on the second winning random number table 202c (S908). In this control example, there is no distinction between the high-probability state and the low-probability state in the ordinary symbol lottery, and the probability of winning the ordinary symbol is always constant. Specifically, the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S907 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per random number table 202c. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 11”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “12 to 239”, the normal symbol is out. (See FIG. 26D).

Then, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S908, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S909), if it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S909: Yes), the winning time The display mode is set (S910), and the process proceeds to S912. In the process of S910, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "O" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

In the process of S909, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S909: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S911). In the processing of S911, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S912.

When the processing of S910 or S911 ends, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol in the processing of S912 (S912). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S912: Yes), the time saving medium hit flag 203q is set to ON (S913). Next, the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S914), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S912: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 4 seconds (S915), and this processing is ended. In this way, except for the special symbol jackpot, in the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol, the variation display time is very short as “4 seconds→3 seconds” compared to the normal state of the ordinary symbol, so the second The ball enters the ball entrance 640 easily.

On the other hand, in the processing of S902, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed. Yes (S916). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S914 or the process of S915 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the processing of S916, if the variation time has not elapsed (S916: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S916, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S916: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S917). In the process of S917, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S910, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S911, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. By the process of S917, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1708) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S910 or the processing of S911, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the ordinary symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 45, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether or not it is a hit (S918). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S918: Yes), the electric accessory control process is set (S919), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the electric accessory control process (S919) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. This electric accessory control process (S919) is a process executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and FIG. 46 is an electric accessory control process ( It is the flowchart which showed S919).

In the electric accessory control process, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving medium hit flag 203q is on (S1001). If the time saving medium hit flag 203q is ON (S1001: Yes), the time saving medium hit flag 203q is set to OFF (S1002), and then it is determined whether it is during time saving (S1003). If it is during the time saving (S1003: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened (3 seconds) and closed. (5 seconds), open (3 seconds) is set (S1004), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in S1001, if the time saving medium hit flag 203q is not on (that is, it is off) (S1001: Yes), or if the time saving is not in time saving (S1003: No), the pachinko machine 10 is a normal symbol. Since it is a normal state, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set to open (0.1 seconds), close (0.1 seconds), and open (0.1 seconds). (S1005, this process ends.

Thus, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, compared to the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening operation of the second entrance 640 is "open (0.1 seconds), closed (0.1 seconds), open ( (0.1 seconds)→opening (3 seconds), closing (5 seconds), opening (3 seconds)” becomes very long, so that the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

When the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set by the electric accessory control process (S919), when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1706) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed next. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory starts.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and it is determined whether or not the ball normally passes through the symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process (FIG. 47, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S1101). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1102). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1103).

The ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball The value (M) of the number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S1104). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Are stored in the area (S1105). In the process of S1105, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. When the process of S1105 ends, the universal figure prefetching process is executed (S1106).

Here, with reference to FIG. 48, the universal figure prefetching process will be described (S1106). FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the contents of this general picture prefetching process (S1106). In the universal figure prefetching process (FIG. 48, S1106), first, pre-determination is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4 newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S1201). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 newly stored in the process of S1105 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c.

Next, based on the result of the preliminary determination, the winning preliminary determination result and the variation time determination result are acquired (S1202). After that, the universal figure winning a prize information command is set (S1203), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the through gate passing process.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. When the universal figure prefetching process (S1106) ends, next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit now (S1107). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S1107: Yes), this process is finished as it is. If the special symbol is not in the big hit (S1107: No), it is determined whether or not it is currently in the small hit (S1108). As a result of the determination, if the small hit is in progress (S1108: Yes), the present process is ended.

If it is not in the small hit (S1108: No), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is changing (S1109). As a result of the determination, if the second special symbol is changing (S1109: Yes), this process is ended as it is. If the second special symbol is not fluctuating (S1109: No), it is determined whether the time is shortening (S1109). If the result of the determination is that the time is being shortened (S1110: Yes), this processing is terminated. If the time is not shortening (S1110: No), an error command is set (S1111), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, whether the sphere does not pass through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101: No), or even if the sphere passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203f is not less than 4 (S1103: No), the universal figure prefetching process (S1106) is skipped, the processes of S1107 to S1111 are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the V entrance passage processing (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V entrance passage process (S108), it is first determined whether or not the small hit is in progress (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the small hit is in progress (S1301: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S1302), and this process is ended. If it is not in the small hit (S1302: No), it is the case that the ball has entered the second variable winning device 650 even though it is not the small hit game, so an error command is set (S1303), and this processing To finish.

The V-entry passing command set in the process of S1302 is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the spheres that have passed through the V entrance and transmits a command for executing the effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114. Thereby, it is possible to execute the effect during the small hitting game based on the entry into the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 12).

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the V passage processing (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the V passage processing (S109). This V passage process (S109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V passage process, first, the V passage big jackpot type value stored in the V passage big jackpot type storage area 203m is acquired (S1401), and the V flag 203n indicating the obtained V passage big jackpot type is set to ON ( S1402). Then, the V pass command is set (S1403).

Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit type corresponds to the small hit B (S1404). In the processing of S1404, when it is determined that the small hit B is applicable (S1404: Yes), an error command is set (S1405), and this processing ends. In the present embodiment, the balls are allowed to pass through the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 in the small hits A, C, D or E (that is, other than the small hits B), and the small hit type value is set. Only when small hit A, C, D or E (that is, other than small hit B) is set. Therefore, when the small hit type value is the small hit B, if the V passing process (S1401) executed based on the ball passing the V winning switch 650e3 is executed, the V winning switch 650e3 is illegally executed. It is considered that this is the case where the hemisphere is won. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1405, an error is output and an illegal act can be found.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt process described above is similarly executed in the payout control device 111, and the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1601). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 7) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1612. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if it is not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1612 in this case as well.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S1612. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1716 in FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S1612, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1612). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1613, S1614) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up processing, the RAM initialization processing (S1613, S1614) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S1613, S1614) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S1613, S1614), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1613), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1614). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S1610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S1605: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S1607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1608). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1610, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1611), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each processing of S1701 to S1709 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1712 and S1713 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 53), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), output data such as a command stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to the sub side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls won to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) and the starting winning award processing (see FIG. 43) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the reserved ball number command. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the jackpot start command, the round number command, and the jackpot end command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) are transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the The jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the 1-variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704). In the jackpot control process, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and the maximum opening time of the first specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or a specified number of balls have been won in the first specific winning opening 65a. Determine whether. And if any of these conditions are satisfied, the first specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

Next, when the special symbol is in the small hitting state, execution of various effects according to the small hitting, and small hitting control processing for opening or closing the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning a prize device 650 are executed ( S1705). In the small hit control process, the opening/closing door 650f1 is opened based on the opening scenario, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the opening/closing door 650f1 has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won the opening/closing door 650f1. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed. In the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

When the process of S1705 ends, the electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1706). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the electric accessory controlling process (FIG. 46, S1005) executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the electric winning combination is executed. Starts opening/closing control of objects. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening operation set in S1004 or S1005 in the electric accessory control process (FIG. 46, S1005) is completed.

Next, the first symbol display update processing for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is executed (S1707). In the first symbol display update process, S405, S410, S412 of the normal variation start process (FIG. 40, S302) or the time saving variation start process (FIG. 41, S303) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39). When the variation pattern is set by the process of S or the processes of S505, S510, and S512, the variation display according to the variation pattern is started on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, until the change time elapses from the start of the change, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, every time the main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, the fluctuation set by the process of S405, S410, S412 or the process of S505, S510, S512 of the normal fluctuation start process (see FIG. 40) or the time saving fluctuation start process (see FIG. 41). When the variation time corresponding to the pattern ends, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the normal variation start process (see FIG. 40) or the time saving variation start process (see FIG. 41) In the display mode set by the processing of S404, S409, S411 or the processing of S504, S509, S511, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1708). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S914 or the process of S915 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), variation display is started on the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S917 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S910 or the process of S911 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display). To do.

Next, the storage device control process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 750a associated with the storage device 750 is executed (S1709).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1710), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1710: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1711). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1711: Yes), the process moves to S1701 and the above-described processes after S1701 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1711: No), the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1712, S1713).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1712). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1713).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1701 to S1709 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the processing of S1710, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1710: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 51 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1714 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1714), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1715). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1716), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1717), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

Note that the processing of S1710 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1709 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1712 and S1713 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1701. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1701 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S1601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1701 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S1704). This jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 53), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the first This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1801). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203h is set to ON by the process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1801, when the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1801: Yes), the big hit start flag 203h is set to OFF (S1802), and the opening command is set (S1803).

The jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp is activated. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot start command, the voice lamp controller 113 transmits a display jackpot start command to the display controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the effect of starting the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the process of S1803 ends, the storage release flag 203p is set to ON (S1804), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1801, if the special symbol big hit is not started (S1801: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol big hit is in progress (S1805). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. Specifically, it is determined by whether or not the big hit medium flag 203i is turned on. In the process of S1805, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1805: No), this process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1805, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1805: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1806). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1806: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S1807), and a round number command indicating the newly started round number is set ( S1808). After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command according to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the continuous jackpot is executed in the voice lamp control device 113, a display round number command corresponding to the cumulative number of round numbers is transmitted. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in the continuous jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be made aware that the jackpot is continuing for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S1806, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1806: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 30 seconds) are set on the first variable winning device 65. , A total of 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when the prize is won.

In the process of S1809, if the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. , This process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S1809: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the jackpot end (S1811). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that it is the timing of ending the jackpot.

In the processing of S1811, if it is the timing of ending the big hit (S1811: Yes), the big hit end command is set (S1812), and the big hit medium flag 203i is set to OFF (S1813).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was the jackpot B (S1814). In the process of S1814, when it is determined that it is not the big hit B (7R time-short, no big hit) (S1814: No), the time-short and medium counter 203g is set to 1 (S1815), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1814, when it is determined that the big hit B (7R time short no big hit) (S1814: Yes), the process of S1815 is skipped and the present process ends.

The jackpot end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is output. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the jackpot ending effect based on the winning information stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a jackpot end command for display corresponding to the selected display mode of jackpot end is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the jackpot end effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the small hit control process (S1705) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process (S1705) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). This small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol small hit state, execution of various effects according to the small hit, and This is a process for opening or closing the opening/closing door 650f1 of the two-variable winning device 650.

In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1901). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203j is set to ON by the process of S610 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42), it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the processing of S1901, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1901: Yes), the small hit start flag 203j is set to OFF (S1902), and the small hit start command is set (S1903).

The small hit start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the small hitting start command, it sends the display small hitting start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display small hit start command, the effect of starting the small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S1903 is completed, the V inlet solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 209c are set to ON based on the opening scenario (S1904), the operation of the staying member 650n is started (S1905), and the present process is terminated.

The opening scenario referred to in the process of S1904 is set in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42) described above, and the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a is set regardless of the small hit type, The opening scenario of the solenoid 209c is set only when the small hit type is A, C, D or E. Therefore, the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened in all the small hit games, and it becomes possible to enter the ball into the second variable winning device 650. On the other hand, only in the small hit A, C, D or E in which the flow path solenoid 209c is turned on, the ball that has entered the second variable winning device 650 can flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2. That is, the small hit A, C, D or E is a small hit type to which the big hit is given, and the small hit B is a small hit type to which the big hit is not given.

In addition, when the operation of the staying member 650n is started (the staying solenoid 209b is turned on) in the process of S1905, one ball can be retained in the sorting destination area 650h3.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1901, if it is not the timing when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1901: No), it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S1906). During the small hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, while the display showing the small hit of the special symbol (including the small hit game of the special symbol) is being made, It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the small hitting game of special symbols. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit medium flag 203k is turned on. In the process of S1906, if it is not during the small hit of the special symbol (S1906: No), this process is finished as it is.

In the process of S1906, when it is determined that the special symbol is in a small hit (S1906: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the V entrance closing condition is satisfied (S1907). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 6.5 seconds) elapses after opening the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 6.5 seconds) are present in the second variable winning device 650. When 10 prizes are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

The closing condition may be that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls enter the second specific winning opening 650a.

In the process of S1907, when the closing condition of the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning a prize device 650 is satisfied (S1907: Yes), the V entrance solenoid 209a is closed to close the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning a prize device 650. It is set to OFF (S1908), the staying solenoid 209b is set to OFF to end the operation of the staying member 650n (S1909), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is not satisfied (S1907: No), it is determined whether it is the timing for ending the small hit (S1910). Specifically, after a lapse of a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present control example) after the above-described V entrance closing condition is satisfied, it is determined that it is the timing for ending the small hit. This makes it possible to execute the small hitting end process (turning off the flow path solenoid 209c) after the operation of the staying member 650n is completed, so that the balls retained in the sorting destination area 650h3 are transferred to the V winning switch 650e3. It is possible to reliably enter the ball.

In the process of S1910, when it is the timing of the small hit end (S1910: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203k is set to OFF (S1911), the small hit end process is executed (S1912), and each solenoid is opened. The scenario is cleared (S1913), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1910, if it is not the timing for ending the small hit (S1910: No), this processing is ended as it is.

Here, the details of the small hit ending process (S1912) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the small hit ending process (S1912). The small hitting end process (S1912) is a process executed when it is determined in the small hitting control process that it is the timing for ending the small hit.

In the small hit ending process (S1912), first, the flow path solenoid 209c is set to OFF (S2001), and it is determined whether or not the V flag 203n is ON (S2002). In the process of S2002, when it is determined that the V flag 203n is on (S2002: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game. Processing for starting the execution of the jackpot game based on the passage of the V winning switch 650e3 is performed.

Specifically, the opening scenario of the first specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203n (S2003), and the jackpot start is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203n ( S2004). Next, the big hit start flag 203h and the big hit medium flag 203i are set to ON (S2005), and the V flag 203n is set to OFF (S2006). Then, the time saving medium counter 230g is set to 0 (S2007), the value of the V passing jackpot type value stored in the V passing jackpot type storing area 203m is cleared (S2008), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2002, when it is determined that the V flag 203n is not turned on (S2002: No), it means that the ball has not passed the V winning switch 650e3 to the small hit ball, and therefore no big hit is given. To finish, a small hit end command is set (S2009). After that, the processing of S2008 is executed, and this processing is ended.

The small hit end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the jackpot ending effect based on the winning information stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a jackpot end command for display corresponding to the selected display mode of jackpot end is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the jackpot end effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the electric accessory opening/closing process (S1706) will be described with reference to FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory opening/closing process (S1706) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). This electric accessory opening/closing process (S1706) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) and for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640.

In the electric accessory opening/closing process, first, it is determined whether or not the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2101). The opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set by the electric accessory control process (FIG. 46, S1005) executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45). In the process of S2101, when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is not set (S2101: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2101: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102). When it is determined in the process of S2102 that it is the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102: Yes), the opening of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2103), and the present process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2102 that it is not the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102: No), then it is determined whether it is the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2104). When it is determined that it is the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2104: Yes), the closing of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2105), and then it is determined whether the time saving operation is being performed (S2106). ). When it is determined in the process of S2106 that the time saving operation is not being performed (S2106: No), this process is ended. When it is determined in the process of S2106 that the time saving operation is being performed (S2106: Yes), the closing command is set (S2107), and the present process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2104 that it is not the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2104: No), then it is determined whether it is the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2108). When it is determined that it is the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: Yes), the opening of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2109), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2108 that it is not the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: No), then it is determined whether it is the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2110). When it is determined that it is not the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2110: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball has entered the second entrance 640 (S2111). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the second entrance 640 (S2111: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2110 that it is the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: Yes), and when it is determined in S2111 that the ball has entered the second entrance 640. (S2111: Yes), the closing of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2112). Then, the setting of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is cleared (S2113), and the present processing ends.

Next, the storage device control processing (S1709) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the storage device control process (S1709) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). The storage device control process (S1709) is a process that is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) and is for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 750a associated with the storage device 750.

In the storage device control process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the release counter 203pa is larger than 1 (S2201). If it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is not larger than 1 (that is, 0 or 1) (S2201: No), then it is determined whether or not the storage release flag 203p is on (S2202). If it is determined to be on (S2202: Yes), storage cancellation (that is, opening of the storage valve 750a) is set (S2203). Then, the value of the cancellation counter 203pa is set to 1, and the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, in the processing of S2201, when it is determined that the value of the cancel counter 203pa is larger than 1 (S2201: Yes), the processing of S2201 to S2204 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2205.

In the process of S2205, it is determined whether or not the value of the cancellation counter 203pa is 25000 (S2205). When it is determined that the value of the cancellation counter 203pa is not 25000 (S2205: No), the value of the cancellation counter 203pa is incremented by 1 (S2206), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is 25000 (S2205: Yes), storage closing (that is, closing of the storage valve 750a) is set (S2207), and the storage releasing flag 203p is set. It is set to off (S2208). Next, the value of the cancellation counter 203pa is set to 0, and this processing ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 70. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 59, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S3001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S3119 (see FIG. 60) occurs due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the current startup processing. It is determined whether or not it was started during the execution of () (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S3116 of FIG. 60), the power-off process of S3119 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S3119 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off process in progress flag is off (S3002: No), the startup process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S3119 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S3006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, the startup process of this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of S3119 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process proceeds to S3008.

If the power-off process in progress flag is on (S3002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S3119, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S3004, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S3004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S3006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S3119 is executed (see S3118 in FIG. 60). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S3119 is executed, the process of S3008 with the power-off flag turned on is that the start-up process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure occurs and the processing is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S3119 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S3009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S3008 is reached in the state where the power-off flag is off is that the present startup process is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S3004 to S3006 is performed and the process of S3008 is performed. This is the case where the processing is started or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S3009, is skipped, the process proceeds to S3010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S3009 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S3004 when the processing of S3004 goes through the processing of S3006 to the processing of S3008. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or after the process of S3101 this time has been executed (S3101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3112 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3111. In the process of S3101, it is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S3102 to S3111 that determines whether or not 1 msec has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S3112, the variable display setting process of S3113, the effect state setting process of S3114, and the specific effect setting process of S3115 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S3112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S3113 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make the setting related to the variation effect without delay. Further, by executing the process of S3114 in a short cycle, based on the command received by the command determination process, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the display content corresponding to the current game state without delay. Can be made.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S3103 to S3111 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to the process of S3105 without performing the power-on notifying process.

In the process of S3105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the retained quantity display updating process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed and controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number of holding balls counter 223b is performed.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S3107). This frame button input monitoring/production process corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed by monitoring the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S3108), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S3109, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S3110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S3108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output process of S3109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the counter updating process (S3111), a command determining process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S3112). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Then, the process proceeds to S3113. In the process of S3113, the variable display setting process is executed (S3113). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67.

Then, the process proceeds to S3114. In the process of S3114, effect state setting process is executed (S3114). In this effect state setting process, for setting an effect state for making each effect mode (display mode of the third symbol, display mode of the reserved symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 correspond to the game state. The process is executed, and the display effect state command is generated and set based on the set effect state. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the effect state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

When the process of S3114 is completed, the process proceeds to S3115. In the process of S3115, a specific effect setting process is executed (S3115). In this specific effect setting process, a process for setting an effect different from the variable effect for showing the lottery result of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) is executed. The details of the specific effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

Then, when the specific effect setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S3118), and the power-off process is executed (S3119). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S3120), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3117: No), the process returns to S3101 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3117: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the command determination processing (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S3112). This command determination process (S3112) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 60) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This is processing for.

In the command determination process (FIG. 61, S3112), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read and analyzed from the command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, It is determined whether or not a variation pattern related command has been received (S3201). The variation pattern related command is a command for notifying a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol, or a command for notifying a variation pattern (variation time) of a normal symbol, from the main control device 110, The selected variation pattern (variation time) is output corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or the normal symbol.

In the process of S3201, when it is determined that the variation pattern related command is received (S3201: Yes), the variation pattern related process (S3202) is executed. This variation pattern-related process is used to extract a variation pattern based on the variation pattern-related command output (received) from the main control device 110, and to cause the display control device 114 to perform effect display. Here, the variation pattern related processing (S3202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern related processing (S3202). In this variation pattern-related processing (S3202), it is determined which variation pattern command the currently received variation pattern corresponds to, and based on the determination result, the processing corresponding to the received symbol is executed. .. In this variation pattern-related processing (S3202), it is determined whether the variation pattern-related command received this time is a variation pattern command for a special symbol (special figure) (S3301). In the process of S3301, if it is determined that the command is a variation pattern command for special figure (S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to S3302.

In the process of S3302, when it is determined that the variation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302: Yes), as shown in FIG. 62, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern received this time is a variation pattern command for special figure. Yes (S3301). Here, it is determined whether the variation pattern received this time is a variation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302), and if it is determined that it is a variation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302: Yes), then , The special 2 variation flag 223s is set to ON (S3303), the special figure variation start flag is set to ON, and the variation pattern is extracted from the received command (S3305), while the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set. To be done.

The fluctuation start flag 223d (special figure fluctuation start flag) provided in the fluctuation display of the special symbol is set to ON, the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S3305), and this processing is ended. .. On the other hand, in the processing of S3301, if it is determined that the variation pattern related command received this time is not the special figure variation pattern command, the general figure variation start flag 223u is set to ON (S3306), and the received variation pattern is received. The variation pattern type is extracted from the command (S3307), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is the variation pattern type of the special symbol in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 for each type of the special symbol (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) It is stored in an identifiable format, and in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) described later, the start of the variable display effect of the special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the special symbol are displayed to the display control device 114. It is used when notifying (when setting a variation pattern command for displaying special symbols).

Returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. In the process of S3201, when it is determined that the variation pattern related command is not received (S3201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S3203). If it is determined that the stop type command (either the special figure 1 stop type command, the special figure 2 stop type command, or the general figure stop type command) has been received (S3203: Yes), it corresponds to the type of the received command. The stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S3204). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special The stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the symbol is set to ON, and when the universal figure stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the normal symbol is set to ON.

When the process of S3204 is completed, the stop type (any one of complete loss (off), out-of-reach, small hit, and big hit (hit)) is extracted from the received stop type command (S3205), and this process is executed. finish. The stop type extracted in the process of S3205 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Then, it is referred to when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) described later is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

In the processing of S3203, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S3203: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3206). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S3206: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 included in the received reserved ball number command Value (that is, the number of reserved balls of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and corresponding to the extracted counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. The counter value is updated (S3207). More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is stored. When the value is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223c.

In the process of S3207. When a normal symbol hold sphere number command indicating the number of spheres of the normal symbol is received, the value of the normal symbol hold sphere counter (not shown) (that is, the number of spheres of the variable display of the normal symbol) is extracted and extracted. The corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is also updated according to the counter value.

When the process of S3207 is finished, the number of reserved balls related process is executed (S3208). In this reserved sphere number related process (S3208), a process for setting various flags and display commands is executed based on the reserved sphere number of special figure 2. Here, the number of reserved balls related processing (S3208) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the content of the number of reserved balls related processing (S3208).

When the number of reserved balls related process (S3208) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special 2 (special figure 2) reserved number of balls is updated (S3401). If it is determined that the special 2 reserved sphere count has not been updated (S3401: No), that is, if the currently received reserved sphere count command is not the reserved sphere count of the special map 2, this processing is ended. .. On the other hand, in the processing of S3401, if it is determined that the special 2 reserved ball number is updated (S3401: Yes), then it is determined whether the special 2 reserved ball number is updated to 1 (S3402). Here, it is determined whether the special 2 reserved ball number has been updated to 1, that is, the special 2 reserved ball number has changed from "0" to "1", that is, whether there is a special 2 reserved ball or not. To do.

In the process of S3402, when it is determined that the special 2 reserved number of balls has been updated to 1 (S3402: Yes), the special 2 reserved flag 223n is set to ON, and then the finish effect execution flag 223x is set to ON. It is determined whether it has been done (S3404). When it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the end effect (see FIG. 19B) is being executed by the third symbol display device 81 (S3404: Yes), the display victory command is set (S3405), and this processing ends.

When the display victory command is set, the character "Victory" is displayed as the effect result of the end effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 20(a)), which is advantageous to the player. It is notified that this state will continue. If a ball wins the special figure 2 during the period in which the end effect is being executed, the effect may be switched even during the end effect, or it may be determined in advance as in the present embodiment. It may be configured to notify that the ball has been won in the special map 2 at the end of the end effect executed for the predetermined period.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, the timing at which the ball wins the special map 2 (second ball entrance 640) and, as an effect, the fact that the ball wins the special map 2 (second ball entrance 640) is notified. When there is a possibility that a time lag will occur with the timing of performing, for example, the reserved symbol displaying the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 may be deleted during the end effect execution period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of the effect result of the end effect due to the increase in the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 even though the end effect is continued.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S3402, if it is determined that the special 2 reserved ball number is not updated to 1 (S3402: No), then it is determined whether the special 2 reserved ball number is updated to the upper limit (4) (S3406). ), if it is determined that it has been updated (S3406: Yes), the special 2 suspension upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S3407: Yes), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3406 that the special 2 reserved number of balls has not been updated to the upper limit, the process of S3407 is skipped and the present process ends.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start prize) or the ball passes through the through gate 67. Therefore, every time there is a start winning, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S2210, the main controller It can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d of 110 and the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c of the voice lamp controller 113 is the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or special of the main controller 110. Even if it deviates from the value of the symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, if the holding ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol of the voice lamp control device 113 The value of the 2 holding sphere number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

In addition, in the processing of S3206, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S3206: No), it is determined whether a winning information related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3209). In the process of S3209, when it is determined that the prize information related command is received (S3209: Yes), the prize information related process is executed (S3210). In the prize information-related process (S3210), various flags and various counters that are referred to for setting various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 are set. Thereby, based on the lottery result of the pending special symbol, before the fluctuation of the pending special symbol is started (that is, the special symbol being executed before the fluctuation of the target special symbol) (Variable display), it is possible to execute the effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol that has transmitted the winning information command, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed to the player using the variable display period of the plurality of special symbols. It is possible to give a suggestion and to enhance the effect.

Here, the winning information-related process (S3210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (S3210). When this prize information-related processing (S3210) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the prize information-related command received this time is a prize information command relating to a special symbol (special symbol) (S3501). When it is determined that it is the prize information command relating to the special figure (S3501: Yes), the received prize information command is stored in the special figure prize information storage area 223a (S3502), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S3501, if it is determined that the prize information related command received this time is not the prize information command related to the special figure (special symbol) (the prize information command related to the general figure) (S3501: No), the prize is won. The information is stored in the prize-winning information storage area 223t for public figures (S3503), and this processing ends.

In the gaming machine in which the winning information of special symbols (pre-reading of special symbols) and the winning information of normal symbols (pre-reading of general symbols) are executed, the main controller 110 outputs to the voice lamp controller 113. The output timing of each prize information command is the same, and when determining by the prize information related processing (S3210), a priority order is set for each prize information command, and only the prize information command having a high priority order is determined. It may be configured as follows. As a result, it is not necessary to perform different determination processing for each winning information command, the processing load can be reduced, and the type and number of winning information commands determined by the voice lamp control device 113 side are irregular. Since it can be reduced to, it is possible to easily execute an effect not intended by the player.

That is, the winning information included in the winning information command is acquired by the main controller 110 when the ball enters each of the entrances (the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640) or the through gate 67. Each of the counter values is a result obtained by performing a determination in advance before the lottery based on the entered ball is executed, or is information indicating a value based on the counter value, and therefore the voice lamp control device 113 Even if the side does not surely acquire the prize information command, it does not interfere with the game, so if the predetermined condition is satisfied (the special figure prize information command and the general figure prize information command are received at the same time. In this case, the above-described effect is achieved by intentionally not acquiring one of the winning information commands. Further, like the left first entrance 64a and the right first entrance 64b of the present embodiment, in a configuration in which there are a plurality of acquisition conditions (entering) for one symbol (first special symbol), the winning The information command includes information that allows the voice lamp control device 113 to identify which acquisition condition is based on which acquisition condition is satisfied, and based on the identification result, processing based on the prize information command is performed. May be variable. Specifically, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a prize information command based on a ball entering the left first ball entrance 64a, an effect based on the received prize information command (so-called prefetch effect). May be configured to be performed more frequently than when the winning information command based on the entry into the right first entrance 64b is received. Thereby, even with the same first special symbol, it is possible to easily change the frequency with which the look-ahead effect is executed. According to the configuration shown in the above-mentioned example, during the game aiming at the left first entrance 64a (left hitting game), the prefetch effect based on the first special symbol can be executed (frequently executed), and the right first The pre-reading effect based on the first special symbol may be difficult to execute (can be executed with a low probability) during a game that aims at the entrance 64b (a right-handed game). As a result, it is possible to set an effect mode according to the game state.

Returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3209, when it is determined that the winning information related command has not been received (S3209: No), it is determined whether or not a hit related command has been received (S3211). When the hit related command is received (S3211: Yes), the hit related processing (S3212) is executed.

Here, the hit related processing (S3212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the hit related processing (S3212). The hit related process (S3212) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) that the hit related command is received.

In the hit-related processing, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot start command has been received (S3601). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S3601: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S3602), and this processing ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the jackpot start command for display, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting (notifying) the jackpot start on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S3601: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S3603). In the process of S3603, when it is determined that the round number command is received (S3603: Yes), 1 is added to the round number cumulative counter (S3604). After that, the display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter (S3605), and this processing is ended.

In the process of S3603, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S3603: No), it is determined whether the jackpot end command is received (S3606). In the process of S3606, when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S3606: Yes), the display jackpot end command is set (S3607), and the process ends.

In the process of S3606, when it is determined that the big hit end command has not been received (S3606: No), it is determined whether the small hit start command has been received (S3608).

In the process of S3608, when it is determined that the small hitting start command is received (S3608: Yes), the small hitting start command for display is set based on the small hitting type (S3609), and the present process is ended. In the processing of S3608, when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S3608: No), it is determined whether the small hit end command has been received (S3610).

In the process of S3610, when it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S3610: Yes), a small hit end command for display is set in order to execute an effect suggesting the end of the small hit game (S3611). , This process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3610, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S3610: No), it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received (S3612).

In the process of S3612, if it is determined that the V pass command is received (S3612: Yes), the process based on the ball entering the V prize switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 is executed, and the display V pass command is executed. Is set (S3613), and this processing ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, a measuring unit that measures the number of times the V passage command is received during the period in which the in-village flag 223i is set to ON is provided, and a display unit corresponding to the number of times of measurement by the measuring unit is provided. The V pass command is settable. Specifically, the display V pass command is set such that the privilege effect is executed only when the number of times of measurement by the measuring means exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). As a result, the player can be made to aim for more V passages, and the player can enthusiastically play the game.

It should be noted that other conditions may be set as conditions for setting the contents of the display V pass command, for example, the number of small hit games that did not pass V and the number of small hit games that passed V, respectively. A means for measuring and calculating the ratio may be provided, and the content of the display V pass command may be set based on the ratio calculated by the means. As a result, a player who has performed many small hit games that do not pass V will execute an effect that celebrates that fact when he/she passes V, and a player who performs a small hit game that has passed V at a high rate. For example, it is possible to perform an effect to bless that effect.

In the processing of S3612, when it is determined that the V passage command has not been received (S3612: No), this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3211, if it is determined that the hit related command has not been received (S3211: No), then it is determined whether the notification command has been received (S3213). When it is determined that the notification command is received in the process of S3213 (S3213: Yes), the notification voice is set, the display command for notification is set (S3214), and the process is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3213, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S3213: No), it is determined whether the status command has been received (S3215). When it is determined that the status command has been received (S3215: Yes), the status information based on the received status command is stored in the status storage area 223k (S3216), and this processing ends. As the status command received here, a normal status command for indicating that the gaming status is a normal status, a jackpot status command for indicating that the gaming status is a jackpot status, and a gaming status for a jackpot status Is a small hit state command to indicate that, the game state is a time saving state command to indicate that it is a time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operating, and how many times it is operating It is a state command related to the game state that can be grasped on the main controller 110 side, such as an operation state command for indicating.

The above-mentioned state command is configured to be received from the main control device 110 when the game state is shifted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the process of determining the content of the received status command from becoming complicated and reduce the processing load. When a power failure or the like occurs and the data in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is erased, the status command currently set in the power failure recovery process is output. The output timing of the state command is not limited to this, and the currently set gaming state may be periodically output, or the gaming state does not change and satisfies a specific output condition. In the case (for example, during the jackpot game, the timing when a predetermined round is reached, or in the normal state, the timing when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number) may be output. As a result, the current gaming state can be grasped more reliably on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

On the other hand, in the process of S3215, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S3215: No), then the process according to the other command is executed (S3217). In the process of S3217, for example, it is determined whether the stop command is received from the main control device 110, and when it is determined that the stop command is received, the display stop command is set based on the received command, and the game is played. When a ball entry command set based on the entry of a ball into each entrance provided on the board 13 is received, the number of entrances is accumulated for each type of entrance into which the ball entered. , Executes the process of setting the display ball count command.

Next, the variable display setting process (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S3113). The variable display setting process (S3113) is a process of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) is a process executed to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, in the present embodiment, in accordance with the effect state that has been set, each symbol corresponding to the main symbol that is mainly effect-displayed in the third symbol display device 81 (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) is Designed to be variable. In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is set for each of the above-mentioned symbols, and the display control device 114 is notified. Then, by the display control device 114, based on the received display variation pattern command and the content of the received display effect state command, the main symbol (the symbol to be displayed in the first display area Dm) and the sub symbol (the second symbol). The effect display corresponding to (the pattern to be displayed in the display area Dn) is displayed. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 in the gaming machine in which different effect displays are executed corresponding to a plurality of effect states.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S3113), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3701). If it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223d is off (S3701: No), the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S3707. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223d is ON (S3701: YES), based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, a detailed mode of the variation display of the special symbol this time. Each processing of S3702-S3706 for determining is executed.

More specifically, first, the special figure variation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S3702), then the extracted variation pattern is acquired (S3703), and it is determined whether or not the time saving medium flag 223g is ON ( S3704). In the process of S3704, when it is determined that the time saving medium flag 223g is on (S3704: Yes), the time saving medium flag is set to off (S3705), and the special pattern display variation pattern command is set ( The process proceeds to S3706) and S3707. On the other hand, in the process of S3704, when it is determined that the time saving flag 223g is not on (off) (S3704: No), the process of S3705 is skipped and the process of S3706 is executed.

In addition, when performing the process of S3706, 1 is subtracted from the value of the corresponding special symbol holding sphere counter (special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b or special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c, to the subtracted value Based on this, the data in the special figure prize information storage area 223a included in the command storage area is shifted.

In the process of S3707, it is determined whether the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure among the stop type selection flags 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3707). If it is determined that the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure among the stop type selection flags 223e is off (S3707: No), the process proceeds to S3712. On the other hand, in the process of S3707, when it is determined that the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure among the stop type selection flags 223e is on (S3707: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e (for special figure) is turned off. (S3708), then the stop type extracted in the process of S3205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 61) is acquired (S3709), and the acquired stop type is set as it is (S3710). Then, a display stop type command for notifying the stop type to the display control device 114 is set (S3711). After that, the universal figure variation display setting process (S3712) is executed, and this process ends.

The universal figure variation display setting process (S3712) is a process executed to display a variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81 when a variation pattern command relating to the universal figure variation is received from the main control device 110. Here, the universal figure variation display setting process (S3712) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the universal figure variation display setting process (S3712). When the universal figure variation display setting process (S3712) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the universal figure variation start flag 223u is set to ON. If it is determined that the variation start flag 223u for universal figure is off (S3801: No), it means that the variation pattern command relating to universal figure has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore the process proceeds to S3810. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the general-use variation start flag 223u is on (S3801: Yes), based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the detailed mode of the variation display of the special symbol this time Each processing of S3802-S3810 for determining is executed.

Of the various processes executed in the universal figure variable display setting process (S3712) of FIG. 67, the same process as the variable display setting process (S3113) described with reference to FIG. 66 is executed. Detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of S3801, if it is determined that the general-purpose fluctuation start flag 223u is turned on (S3801: Yes), the special drawing S3702 or S3703 executed in the fluctuation display setting processing (S3113) is executed. With respect to the processing, the processing of S3802 and S3803 in which the target is changed to a universal figure is executed, and then it is determined whether or not the timing at which the fluctuation based on the received fluctuation pattern command is executed is in the time saving state (S3804). Here, the determination is made based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k and the short time remaining period information stored in the short time remaining period storage area 223h.

In the processing of S3804, when it is determined that the fluctuation start timing is in the time saving state (S3804: Yes), the timing at which the fluctuation based on the received fluctuation pattern command ends (in the case of winning, the electric accessory 640a). It is determined whether or not the timing for setting the operation content of is in the time saving state (S3805). Here, by calculating the difference between the short-term remaining period information stored in the short-term remaining period storage area 223h and the variation time included in the obtained variation pattern, it is determined whether or not there is a time-saving state at the timing when the variation ends. To do.

In the process of S3805, when it is determined that the variation end timing (electrical accessory 640a operation start timing) is in a short time (S3805: Yes), the universal figure valid flag 223q is set to ON (S3806), and then the variation is performed. It is determined whether the end timing is within 2 seconds of the time saving end (S3807). In the process of S3807, when it is determined that the variation end timing is within 2 seconds of the time saving end (S3807: Yes), the replacement flag 223v is set to ON (S3808), and the display variation pattern command (for general figure) ) Is set (S3810), and the process proceeds to S3811.

On the other hand, if it is determined No in step S3804 or S3805, the universal figure valid flag 223q is set to OFF (S3809), and the process proceeds to step S3810 described above. Further, in the process of S3807, when it is determined that the variation end timing is not within 2 seconds of the time saving end (S3807: No), the process of S3808 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3810.

Next, the processing of S3811 to S3815 similar to S3707 to S3711 described above with reference to FIG. 66 is executed, and this processing ends. It should be noted that in S3811 to S3815, the processing executed is that the target of the stop type command is the stop type command for special figures in S3707 to S3711, and the stop type command for general figures in S3811 to S3815. The only difference is that the other contents are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the effect state setting process (S3114) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect state setting process (S3114). This effect state setting process (S3114) is a process for setting the effect state according to the state command output from the main control device 110 and the current game situation, and is the effect state set in this process. By outputting information (display effect state command for display) to the display control device 114, a display mode of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The display mode of the number of reserved memories of each symbol (the number of reserved symbols) is configured to be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the effect state.

When the effect state setting process (S3114) is executed, first, the state information (game state) stored in the state storage area 223k is read (S3901). This status information is stored in the status storage area 223k based on the status command received from the main control device 110 in the command determination processing (see S3112 in FIG. 61) described above. Therefore, it is used to determine the current game state on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Next, with reference to the state information stored in the state storage area 223k, it is determined whether or not the present (state information stored in the state storage area 223k) indicates the start of a big hit (S3902). If it is determined that the jackpot is started (S3902: Yes), the in-long-compartment flag 223i is set to ON (S3903), and the process proceeds to S3918. On the other hand, in the process of S3902, when it is determined that it does not indicate the start of the big hit (S3902: No), it is then determined whether it indicates the end of the big hit (S3904).

When it is determined in the process of S3904 that the end of the big hit is indicated (S3904: Yes), it is then determined whether or not to shift to the time saving state after the end of the big hit (S3905). This determination in S3905 is made based on the jackpot type information stored in the state storage area 223k. In the process of S3905, if it is determined that the time saving state is to be entered (S3905: Yes), the time saving flag 223g is set to ON (S3906), and then the process proceeds to S3918.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3905 that the shift to the time saving state is not performed (S3905: No), the in-village flag 223i is set to OFF (S3907), and the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to OFF (S3908). The end effect execution flag 223x is set to OFF (S3909), and the process proceeds to S3918.

If it is determined that the processing of S3904 does not indicate the end of the big hit (S3904: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to end the time saving state (S3910). When it is determined that it is the timing when the time saving state ends (S3910: Yes), the special 2 hold flag 223n for determining whether or not the second special symbol (special view 2) is stored on hold is set to ON. It is determined whether it has been done (S3911). Here, if it is determined that the special 2 hold flag 223n is not on (off) (S3911: No), the in-compartment flag 223i is set to off (S3912), and the process proceeds to S3918. When it is determined that the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON (S3911: Yes), the process similarly shifts to S3918.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit is started, the in-compartment flag 223i is set to ON, and when the short-time state is not given after the big hit ends, or when the short-time state ends, the special FIG. When the pending storage is “0”, the condominium flag 223i is set to off. Thereby, during the jackpot game, the time saving state, the state in which the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed when the time saving state shifts to the normal state is repeatedly executed. During the specific period that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to continuously set the continuous vacation flag 223i. Therefore, by measuring various values (for example, the number of times the jackpot has been executed, the number of coins acquired, etc.) during the period in which the continuous holiday flag 223i is turned on, various values in the continuous holiday mode can be easily obtained. In the pachinko machine 10 having the continuous game mode that shifts to a plurality of different game states, the processing can be simplified.

Returning to FIG. 68, the description will be continued. In the process of S3910, when it is determined that it is not the timing to end the time saving state (not the timing to end the time saving) (S3910: No), it is determined whether it is the small hit start timing (S3913), and the small hit start timing is set. When it is determined that there is (S3913: Yes), it is determined whether the present state is the normal state (S3914). In the process of S3914, when it is determined that the present state is the normal state (S3914: Yes), the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON (S3915), and the process proceeds to S3918. On the other hand, when it is determined that the present state is not the normal state (the time saving state) in the process of S3914 (S3914: No), the process of S3915 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to S3918.

In the process of S3913, when it is determined that the present is not the small hit start timing (S3913: No), then it is determined whether the present is the small hit end timing (S3916), and when the small hit end timing is reached. (S3916: Yes), the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to OFF (S3917), and the process proceeds to S3918. Here, in the case of the small hit end timing, if it is determined that the pseudo effect flag 223r is not set to ON (that is, the end timing of the small hit executed during the time saving state), the process of S3917. The process moves to S3918 without executing the process.

In the process of S3916, when it is determined that the present is not the small hit end timing (S3916: No), the process proceeds to S3918. In the process of S3918, the current effect state is selected based on the effect state selection table 222b (S3918). Then, a display effect state command indicating the selected effect state is set (S3919), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the specific effect setting process (S3115) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the content of the specific effect setting process (S3115). The specific effect setting process (S3115) is a process for setting a display command for displaying the specific effect on the third symbol display device 81 when the specific condition is satisfied.

In the first embodiment, the privilege effect (see FIG. 21) executed when the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol (special map 2) reaches the upper limit (4) in the time saving state (see FIG. 21). And, in the time saving state, when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not stored in a reserved state, the remaining period of the time saving state (variation remaining period of special figure 1) becomes a predetermined period (10 seconds) The end effect (see FIG. 19(b)) executed in step 1 is executed as the specific effect.

When the display control device 114 receives the display command indicating the content of the specific effect, the display mode corresponding to the received specific effect content regardless of the variable display state of each symbol (whether or not it is changing). Is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the specific effect setting process (S3115) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the in-village flag 223i is set to ON (S4001), and the in-village flag 223i is not set to ON (set to OFF). If it has been determined (S4001: No), this processing is ended as it is. When it is determined that the condominium flag 223i is set to ON (S4001: Yes), it is then determined whether the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON (S4002), and the flag is set to ON. If it is determined that there is not any (S4002: No), it is determined whether the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S4003).

In the process of S4003, if the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S4003: Yes), the display special effect command is set (S4004), and the special effect execution flag 223w is set to ON (S4005). ), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4003: No), or the privilege effect execution flag 223w is already set to ON in the process of S4002. If it is determined that it has been performed (S4002: Yes), the process proceeds to S4006.

In the process of S4006, it is determined whether the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4006). Here, if it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4006: No), then it is determined whether the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON. If it is determined (S4007) that the special 2 hold flag 223n is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4007; No), it is determined whether the remaining time saving period is 10 seconds (S4008). ).

In the processing of S4008, the determination is executed by reading the information indicating the short time remaining period stored in the short time remaining period storage area 223h. In the process of S4008, when it is determined that the remaining time saving period is 10 seconds (S4008: Yes), the display game end effect command is set (S4009), and the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4010). ), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4006, when it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4006: Yes), or when the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON in the process of S4007 (S4007). : Yes), the processing of S4008 to S4010 is skipped, and the present processing is directly terminated.

As described above, in the specific effect setting process (S3315) of the present embodiment described with reference to FIG. 69, the state in which the condominium flag 223i is set to ON as the first specific effect. When the special 2 holding upper limit flag 223p is set to ON during the (time saving state) (when the number of holding storages of the special drawing 2 reaches the upper limit), the bonus effect (see FIG. 22) is configured to be executed. There is. By executing this privilege effect, it is possible to provide the player with a high-value-added effect, so that the player can enthusiastically perform the game in the time saving state. In addition, when the special effect is executed, the universal figure main design Dmc is not displayed, and thus the number of reserved memories in special map 2 cannot be increased (the number of reserved memories in special map 2 has already reached the upper limit. The state in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling awkward.

Furthermore, since the above-mentioned privilege effect is configured to be continuously executed until the continuous vacation flag 223i is set to OFF (until the continuous vacation mode ends), the added value is added to the player. Since it is possible to provide a high-quality production for at least a long time (at least until the number of reserved memories in special figure 2 is exhausted), the production with a high added value ends in a short period of time, and the player's willingness to play. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as a decrease in

In addition, as the second specific effect, without acquiring the reserved memory of special figure 2 while the flag 223i in the condominium is set to ON (time saving state) (the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 is " 0” state), and when the remaining period of the time saving state becomes a predetermined period (10 seconds remaining), an end effect (see FIG. 19(b)) that suggests that the extended game mode will end It is configured to run. With such a configuration, the player can easily recognize the possibility that the extended game mode will end, and the advantageous period for the player (the extended play mode) will end without noticing it. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a problem.

Next, the counter updating process (S3111) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the counter updating process (S3111). This counter updating process (S3111) is a process for updating the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j and calculating the elapsed time (remaining time) of the executed fluctuation display. Information about the remaining time (short time remaining period) of the variable time referred to here (display short time remaining period command) is output to the display control device 114 and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The voice lamp control device 113 is referred to when setting the effect contents.

When the counter update process (S3111) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current value of the variable time counter 223j is "0" (S4101). If it is determined to be “0” (S4101: Yes), that is, if the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is not updated (the special figure 1 fluctuation during the time saving state is not executed), next, It is determined whether or not the present time is during a time saving (in a time saving state) (S4102). Here, the determination is made based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k.

In the process of S4102, when it is determined that the present time is in a shortening period (S4102: Yes), it is next determined whether or not it is the timing when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is started (S4103), and the special figure 1 When it is determined that it is the timing at which the fluctuation starts (S4103: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is set to "1" (S4104), and the remaining fluctuation time is calculated based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j. A period (time saving remaining period) is calculated, and information indicating the calculated time saving remaining period is stored in the time saving remaining period storage area 223h (S4105).

After that, the display short-time remaining period command is set (S4106), and the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4102, when it is determined that the present is not during the time saving (in the time saving state) (S4102: No), or when it is determined in the process of S4103 that the present is not the start timing of the change in Toku-zu 1 In (S4103: No), the processes of S4104 to S4106 are skipped and the present process ends.

In the processing of S4101, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is not "0" (S4101: No), that is, the state where the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j has already been updated (special figure 1 in the time saving state). In a state where the fluctuation is being executed), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is “150,000” (whether 150 seconds has elapsed) (S4107). If it is determined that the value of the variable time counter 223j is not “150,000” (“less than 150,000”) (S4107: Yes), the value of the variable time counter 223j is incremented by “1” (S4108). Then, the process shifts to S4105 described above. On the other hand, in the process of S4107, when it is determined that the value of the variable time counter 223j is “150,000” (S4107: Yes), the value of the variable time counter 223j is set to “0” (S4109), and the process of S4105 is performed. Move to processing.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state is defined as "150 seconds" regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1. As shown, the upper limit of the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is "150,000" corresponding to "150 seconds", but the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of FIG. If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be selected from (variation time), the upper limit value of the variation time counter 223j can be reset based on the content of the variation pattern to be executed (variation time that is set). It may be configured to determine whether or not the value of the variable time counter 223j being updated has reached the set upper limit value.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 84. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp controller 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

If all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address designated by the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program, so that the NOR ROM operates at high speed. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S5001), and various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed so that the display control device 114 can be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S5001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S5001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided as in the conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S5101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S5102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5102, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S5102, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S5103). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S5104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 71) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) (S5105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and this boot process is completed.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S5001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

In the boot process shown in FIG. 72, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5101 is not limited to this, but the boot program for executing the boot processing to be processed subsequent to the processing of S5102. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S 5101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233 a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233 a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S5101. Alternatively, the processing of S5103 to S5105 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S5102.

As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S5103 to S5105 without performing the processes of S5101 and S5102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 71. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S5002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set in each flag. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S5003). The transfer instruction includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The head address of the power-on main image area 235a is included, and the image controller 237 follows the transfer instruction so that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S5003, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S5004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S5004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S5005). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 82A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S6502 in FIG. 82A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that period, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73(b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown) that are the power-on images are simply drawn. Command determination processing (see S5308 in FIG. 73(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S5309 in FIG. 73(b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to stand by until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped.

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency can be prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In the display controller 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while the display device 81 is displaying, there is a ball (start prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and the main controller 110 issues a voice lamp control to start the variation effect. When it is through the device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period to perform a simple variation effect. be able to. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, and therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S5005, the interrupt permission is set (S5006), and thereafter, the main processing executes the infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S5006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73A is a flow chart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S5201), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 36) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal which is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 73(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S5301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on, that is, If it is off (S5301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S5302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S5303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S5302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed and the display demo command and When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 or the voice lamp controller 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78.

In the display setting process (S5303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S5302) or the like. Specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81.

After the display setting process is executed, next, a task process is executed (S5304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S5303) or the simple display setting process (S5309). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S5305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously operated. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview production or the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S5306). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites that form one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S5304), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305). The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S5307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. Examples of the counter updated by the process of S5307 include a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, out-of-front/rear reach, non-out-of-reach reach, complete disconnection). , The opportunity type) and the stop type counter corresponding to the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S5301: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S5308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S5309) is executed, and the S5304 step is executed. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78, details of the above-described command determination processing (S5302) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 74, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S5401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S5401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S5303) that the new command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S5402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S5403).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S5404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S5404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S5405), the process returns to S5401.

Details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S5405) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 75(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, the effect state stored in the effect state storage area 233k is read (S5501). Then, of the variation display data tables corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, the variation display data table corresponding to the effect state read by the processing of S5501 is determined, and the determined variation display data table is set. It is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5502).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main control device 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two fluctuation pattern commands for display are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command judgment processing is performed. When executing, it is not possible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is erroneously displayed. It may also be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S5501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variation display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the main control unit 110 has instructed the time-varying change effect, as will be described later, after the change effect according to the display data table buffer 233d ends, the main control unit 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device 81 in the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the design.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S5502 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5503). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the process of S5502 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S5504). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S5503, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5502, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5505), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S5506). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5507), the fluctuation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S5506 is updated, while the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5502 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S5503. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in step 233f, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S5505 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the display pattern command processing according to the present embodiment, the display content (effect content) of the third symbol display device 81 is based on the display variation pattern command output (received) from the voice lamp control device 113. ), the display contents (display mode of each symbol, display mode of the number of holdings of each symbol) corresponding to the output (received) display effect state command from the voice lamp control device 113 are determined. I am configuring. Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 22, it is possible to execute the display suitable for each effect state. Further, since the display control device 114 discriminates the display effect state command and the display variation pattern command and executes the processing for determining the display content, the voice lamp control device 113 corresponds to each effect state. It is not necessary to set the display variation pattern command, and the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern command process, the display content corresponding to the effect state is determined, and the determined display content is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but other than that. As a configuration, based on the display variation pattern command, the above-described display processing is executed for the display contents corresponding to all the effect states, of which only the display content corresponding to the currently set effect state is the player. It may be configured so that it can be visually displayed. Specifically, a display image layer is provided corresponding to each effect state, and a process of transmitting an image layer other than the image layer corresponding to the set effect state is executed, or the effect state is set. The layer corresponding to is placed on the foreground. As a result, even if the effect state is changed while the display based on the variation pattern command is being executed and the display content is changed, it is possible to immediately respond. In addition, an area (for example, the second display area Dn) in which the common display content is always displayed regardless of the effect state that is set is displayed on another layer and the display effect state command is referred to. Alternatively, the display content may be determined only by the variation pattern command.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 74. In the processing of S5404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S5404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S5406), If there is a display variation type command (S5406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S5407), and the process returns to S5401.

Details of the stop type command processing (S5407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside reach, complete disconnection, chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. Is determined (S5601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S5602).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. Is set (S5603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is described. In the above-described task process (S5304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S5603, and the identified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before the drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the normal ROM video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of a change at a time of several seconds or more, so that no two or more display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S5601, in case of determining that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S5602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" will be displayed, and the player will be confused that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set, and in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the stop of complete disengagement on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 74. In the processing of S5406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S5406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S5408), and If there is an image change command (S5408: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S5409), and the process returns to S5401.

Here, the details of the back image change command process (S5409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S6503) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S5701). .. Then, among the back surface image discrimination flags provided for each back surface image type (back surface A to C), the back surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and other back surface images The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S5702), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S5701 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S5702. .. If the specified back image type is the back image B or the back image C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to these back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the rear surface image determination flag set in S5702 indicates that The type of the back image to be displayed at the time point is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type storing the image data corresponding to the range of the back image (resident Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than 2 back image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5702, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. It is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 74. In the process of S5408, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S5408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S5410), and the error command is detected. If (S5410: Yes), the error command process is executed (S5411), and the process returns to S5401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S5411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S5801). Then, of the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S5802), and the error command The process ends and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S5801, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S5802, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S5802 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 74. In the process of S5410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S5410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display effect state command among the unprocessed commands (S5412), and the display effect is displayed. If there is a state command (S5412: Yes), the effect state information based on the received command is stored in the effect state storage area 233k (S5413), and the process returns to S5401.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 74. In the process of S5412, if it is determined that there is no display effect state command (S5412: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hit related command (S5440). When it is determined in the process of S5440 that there is a hit related command (S5440: Yes), the hit related command process is executed (S5441), and the process returns to S5401. On the other hand, in the process of S5440, when it is determined that there is no hit related command (S5440: No), the other command process is executed (S5414), and the process returns to S5401.

In the processing of S5401, which is executed again after the processing of each command, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes). ), and the processes of S5402 to S5413 and S5419 are executed again. Then, the processes of S5401 to S5413 and S5419 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in S5401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, The command determination process ends.

Note that the simple command determination process (S5308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image (not shown), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type commands are extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 75(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 75(b)) that are processes corresponding to the respective commands are executed, and The command is deleted without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 75(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on becomes the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S5501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S5502, processing for writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the content thereof is performed.

Details of the hit related command process (S5441) will be described below with reference to FIG. 77. The hit related command process (S5441) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 146) that there is a hit related command.

In the hit related command processing (S5441), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S5901). When it is determined that there is a display hitting start command in the processing of S5901 (S5901: Yes), the jackpot start command processing is executed (S5902), and the process proceeds to S5903.

Details of the jackpot start command process (S5902) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78(a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command process (S5902). This big hit start command process (S5902) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit related command process (FIG. 77) that there is a big hit start command for display, and a third effect that suggests the start of the big hit. This is processing for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot start command process (S5902), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6002). After that, the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the jackpot start display data table (S6003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S6004), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6005), This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the process of S5901, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command (S5901: No), the process proceeds to S5903. When the processing of S5901 or S5902 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S5903). If it is determined in the processing of S5903 that there is a display round number command, the round number command processing is executed (S5904), and the process proceeds to S5905.

Details of the round number command processing (S5904) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). FIG. 78(b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S5904). This round number command process (S5904) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit related command process (FIG. 77) that the display round number command is received, and the number of rounds during the jackpot game is updated. It is a process for displaying the effect at the time of the third symbol display device 81.

In the round number command processing (S5904), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6102), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S6103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6104), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6105), and this processing is ended.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the process of S5903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S5903: No), the process proceeds to S5905. When the processing of S5903 or S5904 is completed, it is determined whether or not the display jackpot end command has been received (S5905).

In the process of S5905, when it is determined that there is a display jackpot end command (S5905: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S5906), and the process proceeds to S5907.

Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing will be described. This jackpot end command process (S5906) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit related command determination process (FIG. 77) that the jackpot end command has been received, and a third effect that suggests the end of the jackpot game. This is processing for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot end command processing (S5906), first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table. After that, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off, and this processing is ended.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the processing of S5905, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command, the processing of S5906 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S5907.

When the processing of S5905 or S5906 is finished, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit start command (S5907). When it is determined in the process of S5907 that there is a small hit start command for display (S5907: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S5908), and the process proceeds to S5909.

Here, the details of the small hit start command process (S5908) will be described. This small hitting start command process (S5908) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hitting start command is received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 77), and suggests the start of a small hitting game. It is a process for displaying the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit start command processing (S5908), first, a small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. After that, the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small hit start display data table, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demo display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF, and this processing is ended.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the process of S5907, when it is determined that there is no display small hitting start command (S5907: No), the process of S5908 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5909.

When the processing of S5907 or S5908 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a small hitting end command for display (S5909). In the process of S5909, when it is determined that there is a small hit end command (S5909: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S5910), and this process ends.

Here, the details of the small hit end command processing (S5210) will be described. This small hitting end command processing (S5210) is processing executed when it is determined that the small hitting end command is received in the hit related command determination processing (see FIG. 77), and suggests the end of the small hitting game. Is a process for displaying the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit end command processing (S5210), first, a small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared, and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table. After that, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, details of the above-described display setting process (S5303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 79, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S6201: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command is not processed, the processes of S6202 to S6204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S6205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S6202), and then S6203 to S6204. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process of.

In the process of S6203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S6203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S6203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S6204).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S6301).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary for each sprite to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Various parameters.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S6301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S6302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 79. After the warning image setting process (S6204) or in the process of S6203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6203: No), the process proceeds to S6205.

In S6205, pointer update processing is executed (S6205). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. In this pointer updating process, the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that the pointer 233f is incremented by one each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S6401, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Is determined (S6402). As a result, if it is End information (S6402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S6403), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S6403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S6404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6405), and this processing ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S6403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S6406), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S6402: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 79, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S6206 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S6207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6208). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S6208: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S6208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the final display flag is on. (S6209).

As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S6209: Yes), the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d because the finalized display effect has not yet been produced and the finalized display effect is to be produced. The contents are set (S6210), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6212), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S6213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S6214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the last stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S5304), until the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S6215, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S6209, if the confirmed display flag is OFF instead of ON (S6209: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag is ON (S6216). If the demo display flag is off (S6216: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the fixed display effect. Therefore, the demo display data table is changed to the display data table. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S6217) and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6220), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S6221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set in the.

In the process of S6216, if the demo display flag is on (S6216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is ended as it is. Then, the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 73(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image is finished, the power-on fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. A process of setting a display data table that defines the stop display of (not shown) in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S5305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 82A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501: YES), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S6502), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for causing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S6501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S6501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6502) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S6601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S6601: Yes). ) Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S6602). In the process of S6602, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S6602 that the transfer processing is not completed (S6602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6602: Yes), the process proceeds to S6603. Further, as a result of the processing of S6601, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6601: No), the processing proceeds to S6603.

In the processing of S6603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S6603). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S6603: No), the A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6604), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

As a result of the processing in S6603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S6603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6605), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 73B) and the simple display setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 73B). Since the determination processing (see FIGS. 74 to 78) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 79 to 81) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) (see S6501: No in FIG. 82A).

By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be immediately drawn, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. It is possible to maintain high responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S6503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S6503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer updating process (S6205) of the display setting process (S5303) previously executed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S6701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S6702), and if it is transfer data information (S6702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S6703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S6704), and the process proceeds to step S6705.

In the processing of S6702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S6702: No), the processing of S6703 and S6704 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S6705. In the processing of S6705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S6705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6706).

In the process of S6706, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, and when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the process of S6706 that the transfer process is not completed (S6706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6706: Yes), the process proceeds to S6707. Further, as a result of the processing in S6705, even if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S6705: No), the process proceeds to S6707.

In the process of S6707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6707). If the transfer start flag is on (S6707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, and therefore the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S6708), the sprite image data indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S6703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S6717. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S6707: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S6713). If the back image change flag is not on but on (S6713: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S6713: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set off (S6714), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6715). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal The leading address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S6716), and the process proceeds to S6717.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back image A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S6715, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing is directly terminated.

In the process of S6717, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6717). The determination in the process of S6717 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S6717 (S6717: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S6717, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6717: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S6718). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is stored. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S6718, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S6719), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal-use image transfer process, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image is changed. The image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, out of the image data used in step S1, can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, details of the above-described drawing process (S5306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

In the drawing process, types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S5304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated (S6801). That is, in the processing of S6801, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task processing (S5304). A parameter required for the sprite determined in the task processing is associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the rearranged sprites are sorted in the detailed order for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and those information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S6802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process of S6802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S6803). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 73B) is executed, the drawing process is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed for every 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Whether to change the state of the starting opening provided on the game board, such as a pachinko machine, from the first state where the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state where the game ball is easy to enter, There are those that execute the first lottery. In such a conventional game machine, a lottery is executed a predetermined number of times by entering a game ball into the starting opening in a state that is easily changed to the second state, and until the result of the predetermined number of times is displayed. In the gaming machine that is set continuously, the probability that the determination that the lottery will be advantageous to the player is executed in the state where the lottery is executed a predetermined number of times is constant, the game becomes monotonous and the player gets tired early. There was a problem that it ended up.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, during the time period during which the fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 is being executed, the player is allowed to obtain the reserved memory of Toku-zu 2 that is advantageous. Since it is possible to make the period possible, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In a gaming machine in which a lottery of a plurality of symbols is executed, there is one that informs the player by displaying a symbol display for showing the lottery result on the display means (third symbol display device 81). There is a problem that a plurality of symbols are variably displayed at different timings and it is difficult for the player to understand the game content.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, among the third symbols corresponding to the plurality of symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the symbol that the player is most interested in in the current game state, that is, Since the symbols that can most affect the game result are displayed in a more emphasized manner than the other symbols, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, depending on various game states that are set (normal state, time saving state, jackpot state, etc.), a game that is advantageous to the player (left-handed game or right-handed game) is available. It is configured differently. As a result, the contents of the game can be changed while the player is aware of the current game state, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming more monotonous.

In the first embodiment, different playability can be provided according to the type of special symbol variation executed when the game shifts to the time saving state, so that the player is prevented from getting tired of the game early. You can

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, when the special symbol changes once during the time saving state, the time saving state is configured to end, and in the time saving state where the first special symbol changes, the second special symbol. It was configured to get the reserved memory of.

Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time saving state ends, if the reserved storage of the second special symbol is acquired, then the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol is executed, and the fluctuation The jackpot game is executed based on (lottery), and after the jackpot game is finished, the game is shifted to the time saving state again, while the variation of the first special symbol during the time saving state is finished, and the second special symbol If the reserved storage cannot be obtained, the normal state is directly entered.

In the first embodiment configured in this way, the end timing of the time saving state becomes the end timing of one fluctuation of the first special symbol, so the player can easily predict the timing when the time saving state ends. There is a problem. Also, in order to make it difficult for the player to predict, it is necessary to be able to set a plurality of different fluctuation times for the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the storage capacity of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is increased. There was the problem of letting it go.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, if the pending storage of the second special symbol can be acquired at the end of the fluctuation of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state, the state advantageous to the player continues and can be acquired. If it is not, the game is easy for the player to understand that the advantageous state for the player will end, but on the other hand, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player gets tired early.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a plurality of conditions for ending the time saving state are provided to make it difficult for the player to recognize the ending timing of the time saving state. Specifically, the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) is set twice, or the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) is set once, which is set as the end condition of the time saving state. ..

By configuring in this way, when the first special symbol of the first rotation during the time saving state (first time reduction of the first reduction) has finished changing, if the reserved storage of the second special symbol is not secured, The variation (lottery) of the first special symbol of the second rotation in the state is executed. On the other hand, when the variation of the first special symbol of the first rotation during the time saving state (first time reduction of the time reduction) is completed, if the reserved storage of the second special symbol is secured, the second special that is reserved and stored. The variation of the symbol (lottery) is executed.

Therefore, in the time saving state, when the variation of the first special symbol of the time saving first rotation is finished, the game property of acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol is continued, and the reserved memory of the second special symbol is stored. It is possible to provide a case where the used variation (lottery) is executed according to the pending storage status of the second special symbol.

Further, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state can be selected from a plurality (two). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the time-saving state period (the variation period of the first special symbol executed during the time-saving state) by combining a plurality of variation patterns, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Since a time saving state period is set by a combination of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, when a plurality of fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol are prepared in the gaming machine with one time saving as in the first embodiment described above. In comparison, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the time saving state is configured to end when the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol is executed once. As a result, for example, when the second special symbol is changed in the 1st reduction of the working hours, the small hit that is won is not the most advantageous to the player (this is executed when the ball is passed through the specific area). If the number of rounds of the big hit game is smaller than other small hits), dare to play the game so as not to let the ball pass in a specific area, and the second special symbol of the second time saving rotation to be executed next It is possible to prevent the execution of a special game such as executing a game aiming at fluctuation of

In addition, if the result of fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol of the first time reduction of the time reduction is small win, the small hit game is executed after the end of the variation of the first special symbol of the first time reduction of the time reduction. Because the time saving state is maintained during this small hit game (because the time saving end condition is not met), during the small hit game period, the game characteristic that the reserved memory of the second special symbol is acquired, and the second variable winning device. It is possible to set a plurality of game properties such as a game property in which a ball is entered in 650 and the ball is passed through a specific area (V winning switch 630) at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game property, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing at an early stage.

In addition, as shown in the above-described first embodiment, when the special symbol fluctuation that started fluctuation during the time saving state is ended as the ending condition of the time saving state, the special symbol fluctuation of the first time saving rotation is Since the small hit game executed after the end is lost in a time saving state, it is not possible to provide a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol during the small hit game.

Further, in the second embodiment, as the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol during the time saving state, the first variation pattern (time saving state) in which the player can execute the game to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol Medium fluctuation pattern longer than the fluctuation time) and the second fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern shorter than the normal fluctuation time during the time saving state) in which it is difficult to execute the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol. It is configured to be selectable. With such a configuration, for example, when the second variation pattern is selected twice in succession, the time saving state is not substantially given (the game in which the reserved memory of the second special symbol is acquired during the time saving state). When the first variation pattern is selected twice in a row, it is possible to obtain the reserved memory of the second special symbol during the time saving state with a high probability, which is an advantageous advantageous time saving. State is given. In addition, when the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern are respectively selected, a time saving state in which the reserved storage of the second special symbol can be acquired is given.

That is, based on the variation pattern of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state, the expectation of the second special symbol during the time saving state can be made different, which provides the player with a surprising game. can do. In addition, even if it is configured such that the short-time state is given after all the big-hit games are finished without preparing the big-hit type that shifts to the short-time state after the big-hit game and the big-hit type that does not shift to the short-time game, Since the substantial time saving state rush ratio can be set based on the selection result of the variation pattern of the special symbol, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity due to the provision of a plurality of jackpot types.

In addition, by preparing a plurality of variation pattern selection tables for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the time saving state, and by arranging to refer to different variation pattern selection tables based on the game state or the game situation, It is possible to make the substantial time saving state rush rate more diverse.

The configuration used in the second embodiment (a configuration using a plurality of time saving end conditions) may be used in a gaming machine having a gaming property other than the second embodiment, for example, a small hit prize of the second special symbol. When some of the small hit types are set, the small hit type in which the ball cannot pass (difficult) in the specific area (V winning switch 630e3) is executed. It may be used for such a gaming machine.

Further, in the second embodiment, the number of times of fluctuation (lottery) is set as 2 as the ending condition of the time saving state based on the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol, but the number of times more than that may be set. .. Furthermore, the number of times the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol and the number of variations (lottery) of the second special symbol may be set as the end condition of the time saving state, or other than the number of variations of the special symbol. , The number of fluctuations of the normal symbol, the variation (lottery) result of the special symbol, and various types of accessories (electrical accessory 640a, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10. The end condition of the time saving state may be set based on the operation status (whether or not there is an operation, the number of operations).

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that a part of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, a part of the RAM 203, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Processing performed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, a display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. 85(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen during the time saving state. Here, with respect to the display screen shown in FIG. 85(a), points different from the above-described first embodiment (points different from the display content of FIG. 15(a)) will be described. The same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 85(a) is an example of a display screen in a state in which the reserved memory of the second special symbol is not acquired at the time when the first time saving rotation is completed. As shown in FIG. 85(a), at the time when the first time saving rotation is completed, the reserved storage of the second special symbol is not acquired (the special symbol 2 main reserved symbol display area Dm5 is displayed to indicate the number of reserved symbols). If not), then, as a variation of the second speed reduction, variation of the first special symbol (lottery) is started. Here, a fluctuation pattern of 150 seconds is set as the fluctuation pattern of the second speed reduction, and for the display of "remaining time 0 seconds" displayed in the first sub display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, “+150 seconds” is displayed as a display mode for adding the remaining time. The display of "150 seconds" is a display for indicating the variation time of the second speed reduction.

Then, in the first main display area Dm, the character "yet yet" is displayed as a continuation notification display mode indicating that the game for obtaining the reserved memory of special figure 2 continues. By displaying such a display screen, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state (the gaming state in which the game for obtaining the reserved memory of special figure 2 is executed) continues. You can do it, and you can play games with expectations until the end.

In addition, the "remaining time" displayed in the sub display area Ds1 is set as the time saving before the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation of the first speed-reducing first rotation becomes "0", that is, during the change of special figure 1 of the first time-saving shortening. A value indicating a part or all of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 which can be the second rotation may be added and displayed. In this case, if the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation of the first speed reduction is the predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the addition display is executed only when the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is not acquired. Good. As a result, even if the remaining time becomes short, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

On the other hand, at the time when the 1st speed saving rotation ends, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is not acquired, and the game of acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed as the special figure 1 variation of the 2nd speed saving time. When the difficult second variation pattern (variation pattern shorter than the universal figure variation time in the time saving state) is selected, the display in which the remaining time is added as shown in FIG. The display screen (time saving state end display) shown in FIG. 20B of the first embodiment is displayed. In this case, during the period in which the time saving state end display is being executed, the special figure 1 fluctuation of the second time saving rotation is executed.

In other words, when the above-described second variation pattern is set, the time saving state is substantially completed, and therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, despite the time saving state, the time saving 2 When the special figure 1 change of the rotation is executed, a time saving state end display is displayed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the end timing not to the end timing of the internal game state (time saving state) but to the game state in which the reserved memory of special figure 2 can be acquired, and the player can be notified. An easy-to-understand game can be provided.

In addition, the special figure 1 fluctuation of the time saving second rotation executed during the period in which the time saving state end display is displayed, and the number of reserved symbols of the special drawing 1 that decreases when the second time saving second rotation is executed (holding Regarding the number of memories), since it is displayed in the second display area Dn of the third symbol display device 81, it can be made difficult for the player to notice.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the display timing indicating the end of the time saving state is changed based on the change pattern (change time) of the first special symbol selected during the time saving state. Even if it is in the time saving state internally, if the advantageous game state cannot be given to the player, the display indicating the end of the time saving state is executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. In the second embodiment, the case where the second variation pattern (variation pattern shorter than the universal figure variation time in the time saving state) in which the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is difficult to execute is set internally. Even if it is in a time saving state, it is assumed that the player cannot give a favorable game state, but in addition to that, if the general figure fluctuation time is longer than the remaining period of the short time state (at the end of general figure fluctuation Even when the time saving state ends, it is determined that the advantageous game state cannot be given to the player even if the time saving state is internally set, and the display indicating the end of the time saving state is executed. Good.

Next, the display screen in the case where the special figure 1 fluctuation of the first reduction in working hour and short rotation wins the small hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 85(b) to 86(b). FIG. 85(b) is an example of a display screen in a state where the special figure 1 is won as a small hit and the special figure 2 has one reserved memory at the time when the first time saving rotation is completed. As shown in FIG. 85(b), in the first display area Dm, the special symbol 1 main symbol Dma is stopped and displayed in "341" which is a stop display mode indicating that the small hit is won, and the main hold symbol is displayed. In the area Dm5, a display mode indicating that there is one reserved memory of special figure 2 is displayed.

Then, in the first sub-display area Ds1, "remaining time 0 seconds" indicating that the special figure 1 variation of the first time reduction rotation has ended is displayed, and further displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In contrast to the displayed "remaining time 0 seconds", "+60 seconds" is displayed as a display mode for adding the remaining time. The display of "60 seconds" is a display for showing the game time of the small hit game executed based on the small hit winning of special figure 1.

That is, although the details will be described later, in the second embodiment, when the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 1 is executed twice or the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed once, the time saving is performed. The state is set to end, and the ending condition of the time saving state is not satisfied at the time when the variation (lottery) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 85(b) is executed once. Therefore, during the small hitting game which is executed by the small hitting prize of special figure 1, the time saving state is continued. As a result, even when the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 can be further acquired during the period when the small hit game is executed.

In this way, the player can enter the game period in which the small hitting game can simultaneously execute the game in which the ball is inserted into the second variable winning device 650 that is opened and the game for obtaining the reserved memory of the special figure 2. In the first display area Dm, "charge combo activation" is displayed as a special game period notification mode for informing.

Then, when the small hit game is executed, as shown in FIG. 86(a), the main figure main symbol Dmc is variably displayed in the first display area Dm, and the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed. To be executed. Further, if the small hit game executed in the small hit prize of special figure 1 is a small hit that allows the ball to pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3), the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game. Then, as shown in FIG. 86(b), "V" is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the jackpot game is started.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 87(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202d4 for special figure 1 defined in the fluctuation pattern table 202d are partially changed. However, other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. Although the details will be described later, the termination conditions for the time saving state are also different.

The special pattern 1 time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d4a (see FIG. 88) of the second embodiment is the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 with respect to the special figure 1 time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d4 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that different variation patterns (variation times) are set based on

Specifically, if the lottery result of Toku-zu 1 is “out”, “small hit”, or “big hit”, if the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 99”, , A fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 120 seconds is set, and in the case of "100 to 198", a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set. With such a configuration, the game content during the time saving state can be greatly varied depending on the selected variation pattern.

FIG. 87(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment has a special second variation flag 203r added to the RAM in the first embodiment. The other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special 2 variation flag 203r is a flag for indicating that the special figure 2 variation is executed during the time saving state, and if set to ON, the special figure 2 variation is executed during the time saving. It is shown. This special 2 fluctuation flag 203r, in the time saving fluctuation start processing 2 (S303 in FIG. 91) executed in the special symbol fluctuation start processing (see S213 in FIG. 39), it is determined that the fluctuation this time is special FIG. In this case (S551 of FIG. 91: Yes), it is set to ON (see S522 of FIG. 91), referred to in the time saving end determination processing (see S251 of FIG. 90) (see S2301 of FIG. 90), and the hour saving medium counter 203g is displayed. After setting the value to "0", it is set to off (see S2303 in FIG. 90).

In this way, at the start of the special figure change, the result of determining which change of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is executed is stored (the corresponding flag is set to ON), and the time saving is performed. By determining whether or not to end the time saving state (whether or not the time saving state end condition is satisfied) based on the stored determination result at the timing when it is determined whether or not to end the state, It is possible to appropriately manage the current game state and the type of special figure fluctuation executed during the time saving state.

In the second embodiment, the type of the special symbol (special symbol) determined at the timing when the variation (lottery) of the special symbol is started is determined and the determination result is stored, Although it is configured to be able to determine whether or not to end the time saving state at the fluctuation end timing, other configurations may be used, for example, when the fluctuation (lottery) of the special map is started, By determining whether or not the time saving state ends at the timing when the fluctuation ends, and storing the determination result, even if the control for ending the time saving state is performed based on the determination result at the special figure fluctuation ending timing. It is okay to determine the type of special map change (type of special map change used for the change) executed this time at the change end timing of the special map, and perform control to end the time saving state based on the result of the determination. It may be executed.

<Regarding control processing in the second embodiment>
Regarding the control processing in the second embodiment, the content of the control processing in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from that in the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. In the second embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the special symbol variation process is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 89), and the time saving executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 89). A point that the end determination process (see FIG. 90) is added, the time saving variation start process is changed to the time saving variation start process 2 (see FIG. 91), and the jackpot control process is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 92). Are different.

First, the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) will be described with reference to FIG. 89. This special symbol variation process 2 (S104 of FIG. 89) is a lottery result of the special symbol variation with respect to the special symbol variation process of the above-described first embodiment, and the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is 1 or more. In this case (S224: Yes), the difference is that the time saving end determination process (see S251 in FIG. 89) is executed, and the other configurations are the same, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

Next, the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 of FIG. 89) described with reference to FIG. 90 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving end determination processing (see S251) in the second embodiment. This time saving end determination processing (see S251) executes control for determining the end state of the time saving state in the second embodiment having a plurality of end conditions of the time saving state.

When the execution of the time saving end determination process (S251 in FIG. 90) is started, first, it is determined whether the special 2 variation flag 203r is set to ON (S2301 in FIG. 90). In S2301, if the special 2 variation flag 203r is set to ON, that is, if the variation of special figure 2 is being executed (S2301: Yes), at that time, the special symbol time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, next, the counter value of the time saving medium counter 203g is set to "0" (S2303), the special 2 variation flag 203r is set to off (S2302), and the special 2 variation flag 203r is set to off. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if the special 2 variation flag 203r is not set to ON (S2301: No), then the hour/medium counter 203g is decremented by 1 (see S2304), and this process is ended.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving variation start processing 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91) used in the second embodiment. In this time saving variation start processing 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91), whether the type of special figure variation executed this time is special chart 1 or special chart 2 with respect to the time saving variation start processing of the first embodiment described above. A process for discriminating is added, and the other contents are the same. Description of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the time saving fluctuation start processing 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91) is executed, the same processing of S501 and S502 as the time saving fluctuation start processing is executed. When the process of S502 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the current variation is the special figure 2 (S551). When it is determined that the variation this time is the special figure 2 (S551: Yes), the special 2 variation flag 203r is set to ON (S552), and the process proceeds to S503. On the other hand, in the process of S551, when it is determined that the current variation is not the special map 2 (the special map 1) (S551: No), the process of S552 is skipped and the process proceeds to S503. Then, the same processing of S503 to S512 as the time saving variation start processing is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variation of the special figure other than the special figure 2 (that is, the variation of the special figure 1) is executed. When the time saving state is ended when the value of the middle counter 203g becomes 0, and when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is forcibly set to 0, and the time saving state is changed. There are two types of time saving state end conditions for ending.

As a result, it is possible to execute the variation (lottery) of the special figure 1 multiple times during the time saving state, and the number of times the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed during the time saving state is one (1 time). Can be

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the jackpot control process 2 (S1704 in FIG. 92) in the second embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 2 (S1704 in FIG. 92) is different from the above jackpot control process only in that the number of shortening times given to some jackpots after the jackpot is changed from once to twice. However, the other contents are the same.

The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big hit control process 2 (S704 in FIG. 92). As shown in FIG. 92, when this process is executed, the same processes of S1801 to S1814 as the above-mentioned big hit control start process are executed. When it is determined that the jackpot type is not “B or D” in the process of S1814 (S1814: No), the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is set to “2”, and the present process is ended.

As described above, in the second embodiment, a plurality of time saving state end conditions for ending the time saving state are prepared, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation during the time saving state is changed to a plurality of variation patterns (variation). It is configured to select from (time). This makes it possible to more diversify the game during the time saving state and prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. Specifically, when the percentage of selecting the jackpot type that gives a short-time state after the jackpot is fixed, short variation patterns are continuously selected as the variation pattern (variation time) selected during the short-time state. In this case, it is difficult to obtain the reserved memory of the special figure 2 despite the addition of the time saving state. In this way, it is possible to change the substantial time saving state rush rate according to the selection result of the selected variation pattern (variation time) of the variation of Toku-zu 1.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as the time saving state, the number of time saving is set to 2 times, and the variation of the special figure 1 is executed twice, or the variation of the special figure 2 is executed once. However, the number of time saving times and the time saving state end condition to be set may be set as long as they can execute the same technical idea regardless of the configuration of the second embodiment described above. The number of shortening times may be set to 3 times or more.

Further, as the time saving end condition, even if the number of fluctuations in special figure 1 (for example, 5 times) that is greater than the number of reserved storages (upper limit of 4) in special figure 1 or one fluctuation number in special figure 2 is set. Good. As a result, even if the reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired during the change of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 can be surely changed during the time saving state. Therefore, when the player enters the time saving state, it is a big hit to the player. A game can be provided.

Further, as the time saving end condition, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 is set to 2 or the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 is set to 4 (or the total number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is set to 4), In addition, in the small hit type of special figure 2, as a big hit type executed when passing a specific area (V winning switch 650e3), it is possible to set a big hit type with a time reduction and a big hit type with no time reduction. Alternatively, another example may be used. With this configuration, when one reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired during the change in special figure 1 executed in the first time-saving rotation, the execution is performed based on the change in special figure 2 in the second time-saving reduction. Pass the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hitting game to execute the big hitting game, or the specific area (V during the small hitting game executed based on the special figure 2 fluctuation of the second speed reduction). It is possible to let the player select whether to execute the third time saving rotation (the second rotation of Toku-zu 1) without passing through the winning switch 650e3).

That is, in the special figure 1 variation (first preparation period) executed in the first time reduction, the game for obtaining the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed, and when one reserved memory of the special figure 2 is obtained, The change in Toku-zu 2 which is a priority change is started at the second speed reduction. When the small hit is won by the change of the special figure 2, the small hit game is executed after the end of the change of the second time saving rotation. By passing the game ball through the specific area during the small hit game, a big hit game (V winning big hit) based on the small hit game is started. In this another example, as the type of the V winning jackpot of the special figure 2, since the type in which the time saving state is given after the jackpot game and the type in which the time saving state is not given can be set, it is possible to set the feature of the second time saving rotation FIG. 2 If the big hit based on the fluctuation is a big hit that does not give a time saving state, the extended game mode ends with this big hit game. Here, the player executes the big hit game at the second time saving speed or the big hit game at the second time saving speed (small hit in a state where only one reserved memory of the special map 2 is acquired). During the winning game (without passing the game ball in the specific area (V winning switch 650e3)), the special figure 1 change (second preparation period) executed for the third time saving is executed, and the new special figure 2 It is possible to select whether or not to execute the game for acquiring the reserved memory.

As a result, based on the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 acquired during the first preparation period, one reserved memory of special figure 2 is discarded to obtain more reserved memories of special figure 2 or it is acquired. Since it is possible to select whether to surely execute the jackpot game based on the reserved storage of the special figure 2, the player can arbitrarily select the game content suitable for the player.

Furthermore, in this another example, as the types of jackpots executed based on the pending storage of the special figure 2, there are a type that gives a time saving state after the end of the big hit game and a type that does not give a big hit. When the big hit game (V prize big hit) based on the small hit game is executed in the state where the pending storage of is one, the time saving state may end after the big hit game ends. Therefore, depending on which of the above-mentioned game contents is selected by the player, the subsequent game result can be greatly different, and the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased.

In addition, you may make it perform the notification which shows the classification of the big hit game based on the small hit game performed in the above-mentioned 2nd speed reduction rotation by the notification means (for example, effect display by the 3rd symbol display device 81). As a result, the player can select the game content with reference to the content notified by the notification means. In this case, as the notification content by the notification means, the game content that is advantageous to the player may be notified in a notification mode in which the player can understand. For example, when the big hit executed based on the small hit game executed in the second time saving rotation is a big hit to which the time saving state is given after the end of the big hit game, it is preferable to set a notification mode to indicate that. .. As a result, the player can safely pass the ball through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) in the small hitting game of the second time saving reduction.

In addition, in this another example, the time saving end condition is that the number of fluctuations in special figure 1 is 2 or the number of fluctuations in special figure 2 is 4 (or the total number of fluctuations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 4). Therefore, it is possible to execute the above-mentioned game for selecting the game contents only when the suspension of special map 2 is acquired during the change of special map 1 executed in the first rotation of the time-saving number. After the state is given, the player can eagerly play the game so as to quickly obtain the reserved memory of special figure 2.

In addition, since the time saving end condition is set so that the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 is smaller than the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2, for example, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 executed during the time saving state is changed. Thus, the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 1 can be reduced. As a result, even if a plurality of (for example, two) reserved storages of special figure 2 are stored during one change of special figure 1, the second change of special figure 1 is executed during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of selecting the game contents described above. In this another example, as the time saving end condition, the number of changes in Toku-zu 1 is 2 or the number of changes in Toku-zu 2 is 4 (or the number of total changes in Toku-zu 1 and 4 is 4). However, the number of fluctuations may be set to be larger in the time saving end condition based on the number of fluctuations of special figure 2 than in the time saving end condition based on the number of fluctuations of special figure 1.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 100. In the above-described first embodiment, it is configured such that 3 seconds is set as the variation time of the normal symbol variation (general symbol variation) executed during the time saving state, and the number of times the symbol is drawn normally during the time saving state Was configured to stabilize. Further, in the second embodiment described above, a plurality of conditions for ending the time saving state are provided in order to change the period in the time saving state in addition to the first embodiment described above, and further executed during the time saving state. It is configured such that a plurality of fluctuation times of Toku-zu 1 can be set.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the variable time of the normal symbol executed during the time saving state can be set from a plurality of times, and it can be executed during the time saving state according to the content of the game. It was configured so that the number of times the symbols were drawn was varied.

As a result, the player can be motivated to play a lot of lots of ordinary symbols during the time saving state to obtain the special figure 2 hold. Further, since the number of times of drawing lots of ordinary symbols executed during the time saving state can be changed, it is possible to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantage time saving state, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. it can.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in terms of configuration, that is, a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, a partial configuration of the RAM 203, and the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. Processing performed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the game in the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is configured so that the time saving state given based on the lottery of Toku-zu 1 and the time saving state given based on the lottery of Toku-zu 2 are made different. Further, it is configured such that different time saving states are given based on the game state when the time saving states are given. By imparting different time saving states in this way, it is possible to prepare a plurality of game features in the time saving state, and it is possible for the player to execute a variety of games.

Specifically, by setting different time saving states, by changing the variation time of the normal symbol executed during the time saving state, the game characteristics during the time saving state are made different. That is, as described in the first embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 10 hits the normal symbol during the fluctuation of the special map 1 in the time saving state, wins the electric symbol 640a, and releases the second ball. Since the game to obtain the special figure 2 hold by entering the ball into the mouth 640 is executed, by changing the variation time of the normal symbol, the number of times the regular symbol is drawn during the time saving ( The number of fluctuations) can be different.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is configured to be different based on the lottery number (variation number) of the ordinary symbol executed during the time saving state. Specifically, when the lottery number (variation number) of ordinary symbols executed during the time saving state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 40 times), a variation pattern with a short variation time is set. ing. By configuring in this way, by executing many ordinary symbol fluctuations during the time saving state, it is possible to further increase the number of times the regular symbols are drawn (the number of fluctuations), and the player is eager to save time. A middle game can be executed. In addition, by shifting to a state in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is set, as a result, the number of balls entered into the second entrance 640 per unit time can be increased, so that the player It is possible to provide an advantageous game.

In this way, by providing a plurality of time saving states in which the variation time of the normal symbol is different, it is possible to set the advantageous time saving state and the disadvantageous time saving state for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

First, with reference to FIG. 93, a display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 93A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen during the time saving state. Here, with respect to the display screen shown in FIG. 93A, differences from the above-described first embodiment (differences from the display content in FIG. 15A) will be described. The same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 93A, "39/40" is displayed at the lower right of the first display area Dm. This is a display mode described in the general figure fluctuation display area for displaying the number of times of general figure fluctuation during the time saving state (while the special figure 1 is changing in the time saving state), and the value "39" is executed. In the universal figure fluctuation number display mode for indicating the number of times, the value of "40" is a general symbol target fluctuation number display mode indicating a threshold value for which the variation time of the normal symbol becomes short. Further, in the sub display area Ds, a guidance display is displayed to guide the period until the variation time of the normal symbol becomes short.

When the game progresses from the state shown in FIG. 93(a) and the number of times of fluctuation in the universal figure in the time saving state reaches 40 times, as shown in FIG. 93(b), the game state becomes shorter in which the universal figure fluctuation time becomes shorter. The characters "Supercharge time inrush" are displayed to indicate that the transition has been made, and a guidance display is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to guide the player that the normal figure variation time has become short.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 94A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the third embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment has a time saving state selection table 202f added to the first embodiment. The other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving state selection table 202f is a table that is referred to when selecting a time saving state based on the jackpot symbol (special figure 1 and special figure 2) and the game state stored in the game state storage area 203s, It is referred to in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 99) described later (see S1871 in FIG. 99).

Here, in the third embodiment, as the game state to be set, a time saving A and a time saving B advantageous to the player over the time saving A can be selected. Specifically, the jackpot symbol is a special figure 1 (first special symbol), and the game state stored in the game state storage area 203s is normal (that is, the jackpot is won, or a specific area (V prize) When the ball passes through the switch 650e3), the time saving A is selected as the time saving state, and in other cases, the time saving B is selected as the time saving state as shown in FIG.

In other words, when the gaming state is the normal state, the jackpot is awarded based on the lottery of Toku-zu 1, and the hour-shortening A is given as the hour-shortening state only when the hour-shortening state is given after the jackpot game is finished. As a result, a time saving B is given.

When the time saving A is set as the time saving state, the normal symbol variation time is set to 3 seconds (see S2409 in FIG. 98), and when the time saving B is set, the normal symbol variation time is reduced to the time saving. A fluctuation time (2.5 seconds or 1.5 seconds) shorter than that when A is set is set (see S2405 and S2406 in FIG. 98). As a result, when entering the extended game mode for the first time, the normal symbol variation time is normal (4 seconds) during the time saving state game, and when entering the reduced time state again during the extended game mode, the normal symbol The fluctuation time can be shorter than usual. Therefore, when the continuous game mode, which is advantageous to the player, continues, it is possible to make it difficult to shift the continuous game mode to the normal game state.

FIG. 94B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the third embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment has a game state storage area 203s, a time saving state storage area 203t, and a universal figure number counter 203u added to the first embodiment. The other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game state storage area 203s is an area for storing the game state when the start of the big hit is set, and is referred to when selecting the type of the time saving state given after the end of the big hit. This game state storage area 203s, in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 96), after the start of the jackpot is set, the game state is stored (see S271 in FIG. 96), the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 99). ), it is determined that it is the timing of ending the jackpot (S1811: Yes in FIG. 99), and when the jackpot type is not B or D (S1814; No in FIG. 99), it is referred to when setting the time saving state (S1871). ).

The time saving state storage area 203t is an area for storing the type of the selected time saving state (time saving A, time saving B), and is referred to when setting the variation time of the normal symbol during the time saving state. This time saving state storage area 203t stores the selected time saving state (see S1871 of FIG. 99) when the time saving state is selected in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 99), and the variable time setting (see FIG. 98). ), the information stored when setting the variation time of the normal symbol is referred to (see S2401 in FIG. 98).

The ordinary figure number counter 203u is a counter for measuring the number of times of variation of the ordinary symbol during the time saving state, and in the variation time setting process (see FIG. 98), each time the ordinary symbol is varied during the time saving state. One is added (see S2403 in FIG. 98). In the present embodiment, when the value measured by the ordinary figure counter 203u reaches a predetermined value (40), the setting process of the variation time of the normal symbol is made different.

<Regarding Control Processing in Third Embodiment>
The control processing in the third embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment, except that the content of the control processing in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from that of the first embodiment. Therefore, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96 to FIG. 99, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the special symbol variation process is changed to the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 96), and the normal symbol variation process is normally changed to the symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 97). The difference is that the jackpot control process is changed to the jackpot control process 3 (FIG. 99). Since other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the special symbol variation process 3 (see S104 in FIG. 96), similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the processes of S201 to S219 are executed, and when the process of S219 ends, the current game state is stored in the game state storage area 203s. It is stored (S271). Then, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the processing of S220 to S225 is executed, and the present processing ends.

That is, in the third embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, it is possible to temporarily store the game state at the time when the jackpot start is set. As a result, the game state set after the jackpot game is finished can be set based on the game state at the start of the jackpot (when the jackpot is won).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the change time of the special figure has passed, and the game state at the timing of setting the start of the jackpot is configured to be stored in the game state storage area 203s, for example, the change of the special symbol is started. It may be configured to store the game state of the timing (for example, the timing at which the special symbol variation start process in the special symbol variation process 3 (see S213 in FIG. 96) is executed).

Next, in the normal symbol variation process 3 (see S106 in FIG. 97), similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the processes of S901 to S912 are executed, and then the variation time setting process is executed (S951). Here, the variable time setting process (S951) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable time setting process (S951).

When the variable time setting process (S951) is executed, it is first determined whether the current time saving state is the time saving A (time saving state A) (S2401), and when it is determined that the time saving A is the time saving A (time saving state A). (S2401: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol (general figure variation time) is set to 3 seconds (S2409), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, if it is determined that the current time saving state is not the time saving A (time saving state A) (S2401: No), then the value of the universal figure counter 203u is greater than “1”. Is determined (S2402).

In the processing of S2402, when it is determined that the value of the universal figure counter 203u is not larger than "1" (S2402: No), the value of the universal figure counter 203u is set to "1" (S2403) and S2404. Process shifts to. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, when it is determined that the value of the universal figure counter 203u is larger than “1” (S2402: Yes), the process proceeds to S2404.

In the process of S2404, it is determined whether the value of the universal figure counter 203u is “40” or more (S2404). In the process of S2404, when it is determined that the value of the universal figure number counter 203u is not equal to or larger than "40" (less than 40), the variation time of the ordinary symbol (general figure variation time) is set to 2.5 seconds. (S2405). In this case, a variation time shorter than the universal figure variation time set in the process of S2409 is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2404, when it is determined that the value of the public figure number counter 203u is “40” or more, the variation time of the normal symbol (general figure variation time) is set to 1.5 seconds (S2406). In this case, a variation time shorter than the universal figure variation time set in the process of S2405 is set. Then, when the processing of S2405 or S2406 is completed, "1" is added to the value of the common drawing number counter 203u (S2407), the common drawing number command is set (S2408), and this processing is ended.

The universal figure command set in the process of S2408 is a command output to the voice lamp control device 113, and is output similarly to the various commands set in the main control device 110 described above. ..

As described above, in the third embodiment, different general figure fluctuation times are set based on the type of the time saving state that is set and the number of general figure fluctuations executed during the time saving state. With this configuration, it is possible to make the number of universal figure fluctuations executed during the time saving state different based on the type of time saving state and the number of universal figure fluctuations executed during the time saving state. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game in which the player wins the ordinary figure and acquires the reserved memory of the special figure 2.

Also, in the case where “time saving B” is set as the time saving state, which is more advantageous than “time saving A” (the short time varying is set as the time variation changing time), the number of times the time variation changes is a predetermined number or more (40 times or more). In the case of ), since the shorter universal figure variation time is set, the player can continue to play the game during the time saving state.

In the third embodiment, the specific universal figure fluctuation time is set based on each of the time saving states and the number of times of saving time of the universal figure. Based on a predetermined acquisition value (for example, counter acquisition value) from the universal figure fluctuation time selection table, which is referred to in order to set the universal figure fluctuation time corresponding to the number of fluctuations in the figure Alternatively, the universal figure variation time may be selected. In this case, provide a table for easily selecting long public figure fluctuation times and a table for easily selecting short public figure fluctuation times in the universal figure fluctuation time selection table corresponding to each time saving state and the number of times of general figure fluctuation. Then, as in the third embodiment, it is possible to make the universal figure fluctuation time that is easy to be selected different based on each time saving state (hour saving A, time saving B) and the number of times of universal figure fluctuation, and the pending storage of special figure 2 It is possible to improve the interest in the game to obtain.

Further, in the third embodiment, two types of “time saving A” and “time saving B” are provided as the types of time saving state, but more types may be provided. Further, although one trigger for changing the universal figure fluctuation time selected based on the number of universal figure fluctuations is provided (the number of universal figure fluctuations is 40 times), two or more may be provided.

Further, although the third embodiment is configured such that the universal figure fluctuation time shorter than usual is selected (making it easier) when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific upper limit condition (for example, universal figure) is set. When the number of fluctuations exceeds 50 times, or when the number of reserved storages in special figure 2 reaches the upper limit), a longer than normal time (for example, 10 seconds) is selected as the selected universal figure fluctuation time. ) May be selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bonus from being excessively given to the player due to excessive execution of the universal figure variation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the jackpot control processing 3 (S1704) of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big hit control process 3 (S1704). This big hit control process 3 (S1704) is different from the big hit control process of the first embodiment described above in that a process is added when it is determined that it is a big hit end timing, and the other processes are the same. Is executed. The description of the same processing will be omitted.

When the jackpot control process 3 (S1704) is executed, the processes of S1801 to S1814 are executed as in the jackpot control process of the first embodiment. In the process of S1814, the jackpot type is "jackpot B" or "jackpot D". When it is determined that the time saving state is not (that is, the time saving state is a big hit to be given after the end of the big hit) (S1814: No), the time saving state is set based on the time saving state selection table 202f, and the set time saving state is set. It stores in the time saving state storage area 203t (S1871). Then, the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is set to "1" (S1815), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the command determination processing is changed to the command determination processing 3 (see FIG. 100). Since other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing 3 (S3112). When this command determination processing 3 (S3112) is executed, the processing of S3201 to S3214 is executed similarly to the command determination processing of the first embodiment. Then, if it is determined that the notification command has not been received in the process of S3213 (S3213: No), it is determined whether the general-purpose number command has been received next (S3251). When the universal figure count command is received (S3251: Yes), the display universal figure count command is set (S3252). The display universal figure number command set here is output to the display control device 114 in the same manner as other display commands, and it is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the time saving state. The number of times is displayed (see FIG. 93).

<Modification 1 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a modified example 1 of the game board 13 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 2 in the above-described first embodiment, the storage device for restricting the ball entering the right first ball inlet 64b arranged in the right side area of the game board 13 750 and the non-electric accessory 710 were provided. As a result, unless the non-electric accessory 710 is opened, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the right first entrance 64b. On the other hand, the present modification 1 uses a configuration that restricts the ball entering the right first ball inlet 64b without using the storage device 750 and the non-electric accessory 710. Specifically, by always providing the movable valve 1500 above the right first ball entrance 64b, the ball entering the right first ball entrance 64b is regulated.

In addition, in the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above, the through gate 67 and the second ball inlet 640 are arranged in the first flow path 701, and the ball has passed through the through gate 67. The second entrance below the through gate 67 so that the sphere passes in a shorter period (0.2 seconds) than the variation time (3 or 4 seconds) of the normal design (general drawing) executed based on By disposing 640, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is prevented from directly entering the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, in this modification, the through gate 67 is arranged in the first flow path 701, and the second ball inlet 640 is arranged in the second flow path 702. As a result, it is possible to physically prevent the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 from entering the second ball inlet 640.

The difference between the configuration of the game board 13 in the present modification 1 and the configuration of the game board 13 of the above-described first embodiment is that the storage device 750, the non-electrical accessory 710, and the specific general entrance 630 are excluded. The point is that the disposition position of the right first entrance 64b is changed, and the disposition position of the second entrance 640 is changed from the first flow path 701 to the second flow path 702. The other configurations are the same. The same configurations are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 101 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the first modification. As shown in FIG. 101, in the game board 13 of the present modification 1, a constantly movable member 1500 is provided along the ball rolling surface of the most upstream part of the first flow path 701, and the always movable member 1500. Is movable to the open position (in the open state), the ball can enter the right first entrance 64b.

Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be described in detail. The constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 being turned on. There is. Specifically, in the movable member drive process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 53) of main controller 110, operation control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in ROM 203. Has been done. In this movable scenario, the operation in which the movable member 1500 is always opened for 0.1 seconds and then closed for 1.2 seconds is repeatedly executed.

That is, in the game board 13 of the present modification 1, the balls fired in the right-handed game flow into the first flow path 701 at intervals of 1.2 seconds, and the movable member 1500 is constantly arranged for rolling. While rolling on the surface, it flows down in the downstream direction. When the timing of this sphere flowing into the first flow path 701 and rolling on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falling onto the constantly movable member) matches the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened, The ball passes through the always movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first ball entrance 64b.

The timing at which the constantly movable member 1500 rolls (or falls on the always movable member) is at intervals of 1.2 seconds, and the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 is in the open state is 0 in 1.3 seconds. Since it is .1 second, the timing at which both match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about four balls enter the right first entrance 64b in one minute.

That is, in a gaming state in which a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time saving game, a ball is regularly inserted into the right first ball entrance 64b, so that the jackpot game is won. It is possible to prevent occurrence of a state in which there is no hold of special figure 1 when the process is completed and the state shifts to the time saving state. Further, as the period in which the movable valve 1500 is always opened once, a period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to aim and hit is set. The right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than the left-handed game aiming at the mouth 64a.

More specifically, when the game state is the normal state, when the left-handed game is performed, about 15 shots of the 250 shot balls will enter the left first entrance 64a. It is designed so that if a ball comes in, 5 prize balls will be paid out. Further, it is designed so that about 5 shots enter the general entrance 63, and when the balls enter, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when 250 balls are shot, it is possible to put about 20 balls into the left first ball inlet 64a, considering that the prize balls to be paid out are to be shot again. Becomes

On the other hand, in the case where the right-handed game is played in the case where the game state is the normal state, it is designed so that, out of the 250 balls that are launched, about 9 shots enter the right first ball inlet 64b. If you enter a ball, two prize balls will be paid out. Further, the general entrance 63 is not provided in the right area. Therefore, in the right-handed game, when 250 balls are shot, even if it is considered that the prize balls to be paid out are shot again, about 10 balls are allowed to enter the right first entrance 64b. I can only do it. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from performing a right-handed game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the general ball entrance 63 is not provided in the game area (the right area) through which the ball shot by the right-handed game passes, but in the normal game state, the right-handed game is hit more than the left-handed game. The general entrance 63 may be provided based on a design concept such that the game is not more advantageous to the player. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls to be paid out as a prize ball in the right-handed game during the time saving state or the big hit state.

Next, in the configuration arranged in the right side area of the game board 13 in the first modification, the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 are different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above. The points will be mainly described.

In the first modified example, the through gate 67 is disposed in the downstream portion of the first flow passage 701 having the curved passage 701a, and the second inlet is provided in the downstream portion of the second flow passage 702 (the lower end portion of the fifth flow passage 704b). A ball opening 640 is provided. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the spheres flowing into the second flow passage 702 to flow down toward the second ball inlet 640 at a 1.2 second interval without decreasing the flow velocity. Therefore, it is possible to make the flow-down interval of the spheres flowing down the second flow path 702 constant, so that the spheres are connected in the second flow path 702 and a plurality of spheres are simultaneously entered into the second entrance 640. It can be suppressed. In addition, when notifying that the electric accessory 640a has been opened, the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the electric accessory 640a is open (see FIG. 23(b)), and is the earliest. The ball can be entered into the second entrance 640.

In addition, different flow paths (first flow path 701, which are distributed by the distribution member 700) between the through gate 67 which is a trigger for executing the lottery of the normal symbol and the electric accessory 640a whose operation is controlled by the winning of the normal symbol. Since the distribution member 700 is disposed in the second flow path 702) and the distribution member 700 is destroyed so that the sphere flows down into only one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is disabled), the second entrance port It is possible to make it difficult for a ball to enter 640. That is, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed, and a state in which the sphere flows down into only one flow path is created. As a result, it becomes possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, but by using the configuration of this modification, the ball is illegally entered into the second entrance 640. It is possible to suppress the creation of a state that is easy to cause.

<Modification 2 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, a modified example 2 of the game board 13 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 2 in the above-described first embodiment, the storage device for restricting the ball entering the right first ball inlet 64b arranged in the right side area of the game board 13 750 and the non-electric accessory 710 were provided. As a result, unless the non-electric accessory 710 is opened, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the right first entrance 64b. On the other hand, in the second modification, the movable plate 1700 is always provided between the storage device 750 and the specific general ball entrance 630, and when the storage device 750 is released, the balls that have passed through the storage device 750. The case where the ball enters the specific general entrance 630 and the case where the ball does not enter are provided.

Specifically, the movable plate 1700 is constantly variable every 1 second between a guiding position (protruding position) in which a ball can be guided to the specific general entrance 630 and an open position (retracting position) in which guiding is impossible (difficult). The variable control means is provided, and the flow of the sphere that has passed through the storage device 750 can be controlled by the variable control by the variable control means.

The operation of the constantly movable plate 1700 is controlled by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Specifically, a movable plate solenoid (not shown) for variably operating the movable plate 1700 is turned on (a state in which the movable plate 1700 is constantly projected) and in an off state (a state in which the movable plate 1700 is constantly retracted). It has a variable control means for making it variable, and based on a predetermined counter value updated every time the main processing of the main controller 110 is executed by the variable control means, a predetermined variable scenario is set. The variable control according to is executed.

The movable plate solenoid used in this modification is configured such that the movable plate 1700 is always located at the retracted position in the energized state. As described in each of the above-described embodiments, this is the first condition during the time saving state as the ending condition of the game period that is advantageous to the player (the time saving state period in which it is easy to obtain the reserved memory of Special Figure 2). This is because the condition that the fluctuation (lottery) of the special symbol (special symbol 1) is executed once is set. In other words, unless this end condition is met, the variation time of the ordinary symbol (general diagram) becomes shorter than the normal state (general symbol variation time of 3 seconds), and the normal symbol (general symbol) is executed when the winning symbol is won. This is because the opening operation pattern (long opening) advantageous to the player is continuously executed as the opening operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a. As described above, in the state where there is no reserved memory of special figure 1, until the reserved memory of special figure 2 is acquired, the variation of each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started. No (time-saving waiting state), only the variation of the normal design (general drawing) will be executed. In this case, the time saving state is continued until the player wins the prize and enters the ball into the second ball entrance 640. In order to prevent such a situation from being intentionally created, the movable plate 1700 is always located at the projecting position when the movable valve solenoid is powered off. As a result, even if the action of intentionally stopping the supply of power to the movable valve solenoid is executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of great damage.

In the configuration of the present modified example described above, depending on the timing when the storage device 750 is released (that is, the timing when the big hit game is started) and the variable state of the constantly movable plate 1700, to the right first entrance 64b. It is possible to regulate the entry of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect at which timing the jackpot game is started.

A configuration that allows different timings to be set as the timing for bringing the storage device 750 into the released state may be added to the above-described modified example. Specifically, according to the jackpot type selected at the time of jackpot winning of the special symbol (special drawing), the jackpot type for releasing the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 and the jackpot type not to be released are set in advance, Further, as a jackpot type for releasing the storage valve 750a, a first timing (for example, the timing of starting the first round) and a second timing (for example, the timing of starting the third round) are set in advance. Constitute.

With this configuration, the timing at which the storage device 750 is released and the ball passes through the storage device 750 can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the timing when the jackpot game is started and the variable state of the movable plate 1700 that is always advantageous to the player, and even after the jackpot game is started. It is possible to make a game play with an expectation. Further, it is possible to suppress the act of starting the jackpot game at a timing advantageous to the player.

In addition, you may use for each embodiment mentioned above the structure which sets the presence or absence of cancellation|release of the storage apparatus 750 mentioned above, and sets several cancellation|release timing according to the jackpot type. As a result, more complicated game play can be provided, and interest in the game can be improved.

<Modification 3 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a modified example 3 of the game board 13 in the above-described first embodiment will be described. This modification 3 is different in that the storage device 750 and the specific general ball entrance 630 are arranged at different positions with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, and other than that. Have the same configuration. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the third modification, the storage device 750 and the specific general ball entrance 630 are arranged on the right side of the lower central portion of the game board 13. With such a configuration, the right-handed game makes it easier to store the balls in the storage device 750 than the left-handed game. Specifically, among the balls launched by the right-handed game, the balls that flow down on the first variable winning device 65 are configured to be stored in the storage device 750 most easily.

Then, in the state where the balls are stored in the storage device 750, the following balls flow down above the stored balls. Specifically, the upper surface position of the sphere stored in the storage device 750 is below the extension line of the sphere flowing down on the first variable winning device 65 (the first variable winning device 65 is The storage device 750 is arranged so as to have a downward step with respect to the upper surface of the provided unit. Therefore, the spheres stored in the storage device 750 do not affect the subsequent sphere flow. In this modified example 3 configured as described above, when the right-handed game, which is advantageous to the player, is started, it is possible to more reliably secure the suspension of the special figure 1.

Each modified example of the game board 13 described above may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Thereby, a more complicated game can be provided to the player, and the interest can be improved.

<Modification of electric accessory 640a>
Next, a modified example of the electric accessory 640a used in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the above-described embodiments, the game board in which the second ball inlet 640 is arranged so that two or more balls do not enter the second ball inlet 640 while the electric accessory 640a is opening. It was configured to regulate the sphere flow in the right side region of 13. That is, the electric accessory 640a is provided with a measure for restricting the flow of balls so that a plurality of balls do not continuously flow in simultaneously. On the other hand, the electric accessory A200 described in the present modification is configured such that two or more balls cannot enter the second ball inlet 640.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, the shutter portion A222 has a cross section that is orthogonal to the rotation shaft portions 223 and 223 and is curved in a substantially V shape, and the rotation door A220 has a side start winning opening A40A. In the closed state, the door main wall A222A is positioned on the front side and stands up substantially vertically, and in this state, the main prize wall A222B extends rearward from the upper end of the main door wall A222. The door main wall A222A has a V-shaped cross section in order to prevent a game ball from being caught. Further, the door main wall A222A is located away from the rotating shaft portions 223 and 223, and rotates forward from the substantially horizontal state as the rotating door A220 rotates from the open state to the closed state. It stands up almost vertically. The prize winning auxiliary wall A222B is inclined so as to descend toward the inner side of the side start prize hole A40A in a state where the swing door A220 is opened.

The width of the shutter portion A222 is slightly narrower than the lateral width of the side start winning opening A40A, while the width of the pair of side walls is wider than the lateral width of the side starting winning opening A40A. Then, when the revolving door A220 is completely closed, the front surface of the side wall abuts the side edge portion of the side start winning opening A40A, and the revolving door A220 further closes the side starting winning opening A40A. It prevents it from turning.

Door rotation protrusions A224 and A224 are provided on the opposite sides of the pair of side walls from the shutter portion with the rotation shaft portion interposed therebetween. Positioning contact portions A225 and A225, which are located rearward of the door rotation protrusion A224 and project downward, are formed on the side wall when the rotation door A220 is at the completely opened open end position. ing.

A detection sensor is housed in the switch housing 215B of the resin housing described above. The detection sensor has a flat rectangular parallelepiped shape, and a game ball passage hole is vertically formed through the rear end of the detection sensor. Corresponding to the game ball passage hole, through holes are formed on both upper and lower surfaces of the switch housing portion 215B, and the game ball that has entered the tongue piece housing portion 215A passes through the game ball passage hole 281 and receives the switch. It is adapted to move below the portion 215B. A duct (not shown) that takes in the game balls and guides them to the ball circulation system in the game hall is provided below the switch housing 215B.

The movable tongue piece A230 is housed in the tongue piece housing portion 215A of the resin housing. The movable tongue piece A230 has a flat structure in which the lateral width direction is short with respect to the front-rear direction and is thin in the up-down direction, and is supported so as to slide back and forth while slidingly contacting the inner surface of the tongue piece storage portion 215A.

The movable tongue piece A230 has a bilaterally symmetrical shape when viewed from above, and the front end portion thereof is provided with a projecting/retracting protruding piece portion that is narrower in a stepped shape than the whole. The projecting and projecting protrusion is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, and has a width that allows it to be inserted into the lower wide portion of the side start winning opening A40A.

A pair of outer downward inclined surfaces 240S, 240S inclined downward toward both sides are formed on both sides in the lateral width direction of the upper surface of the projecting and projecting piece. In addition, between the pair of outer descending inclined surfaces 240S, 240S of the projecting and projecting protrusion portion, a pull-in inclined surface that is extremely gently inclined so as to be lowered toward the center and is gently inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear. 240H is formed. Further, a guide slope 240Y is formed on the upper surface of the projecting/retracting projecting portion so as to descend relatively steeply rearward from the rear end of the pull-in slope 240H.

The movable tongue A230 has a shape in which the trapezoidal projection 231D is projected rearward from the center in the width direction at the rear end of the substantially square base portion when the projecting and projecting projection portion is viewed from above. There is. Further, a ball passage elongated hole is vertically formed through the center of the base portion in the width direction from the front end position to the rear end position. The ball passing slot has a width that allows just one game ball to pass and is slightly smaller than the width of the projecting and projecting piece. In addition, the front end of the ball passage elongated hole becomes semicircular and a part reaches the base end of the projecting and projecting piece, and the rear end of the ball passage elongated hole becomes parallel to the bottom of the trapezoidal protrusion 231D. It has reached the position near the rear end of the base.

In the range of the movable tongue A230 extending from the base end of the projecting/retracting protrusion to the intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the base, a pair of doors extending vertically along both side edges of the ball passage elongated hole. The drive projection wall is formed to project. The entire portion of the base portion on the rear side of the door drive protruding wall is a power receiving portion A230P that is thicker in the vertical direction so as to have an upper surface that is flush with the rear end upper surface of the door driving protruding wall.

A pair of connecting recesses is formed in a recess on the opposing inner side surfaces of the power receiving portion A230P that face each other across the ball passage elongated hole. Each of the coupling recesses includes a substantially triangular interference avoiding recess whose lower end side is narrowed, and an engaging groove part which is formed in the inner side of the interference avoiding recess away from the ball passage elongated hole and extends vertically. Become. The front sliding contact surface 236A arranged on the front side of the engaging groove portion extends straight in the vertical direction. The rear sliding contact surface 236B arranged on the rear side of the engaging groove portion is a seesaw stopper portion according to the present invention in which a lower portion of the rear sliding contact surface 236B projects forward from an intermediate position in the vertical direction. The stopper contact surface 237S at the upper end of the seesaw stopper portion is slightly inclined so as to descend toward the front sliding contact surface 236A.

Each door drive projecting wall is provided with an intermediate depression at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction, the front side of the intermediate depression is the front pressing protrusion A241 according to the present invention, and the rear side of the intermediate depression is the rear pressing according to the present invention. It is a protrusion A242. The rear pressing protrusion A242 has the same height as the power receiving portion A230P, and the front pressing protrusion A241 is lower than the power receiving portion A230P. Further, the bottom surface of the intermediate depression is a horizontal and flat intermediate depression flat surface 233N. Then, the rear surface of the front side pressing protrusion A241 is a closing pressing portion A241K according to the present invention, and rises vertically from the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. Further, the upper surface of the front-side pressing protrusion A241 is a door stopper portion A241J according to the present invention, and is horizontally flat. On the other hand, the front surface of the rear pressing protrusion A242 is an open pressing portion A242Z according to the present invention, which also rises vertically from the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. The front surface of the front-side pressing protrusion A241 is parallel to the closing pressing portion A241K that is the rear surface and gently inclines toward the front from the middle and extends to the rear end of the above-described outer downward sloping surfaces 240S, 240S. ..

The lower end of the seesaw member A250 engages with the connecting recess of the movable tongue A230, and the door rotation protrusions A224 and A224 of the rotating door A220 engage with the door drive projection wall of the movable tongue A230. doing. Thereby, the movable tongue A230 is driven by receiving power from the solenoid via the seesaw member A250, and the rotary door A220 is driven by receiving power from the movable tongue A230.

First, the transmission of power from the seesaw member A250 to the movable tongue piece A230 will be described. Among the connecting recesses of the movable tongue A230, the interference avoiding recesses receive the connecting arms of the seesaw member A250, and the engaging groove portions of the connecting recesses have the lower connecting protrusions A255, A255 of the connecting arms. Engaged.

Here, when the solenoid is not excited, the plunger projects forward as shown in FIG. 104, and at this time, the lower end connecting protrusions A255 and A255 are located at the lower end of the engaging groove. At this time, the movable tongue piece A230 is arranged at the rear end position of the linearly movable range, and the projecting/withdrawing projecting piece portion is retracted to the inner side of the side start winning port A40A. In this case, that is, in the state where the projecting/retracting projection portion is retracted to the inner side of the side start winning opening A40A, the tip of the projecting/retracting projection portion is retracted to a position where it is completely covered inside the side starting winning opening A40A. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from colliding with the side start winning opening A40A in the retracted state.

When the solenoid is excited from this state and the plunger is attracted rearward, the seesaw member A250 rotates about the rotation shaft portions A253 and A253, and the connecting arm rotates forward. The lower end connecting convex portions A255, A255 press the front side sliding contact surfaces 236A, 236A forward while slidingly contacting the front side sliding contact surfaces 236A, 236A. As a result, the movable tongue piece A230 is pushed out toward the front of the gaming machine, and the projecting/retracting projecting piece portion projects from the side start winning port A40A to the front side of the game board, as shown in FIG. Then, for example, the end surface of the base portion of the movable tongue A230 comes into contact with the opening edge of the side start winning opening A40A from the rear surface side, and the movable tongue A230 is positioned and stopped at the "front end operating position" according to the present invention. Then, the projecting/projecting piece 240 is maximally projected from the side start winning opening A40A (see FIG. 106).

When the excitation of the solenoid is stopped in the state where the movable tongue piece A230 is arranged at the front end operating position (the state shown in FIG. 106), the compression coil spring A276 causes the plunger to project forward. Then, the lower end of the seesaw member A250 is rotated rearward of the gaming machine about the rotating shafts A253 and A253, and the lower end of the seesaw member A250 is from the front position to the rear position of the rotating shafts A253 and A253. Moving. At this time, the lower end connecting convex portions A255, A255 are brought into sliding contact with the rear side sliding contact surfaces 236B, 236B of the engaging groove portions and pushed backward. As a result, the movable tongue is pulled toward the rear of the gaming machine, and the projecting/retracting protrusion is retracted to the inner side of the side start winning port A40A (see FIG. 107).

Specifically, when the excitation of the solenoid is stopped and the lower end of the connecting arm of the seesaw member A250 is rotated rearward, first, the upper edge E1 (first end) of the stopper recess provided in the lower connecting projection A255 (first The rear end edge of the one plane M1 contacts the stopper contact surface 237S of the seesaw stopper portion. Then, as the seesaw member A250 rotates, the lower end connecting convex portion A255 slidably contacts the rear sliding contact surface 236B, and the lower end connecting convex portion A255 is positioned rearward of the turning shaft portions A253 and A253 of the seesaw member A250. At this time, the lower edge portion E2 (the lower end edge of the second plane M2) of the stopper recess comes into contact with a portion of the rear sliding contact surface 236B that is lower than the seesaw stopper portion, and the rear sliding surface of the engaging groove portion Push the contact surfaces 236B, 236B backward. Thereby, the movable tongue can be returned to the initial position (rear end retracted position) by the elastic force of the compression coil spring A276.

By the way, when a fraudulent act of pulling out the movable tongue piece A230 retracted in the inner part of the side start winning opening A40A to the front surface of the game board with, for example, a wire inserted from a gap of the game machine, become that way. That is, the power is not transmitted from the solenoid to the seesaw member A250, the power of the seesaw member A250 is transmitted from the movable tongue piece A230, and the connecting arm of the seesaw member A250 is pushed forward by the rear sliding contact surface 236B in the engagement groove portion 236. Then, the first plane M1 in each of the stopper recesses of the lower end connecting protrusions A255 and A255 comes into surface contact with the stopper contact surface 237S of the seesaw stopper part. When the movable tongue piece A230 is further pulled forward from this state, the pulling force becomes an upward force F1 orthogonal to the stopper contact surface 237S of the step portion, and the center of the first plane M1 and the rotating shaft portion. The direction is substantially parallel to the direction connecting the center of A253, that is, the direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation direction of the stopper recess. As a result, rotation of the seesaw member A250 is restricted, and it becomes impossible to pull the movable tongue piece A230 to the front to project the projecting/retracting projecting portion in front of the side start winning opening A40A. Even if the seesaw member A250 is slightly lifted upward by the upward force F1, the triangular protrusion formed on the connecting wall 252 of the seesaw member A250 engages with the flange portion 274F of the plunger. As a result, rotation of the seesaw member A250 is more reliably prohibited.

Next, the transmission of power from the movable tongue A230 to the rotary door A220 will be described. The door drive projection walls of the movable tongue are engaged with the door rotation protrusions A224 and A224 of the rotary door A220, respectively, whereby the rotary door A220 rotates by receiving power from the movable tongue A230. To do. Specifically, in a state where the movable tongue piece A230 is arranged at the rear end retracted position and the entire projecting/retracting projection portion is retracted to the inner side of the side start winning opening A40A, the door rotation projection A224 pushes the front side. The protrusion 241 is arranged above the door stopper A241J (state of FIG. 104). At this time, the rotating shaft portion of the rotating door A220 is located diagonally forward of the door rotating protrusion A224. At this time, the first space AS1 according to the present invention is formed between the lower end portion of the door rotation protrusion A224 and the open pressing portion A242Z of the rear side pressing protrusion A242.

Then, when the movable tongue piece A230 moves forward from the rear end retracted position, as shown in the changes in FIGS. 104 to 107, the front side pressing protrusion A241 moves forward and the lower end portion of the door rotation protrusion A224. The door stopper portion A241J of the front-side pressing protrusion A241 does not face each other in the vertical direction, and the lower end portion of the door rotation protrusion A224 faces the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N in the vertical direction and the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. A space for turning the door turning protrusion A224 is secured between them.

Then, when the movable tongue A230 moves further forward, the lower end of the door turning protrusion A224 moves in the first space AS1 described above, and during this time, the movable tongue A230 moves forward, but the turning door A230 moves. Is kept stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 105, when the projecting/retracting projecting portion of the movable tongue piece A230 projects from the side starting winning opening A40A by a predetermined amount, the lower end portion of the door pivoting projecting portion A224 becomes the rear pressing projecting portion A242. It contacts the front surface A242Z. Then, by further moving the movable tongue piece forward, the door main wall A222A of the rotating door A220 is lifted, the side start winning opening A40A is opened (see FIGS. 105 and 106), and the movable tongue piece A230 is moved forward. When the operating position is reached, the revolving door A220 is fully opened, and the game ball can enter the side start winning opening A40A. More specifically, when the rotating door A220 is pushed by the rear pressing protrusion A242 and rotates by a predetermined angle, the rotating door A220 rotates toward the open end position by its own weight. That is, the turning door A220 starts a turning operation when the projecting/retracting projection portion projects from the side start winning opening A40A by about half, and the projecting/projecting projection portion projects from about half to completely project. During a relatively short period of time, the side start winning opening A40A is changed from the fully closed state to the fully opened state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the movable tongue piece A230 starts to move forward, the swing door A220 is stopped halfway, and the swing door A220 starts to open halfway. Mouth A40A is opened. Then, when the game ball falls on the upper surface of the projecting/retracting projecting piece 240 protruding from the side start winning portion A40A, the game ball is guided by the projecting/retracting projecting portion 240 to enter the side start winning portion A40A and win the prize. The game ball is detected by the detection switch.

Further, in the state where the revolving door A220 is completely opened, as shown in FIG. 106, the positioning abutting portion A225 of the side wall abuts the upper surface of the rear pressing protrusion A242, and the revolving door A220 opens. Be positioned in position. As a result, rattling of the rotary door A220 is restricted. Further, in this state, a second space AS2 according to the present invention is formed between the lower end portion of the door turning protrusion A224 and the open pressing portion A242Z of the rear side pressing protrusion A242.

Further, when the movable tongue piece A230 retracts from the front end operating position, the front pressing protrusion A241 moves rearward, as shown in the changes in FIGS. 106 to 107. At this time, the lower end of the door turning protrusion A224 relatively moves in the second space AS2 toward the front-side pressing protrusion A241. As a result, a part of the projecting/retracting protrusion 240 of the movable tongue A230 moves to the inside of the front opening winning port A40A (from the state where the door pivoting protrusion A224 is in contact with the opening pressing portion A242Z to the closing pressing portion A241K). The pivoting door A220 is maintained in the open state during the period of moving in the second space AS2 until it comes into contact. Then, the movable tongue piece A230 is opened to the front by a predetermined amount (the distance that the door rotation protrusion A224 moves in the second space AS2 from the state of being in contact with the opening pressing portion A242Z to being in contact with the closing pressing portion A241K). When moved into the mouth A40A, the closing pressing portion A241K of the front pressing protrusion A241 comes into contact with the lower end portion of the door rotation protruding portion A224. At this time, the projecting and projecting piece 240 of the movable tongue piece A230 is housed in the side start winning opening A40A by about half. Then, when the movable tongue A230 further retracts, the rotating door A220 operates so as to be retracted as the movable tongue A230 retracts, and when the projecting/retracting protrusion portion is completely retracted, the rotating door A220 moves. The side start winning opening A40A is completely closed and stopped, and the movable tongue A230 is further retracted at the back side of the side starting winning opening A40A, so that the lower end of the door turning protrusion A224 moves up and down with the door stopper A241J. Return to the initial state of facing each other. As described above, in the present embodiment, the movable tongue piece A230 starts to move backward, the swing door 220 is stopped halfway, and the swing door A220 starts to close halfway. Mouth A40A is closed.

By the way, in a state where the side start winning opening A40A is closed (state of FIG. 104), for example, when trying to pry open the rotating door A220 with a wire or the like, the door rotating protrusion A224 rotates toward the opening side. , Abut on the door stopper portion A241J of the front side pressing protrusion A241 in the vertical direction. This prohibits unauthorized opening of the pivot door A220. Here, the direction in which the door rotation protrusion A224 pushes the door stopper portion A241J of the front side pressing protrusion A241 is in the vertical direction, and is orthogonal to the movable direction (front-back direction) of the movable tongue piece A230. Therefore, when an unauthorized external force is applied to the rotating door A220, the door stopper portion A241J of the movable tongue A230 is not moved in the movable direction, and it is possible to reliably prevent the unauthorized opening of the rotating door A220. You can

<Other example 1 of performance using the configuration of each embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, another example of effects performed using the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In the above-described second embodiment, as the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 15A, each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, It was configured to display the number of holdings for each symbol). On the other hand, in the effect example described with reference to FIG. 108, the effect of displaying the symbol display and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 in the sub display area Ds is executed. In the sub-display area Ds, a variable display mode is displayed in which a specific display mode (for example, a number) is changed in response to a change in the pattern of the special mode 1 (the change of the special mode 1 is executed). The special display 1 is configured to be displayed in the suggestion display mode that suggests the display mode to be displayed next in the variable display mode. Here, with reference to FIG. 108(a), the contents of the present effect example will be described.

The display screen of FIG. 108( a) is a display screen showing an example of a case where there is no suspension of Toku-zu 1 during Toku-zu 1 change during the time saving state (first time saving). As shown in FIG. 108(a), the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3 of the sub display area Ds is called "remaining time seconds" as an auxiliary display mode for giving meaning to the variable status of the variable display mode. The display and the display of "10" are displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as a variable display mode indicating that Toku-zu 1 is changing. By changing the display mode (“10” in FIG. 108(a)) displayed in the variable display area Ds4, it is configured to notify that the Toku-zu 1 is changing during the variable display. There is.

It should be noted that the display mode (for example, “10”) displayed in the variable display area Ds4 while the special map 1 is changing is erroneously recognized by the player as the stop of the change of the special figure 1 in the display mode. In order to prevent this, the display mode is changed to the next display mode after being temporarily stopped and displayed for a period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in which the player can recognize the display mode in a slightly shaken state. Then, the display mode (for example, “∞” (see FIG. 108(b))) displayed in the variable display area Ds4 when the fluctuation of the special FIG. In order to recognize that the fluctuation has stopped, it is configured to stop for a longer period (for example, 1 second) than the temporary stop display (for example, 0.5 seconds) described above.

With this configuration, the player can easily understand the contents of the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4. It should be noted that other configurations may be used as long as the player can easily understand the contents of the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4, for example, the period during which the special figure 1 is variably displayed. , The period during which the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed, the color of the background image in the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3 is changed, the display content of the auxiliary display mode is changed, and the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 You can change the color and thickness of the letters. This allows the player to easily understand the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4.

In addition, according to the configuration used in this example of performance, it is configured such that the special figure 1 is changing and the remaining variation period of the special figure 1 can be informed by the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4. ing. Thereby, in one display area (variable display area Ds4), it is possible to display a plurality of pieces of information related to the fluctuation of the special figure 1.

In this example of effect, in order to inform the player that the special map 1 is changing, the effect display for counting down the time is executed in the special figure 1 changing display area Ds3, but other than that. It may be configured, and for example, a story development type effect display such as an effect of answering a question and an effect of achieving a mission may be used. Even in the case of such a configuration, the content displayed in the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3 can be changed to notify the player that the special figure 1 is changing.

Then, in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 of the sub-display area Ds, a hold number suggesting mode for indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed based on the hold number of the special figure 1 (Fig. 108 ( See a)). This hold number suggesting mode is displayed in a display mode suggesting a display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 from the next time. That is, the display mode displayed corresponding to each hold number suggestion mode is also changed each time the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 is changed.

According to the display screen shown in FIG. 108(a), four reserved number suggestion modes are displayed in the special figure 1 reserved display area Ds5, and any one of “V”, “9”, and “∞” is displayed. Is displayed. The display mode displayed as this hold number suggestion mode is an indication of the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as described above, and the "V" display mode is based on the lottery result of Special Figure 1. The display mode of "9" suggests that there is a residual fluctuation period of Toku-zu 1, and the display mode of "∞" suggests that there is no reserved memory.

According to the game state shown in FIG. 108(a), since there is no hold storage of special figure 1, the display setting is made so that the display number of "∞" increases as the hold number indicating mode. In this way, the display mode of each pending number suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 pending display area Ds5 is as follows: the lottery result of the special figure 1 being changed, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 being changed, and the special figure. Since the display content is set based on the number of reserved balls of 1, the player plays the game while predicting the future content of the game based on the display mode displayed in the special figure 1 reserved display area Ds5. It can be carried out.

According to the display screen shown in FIG. 108(a), four hold number suggesting modes are displayed, but this display number always shows four hold number suggesting modes regardless of the hold number in Toku-zu 1. It is configured to be done. In other words, in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5, the player is notified (indicated) of the hold number of the special figure 1 based on the display content of each hold number suggestion mode, not the display number of the hold number suggestion mode. There is. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the current number of holdings.

In addition, in this production example, although the number of displays of the number-of-holds suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 holding display area Ds5 is always displayed (regardless of the number of holdings of the special figure 1), four pieces are displayed. A configuration other than that may be used, and for example, it is displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 based on the number of holdings of the special figure 1, the remaining change time of the special figure 1, and the lottery result of the special figure 1. The number of displayed hold mode suggesting modes may be different. In this case, for example, when the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 becomes shorter (for example, when the remaining time becomes 10 seconds), the number of displays of the reserved number suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 reserved display area Ds5 decreases. Good to configure. As a result, the options predicted by the player can be reduced, and the player's prediction accuracy can be improved.

Further, as in the above-described second embodiment, in the gaming machine configured to execute a game advantageous to the player when there is no holding number of the special figure 1 at the time when the time saving state ends, By informing (displaying) the presence/absence of the number of holdings of the special figure 1 as in this example of performance, it is possible to make the player execute the game in the time saving state while expecting the player to the end.

Then, when the effect display of FIG. 108(a) has passed and the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is stopped, the display screen shown in FIG. 108(b) is displayed. The display screen of FIG. 108(b) is a display screen showing an example of a case where neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is held, in a state where the change of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state is stopped. is there. As shown in FIG. 108(b), when the special time saving 1st time is finished in a state where there is no special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 reservation, the fluctuation of the special symbol is not started Without being started), it becomes a waiting time. In this short time standby, by continuously executing the right-handed game, the normal symbol is continuously changed (lottery), and the game in which the ball is entered into the second entrance 640 is executed.

In the configuration of the game board 13 described above with reference to FIG. 2, since the ball does not enter the right first ball inlet 64b even if the right-handed game is executed during the time saving state, FIG. 108(b) The state shown in is a gaming state in which the time saving state is continuously maintained until the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. On the display screen, the main figure main symbol Dmc corresponding to the ordinary symbol is variably displayed in the first display area Dm, and in the special figure 1 reserved display area Ds5, instead of the display showing the reserved number of special figure 1, the present Is displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as a display indicating that the special figure 1 is not changed in the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3. The character "remaining time ∞ seconds" in which the display mode of "∞" is stopped is displayed.

According to the effect example described above, the player is provided with a display mode in which the variation status (lottery result, remaining variation time) of Toku-zu 1 during the time saving state and the number of holdings of Toku-zu 1 are displayed on the display screen. Since the effect display is performed so as to predict the progress of the game thereafter, the effect effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the above-described production example, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both shifted to the time saving standby state that can occur in the state where there is no hold (the "∞" display mode is stopped and displayed in the variable display area Ds4). Although the effect display for suggesting that the effect display is also executed, the determination as to whether or not to execute the effect display is determined based on the number of reserved memories (presence/absence of reservation) of special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, for example, when the number of reserved memories in special figure 2 is 1 or more, the above-described effect display may not be executed.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the gaming state of the timing when the variation of the normal symbol (lottery) is executed and the gaming state of the timing when the operation pattern of the electric auditors product 640a is set are both time saving states, Although it is configured to set an operation pattern (long open) that is advantageous to the player as an operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, a configuration other than that may be used, for example, variation of a normal symbol (lottery) is executed. Instead of the timing (the timing at which the determination is performed by the determination means), the timing at which the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (the timing at which the determination condition is satisfied) may be used.

Further, the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed (the timing at which the operation means executes the operation), not the timing at which the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set (the timing at which the operation mode is set by the operation mode setting unit). ) May be used.

Further, when the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a causes the electric accessory 640a to be operated a plurality of times, each operation content may be determined at each timing when each operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed. .. Specifically, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a has an operation pattern of opening the electric accessory 640a three times, and when an operation pattern (long open) advantageous to the player is set, each opening is performed. When the period is set to 2 seconds and the operation pattern that is disadvantageous to the player (short open) is set, when each open period is set to 0.2 second, the long open as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a. Is set and the time saving state ends between the second opening and the third opening, the opening period may be set to 0.2 seconds only for the third opening. With such a configuration, while the electric accessory 640a is operated so as to be advantageous to the player to the end during the time saving state in which it is advantageous to the player, after the game state shifts to the normal state, the player It is possible to easily prevent the excessively advantageous state from being provided.

In this case, only the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be set in advance, and the opening period may be set at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened according to the operation pattern. The operation start timing and operation content of the electric accessory 640a may be individually controlled for each operation without setting the operation pattern of the object 640a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entrance 640 while the electric accessory 640a is opened, the balls are inserted into the second entrance 640. It is possible to enter the second ball entrance 640 in order to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second ball entrance 640 at the same time by making one ball into the opening operation ending condition of the electric accessory 640a. Is provided with a distribution unit that alternately distributes the spheres to a different flow path (first flow path) and a flow path that cannot enter the second entrance 640 (second flow path). Although it was constructed so that the distance between the balls flowing down was wide. Other configurations may be added to more surely prevent a plurality of balls from simultaneously entering the second entrance 640.

For example, a gear type sprocket mechanism is provided on the upstream side of the second ball inlet port 640 in the flow channel (first channel) that can enter the second ball inlet port 640. Even if a plurality of spheres continuously flow down the road, the sprocket mechanism may guide the spheres one by one to the downstream side to widen the flow-down interval of the spheres. This makes it possible to physically prevent a plurality of balls from simultaneously entering the second ball inlet 640. As described above, in the case where the ball feeding member that feeds the balls in the downstream direction is provided on the upstream side of the second ball entrance 640 so that the downflow interval of the balls is constant, the above-mentioned distribution member may not be used. .. Further, the ball feeding member may have a configuration other than the above-mentioned sprocket mechanism. For example, a magnetic body that can be moved by a fixed operation is provided, and the ball is fed in a downward direction at a predetermined timing (downward) depending on the moving position of the magnetic body. ) Configurations may be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution member (the distribution device 700) is used to distribute the ball shot in the right-handed game to the two flow paths, but the structure is to distribute the ball to three or more flow paths. May be used. In this case, one distribution member may distribute the spheres to three or more flow paths, or a combination of a plurality of distribution members may be used to divide the spheres into three or more flow paths. It may be configured to distribute. As a result, it is possible to further widen the interval at which the balls flow down the flow path that can enter the second ball inlet 640.

Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution member (the distribution device 700) that distributes the spheres evenly to the plurality of flow paths is used, but it is not necessary to make the distribution ratio of the spheres to each flow path equal. Alternatively, for example, a distribution member may be provided such that the number of spheres flowing down the first flow path 701 and the number of spheres flowing down the second flow path 702 are 1:2, or the distribution destination of the spheres is You may provide the structure selected randomly. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the flow-down mode of the ball.

In the second embodiment described above, a configuration is provided in which a plurality of conditions for ending the time saving state are provided, and the time saving state is ended when any of the conditions is satisfied, but other configurations may be used in advance. The time saving state may be ended when all the set conditions for ending the time saving state are satisfied. In this case, it is advisable to use a configuration for outputting to the outside so that the player can recognize the one of the plurality of time saving state end conditions that has already satisfied the condition.

Further, in the above-described second embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) is executed a plurality of times (twice) as the number of time reductions in which the time reduction state is continued and one condition of the termination condition of the time reduction state. Although it is configured as described above, such a configuration may be used to execute the following gaming characteristics.

In the above-described third embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the variation time of the normal symbol is made different, and the time saving state B is set for the purpose of providing various playability, and further, the time saving state. When the number of fluctuations in the ordinary figure exceeds 40 times, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and it is configured to provide an advantageous state to the player, but the variation time of the ordinary symbol is made different. By doing so, it may be configured to provide a disadvantageous state to the player, for example, a plurality of universal figure fluctuation times based on the type of symbol won per hit or the game state at the time of winning per hit. By selecting one selection table from the selection table and selecting the universal figure variation time executed from the selected universal figure variation time selection table, from the variation time of the first special symbol during the time saving state It is also possible to use a configuration in which a long universal figure fluctuation time (universal figure length fluctuation time) can be selected.

In this case, if the normal figure length variation time is selected, further normal symbol lottery cannot be executed during the time saving state, so that the game state advantageous to the player is substantially ended. With such a configuration, the player understands how long the substantial time-saving state (the game state is the time-saving state, and the state in which the normal symbol length variation time is not selected as the normal symbol variation) continues. It is possible to provide difficult game playability.

In addition, when selecting the variation time of the normal design (general drawing), the configuration may be used in which the variation time preset based on the number of times of universal drawing variation is selected in advance. When setting the variation time of the design (general drawing), a configuration may be used in which the variation time corresponding to the counter value acquired from the plurality of variation times is selected based on a predetermined counter value. Furthermore, when starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol (general drawing), when a predetermined lottery is executed and the lottery result is the predetermined lottery result, as a fluctuation time of the normal symbol (general drawing), during the time saving state It is possible to select a universal figure variation time (general figure length variation time) longer than the variation time of the first special symbol in (for example, 150 seconds).

In this way, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, by lengthening the variation time of the normal symbol, it is possible to end the substantial time saving state that is advantageous to the player, You can concentrate on playing a game while always being tense.

Furthermore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the third symbol display device 81 is executed in the configuration in which the universal symbol variation time (public symbol length variation time) longer than the variation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state is selected. When the universal figure length variation time is selected as the effect to be performed, the notification of the right-handed game may be turned off and the left-handed game may be guided even if it is in the time saving state. In this case, since the special figure 1 fluctuation of the time saving state is still being executed in practice, until the special figure 1 fluctuation of the time saving state ends, the time saving state is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is advisable to execute an effect informing that the (long-sleeved play mode) has ended. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the special figure 1 fluctuation during the time saving state has ended and the time saving state has ended.

Further, as the variation time of the normal symbol, in addition to the above-mentioned universal figure length variation time (150 seconds), it is shorter than that, but is longer than the ordinary universal figure variation time (3 seconds). 30 seconds or 50 seconds) may be settable. In this case, when the variation time in the universal figure is set, similarly to the case where the universal figure length variation time described above is set, an effect display that makes it seem that the time saving state has ended is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. While making the player think that the time saving state has ended, the timing at which the fluctuation time in the figure ends, or immediately before the fluctuation time in the figure ends (for example, in response to the normal fluctuation time in the figure) It is advisable to display the effect display during the time saving state again 3 seconds before). As a result, it is possible to make the player think that he/she has transitioned to the time-saving state a plurality of times by using one time-saving state, and it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game.

Furthermore, by combining the above-described two universal figure changing configurations, a time saving state end effect that is executed when the set universal figure changing time exceeds the remaining period of the time saving state, and the set universal figure changing time May be configured to be capable of displaying both the time saving state end suggestion effect that is executed when is shorter than the remaining period of the time saving state. With this, even after the time-saving state end effect is executed, it is possible to enthusiastically perform the game while expecting to immediately shift to the time-saving state.

In the above-described first embodiment, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set so that the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 in the normal state (non-time saving state), but by any chance, the normal state Therefore, when a ball enters the second ball inlet 640, a game stopping means for stopping the game may be provided. In this case, as the game stopping means, a means for executing a firing prohibition process in which the ball is not fired even if the operation handle 51 is operated, or a ball fired by operating the operation handle 51 is a game area (of the game board 13). Ball collection processing to collect before reaching the front surface), or firing restriction processing to regulate the firing strength of the operating handle to a firing strength that is disadvantageous to the player (a firing strength that cannot reach the game area) Even if a ball enters each of the entrances provided in the game area, it is conceivable to perform a ball-invalidation process for invalidating all the privileges (a privilege to pay out a prize ball, a privilege to execute a lottery).

As the processing for executing the game stopping means, first, when it is determined that a ball has entered the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the current game state is a time saving state. If it is determined that the state is not a time saving state, then it is determined whether or not the big hit game is currently in progress. Then, when it is determined that the big hit game is not in progress, it may be set to determine that the current incoming ball is an illegal incoming ball and execute the above-described game stop processing by the game stopping means.

Further, in the above-mentioned game stopping means execution processing, when it is determined that a ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 during the jackpot game, the special bonus effect is executed instead of executing the game stopping means. Good to do. In other words, during the big hit game, it is not in a time saving state, but since it is a game state in which a right hitting game is performed, a ball may rarely enter the second ball entrance 640. In this case, the game stopping means is not executed, and instead, a special effect for blessing the player is executed, which makes us realize that the player has had a very rare experience. It is possible to enhance the effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute the above-described exclusive effect, the ordinary symbol variation display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a manner that can be recognized by the player during the jackpot game, and the electric accessory 640a is displayed. You may make it predict the timing (short opening timing) to be released. As a result, the player can digest the jackpot game while gazing at the universal figure variation display displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<Other production example 2 using the configuration of the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 109 to FIG. 111, another effect example 2 using the configuration of the third embodiment will be described. In the present production example, the configuration for setting the variation time of the normal symbol is different from that of the above-described third embodiment, and the variation time of the ordinary symbol is provided in accordance with the gaming state. The setting is made based on the selection table 203aa. Here, with reference to FIG. 109, the contents of the effect executed in the present effect example 2 will be described.

FIG. 109 shows an example of a display screen of the effect executed in the present production example 2, and FIG. 109(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the time saving state is started. 109(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when long fluctuation is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the time saving state. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 109(a), on the display screen of the present production example 2, a picture simulating a bomb is displayed as an end suggestion display mode Dm10 that serves as an opportunity to reduce the short-term remaining period, and the sub-display area Ds is displayed. In the second sub display area Ds2, the characters "Pinch when the bomb explodes" indicating the content of the end suggestion display mode Dm10 are displayed.

And, as the variation time of the normal symbol, when the variation time longer than the remaining period of the short term is set, as shown in FIG. 109(b), the end suggestion display manner Dm10 is displayed in the exploded display manner, In the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, the character "sorry end" is displayed and the remaining time is displayed as "? seconds".

In this way, the actual short-term period (variation time of Toku-zu 1 that started to fluctuate during the short-term period) does not change, but when it is determined that the normal symbol (general diagram) does not end during the short-term period. Since the electric accessory 640a does not perform the opening operation (long opening) which is advantageous to the player during the time saving period, it means that the state advantageous to the player is ended.

In addition, in the present production example 2, the display screen shown in FIG. 109(b) is displayed when the variation time that is longer than the remaining period of the short term is set as the variation time of the normal symbol. However, it is possible to set a variation time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the normal variation time (3 seconds) as the variation time of the normal pattern, and when the variation time is selected, a similar display screen is displayed. Good. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the advantageous period has ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the universal figure variation pattern selection table 202aa used in this production example 2 will be described. FIG. 110A is a schematic diagram in which the contents of the universal figure variation pattern selection table 202aa are defined. As shown in FIG. 110(a), in the universal figure variation pattern selection table 202aa, the normal universal figure variation pattern selection table 202aa1 which is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state, and when the gaming state is the time saving A The time saving A general figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa2 to be referred to and the time saving B additional figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa3 to be referred to when the game state is time saving B are defined, and are different depending on each game state. The fluctuation pattern selection table is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 110(b), the normal-universal-diagram fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa1 is defined such that a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of 4 seconds is always selected. As shown in FIGS. 110(c) and 110(d), 202aa2 and the time-shortening B additional pattern variation pattern selection table 202aa3 are respectively the value of the variation type counter and the normal symbol (general diagram) variation during the time-saving state. The variation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the number of times.

Note that the measuring means for the number of times the normal symbol (general drawing) changes during the time saving state is the same as that in the above-described third embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the normal symbol variation process 4 executed in this production example 2 will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 4. This normal symbol variation process 4 is different from the above-mentioned normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) in that the process (S914, S915) for setting the variation time is changed, and is otherwise the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the normal symbol variation process 4 is executed and it is determined that it is not in a short time in the process of S912 (S912: No), or when the process of S913 is finished, the variation time is set based on the universal pattern variation pattern selection table 202aa. Then, this process ends.

As described above, according to the example production 2 described above, the period in which the player is advantageous during the time saving period (the period in which the electric accessory 640a is long opened) can be varied depending on the set variation time of the normal symbol. Therefore, the player can always be made aware of how long the advantageous period lasts.

In addition, based on the universal symbol prize information command output from the main control device 110, the variation time of the ordinary symbols stored in advance is previously determined, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the determination result. May be set. In this case, for example, if there is no fluctuation in the general figure in the fluctuation time that exceeds the time remaining period, the end suggestion display mode Dm10 may not be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to provide a period in which the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, the effect display mode may be changed according to the presence/absence of the pending storage of special figure 2. In this case, it is preferable to display the end suggestion display mode Dm10 only in the state in which there is no pending storage of special figure 2. As a result, the player can be made to play a game with a sense of crisis, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

<Other examples using the configuration of each embodiment described above>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (per symbol), and when the ball passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) ( For each V winning), an example using a pachinko machine 10 (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which a jackpot game is executed has been described, but the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments is adopted only for the above-mentioned symbol. You may use for the game machine (so-called 1 type). Next, a gaming machine when the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments is used for one type will be described.

The gaming machine used in other examples, the jackpot game is executed when the jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the predetermined condition is satisfied depending on the type of the jackpot won. Until (while the special symbol changes 5 times), the probability of winning the jackpot by the special symbol lottery is set to a higher probability than the normal state. Kind probability variation type), the jackpot win based on the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot win based on the first special symbol (a jackpot game with a large number of rounds, and a jackpot that is likely to be given a probability variation state) The game is configured to be easily given.

Furthermore, when the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state, a variation pattern having a long variation time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol as in each of the above-described embodiments. Make it easier. Then, in a state having both the reserved memory of the first special symbol and the reserved memory of the second special symbol, the variation (lottery) based on the reserved memory of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority. (So-called special figure 2 priority change).

With such a configuration, in a state where the long time fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed, it is possible to perform a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically perform the game during the predetermined period (during the first special symbol variation in the probability variation state). When using such a configuration, by playing a game (for example, a right-handed game) aiming at a predetermined place in the game area, a first ball entering means that triggers the acquisition of the reserved memory of the first special symbol. (First entrance 64) and each second entrance means (second entrance 640) that triggers the retention of the second special symbol. Means may be provided. In addition, it is preferable that the second ball entering means is more difficult to enter the ball than the first ball entering means.

Thus, in the probability variation state, a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the probability variation state continues for a predetermined period (a period until the number of variations of the special symbol ends five times), Without a lottery of the second special symbol being executed (without the ball entering the second ball entering means), a game in which the variation of the first special symbol is executed (adverse game), or the first special A variation pattern having a long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the symbol, and during a predetermined period in which the probability variation state continues (a period until the number of times the variation of the special symbol ends 5 times), the second special symbol lottery is executed. (The ball enters the second ball entering means), any of the game with the variation of the second special symbol is executed (advantageous game) will be executed.

In this way, the variation pattern of the first special symbol set during the probability variation state, the probability variation state advantageous to the player and the disadvantageous probability variation state are executed, the variation of the special symbol executed during the probability variation state You can have the player gaze at you. Also, as in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, even when the small hit is won in the first special symbol, the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol can be continued.

In addition, in the other examples described above, as the one-type probability variation type gaming machine, the probability variation state is configured to end when the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number, but other configurations may be used, For example, a configuration that continues the probability variation state until the next jackpot is won, or each time a change in the special symbol (lottery) is performed, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the probability variation state is terminated, and based on the result of the lottery. You may use the structure which complete|finishes a probability change state.

In addition, in the other examples described above, a configuration in which the fluctuation (lottery) based on the reserved storage of special figure 2 is preferentially executed over the fluctuation (lottery) based on the reserved storage of special figure 2 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is used, the special symbols may be changed (lottery) in the order in which the reserved memory is obtained (the winning order). Further, the number of continuous times (upper limit number) to which the probability variation state is given may be set in advance, and when the maximum number of times is reached, the probability variation state may not be provided after the jackpot is over.

Next, in the above-described first embodiment, during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed during the time saving state, by acquiring the reserved storage of the second special symbol (special figure 2), Although the configuration in which the time saving state is given again after the jackpot game based on the pending storage is used, the upper limit (for example, 5 times) may be set to the number of times the time saving state is continuously given. ..

In this case, the number of jackpots executed until the number of continuous grants in the time saving state reaches the upper limit is varied depending on the number of jackpot rights acquired during one time saving state (the number of reserved storages in Toku-zu 2). be able to. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to obtain a larger number of reserved memories in the special figure 2.

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, the short-time state is always given after the end of the big hit game based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2, but the big hit game based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is configured. The jackpot type to which the time saving state is not given after the end may be selected. As a result, by continuously consuming the reserved memory of the special figure 2, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times the time saving state has been given when the jackpot is continuously executed.

That is, for example, in the state where the special storage of the special figure 2 is four, when the jackpot game based on the special storage has a time saving of four consecutive times, the time saving is achieved when the four storages of the special drawing 2 are exhausted. In the state where the number of times of continuous giving of the state becomes four, the change of the next special symbol is executed, based on the jackpot game based on the holding memory of the special figure 2 based on the holding memory that is finally digested In the case where the big hit has a short time and the other cases have no short time, the number of continuous giving of the short time state becomes one when the four reserved memories of the special figure 2 are exhausted.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not the number of continuous giving of the time saving state has reached the upper limit, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, the maximum jackpot number when the number of continuous giving in the time saving state reaches the upper limit can be changed depending on the type of jackpot of the reserved storage of the obtained special map 2, so that the player is provided with a surprising game. be able to.

As a method of measuring the number of times of continuous application in the time saving state, a method of measuring the number of times the time saving is set for continuous jackpots may be used, or the number of fluctuations of the Toku-zu 1 variation performed during the time saving state may be measured. You can also do When the latter measurement method is used in the above-described first embodiment, when the number of continuous giving of the time saving state reaches the upper limit (5 times) in one continuous long-distance mode, a maximum of 25 jackpots (special When the number of reserved storages in Fig. 2 is the upper limit (4) each time and the fluctuation result of special figure 1 is a big hit each time, the minimum is 5 big hits (the number of reserved storages in special figure 2 is 1 each time, If the variation result of FIG. 1 is missed each time) is provided. In this way, when the upper limit is set to the number of times of continuous provision of the time saving state, the number of jackpots executed during one condominium mode can be changed. You can motivate you to play a game.

Further, in a right-handed state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a time saving state or a probability variation state), an advantageous special symbol that is advantageous to the player among the special symbols (second special symbol) and a disadvantage than the advantageous special symbol The special symbol (first special symbol) and is configured to be variable (lottery), during the right-handed state, the second special symbol is configured to be easier to fulfill the variation execution condition than the first special symbol. In the gaming machine, when it is determined that the second special symbol is changing by the determining device that determines the type of the special symbol that is changed during the right-handed game, the second is displayed on the display device (the third symbol display device 81). 2 Performing a production display that variably displays the identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, and if the discriminating means determines that the first special symbol is fluctuating, it indicates the lottery result of the first special symbol. Rather than the variation display of the identification information for, the third display by emphasizing the guide display (for example, "Hold the special figure 2 reserve") that prompts you to acquire the reserve memory of the second special symbol during the variation period. It may be configured to display on the display device 81.

In this way, in the particular game state, based on the type of special symbol to be executed, by changing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 (particularly, the variable display mode of the special symbol), it is currently set. It is possible to inform the player of an appropriate game method based on the existing game state and the current game content. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, a determining means for determining the variation time of the first special symbol executed during the right-handed game is provided, and by the determining means, the variation time of the first special symbol being executed is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). If it is determined that the above is the case, the guide display described above may be displayed. This allows the player to know the content of the guidance display and corrects the game content of the game being executed. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused because the period in which the guidance display is displayed is shortened.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state, a first opening period of 3 seconds, a closing period of 5 seconds, and a second opening period of 3 seconds for a total of 11 seconds (long opening). ) Is set and the opening scenario corresponding to the set opening pattern ends, or when one ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, the electric winning combination is performed. Although a condition for ending the opening operation of the object 640a (end condition) is established, different opening patterns and ending conditions are set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, and the above-described respective embodiments are set. May constitute gaming machines having different game characteristics.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the electric accessory 640a is opened during the time-saving state (when winning in the normal symbol lottery during the time-saving state), the number of balls entering the second entrance 640 is By limiting the number to one, it is possible to prevent excessive bonuses from being given to the player. However, by using such a configuration, a privilege given to the player when the normal symbol lottery is won in the time saving state (a privilege that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640) Was always constant, and there was a problem that the player's willingness to play decreased.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-described problem, as an opening pattern (long opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a executed during the time saving state, the interval at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a (the ball is distributed by the distribution member 700 The release scenario is set such that the release scenario is used in which the release of 0.2 seconds is repeated 5 times at an interval of 1.2 seconds, which is the distribution interval). In this case, or a configuration in which the ending condition is set when four balls enter the second ball inlet 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a may be used.

With this configuration, when the timing at which the electric accessory 640a is opened in the long opening pattern coincides with the timing at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a, one opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed. In, it is possible to allow up to four balls to enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, the game situation (the timing of launching the ball, the benefit given to the player when the winning is won in the normal symbol lottery during the time saving state (the privilege that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640) It can be made different depending on the timing at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, when the right-handed game is continuously executed for the opening interval of the electric accessory 640a (when the game of launching 100 balls per minute is executed), the ball is placed on the electric accessory 640a. Since it is set to 1.2 seconds as well as the timing at which the player arrives, it is easy for a player who is actively executing a right-handed game to enter a large number of balls into the second entrance 640. can do.

Further, as described using the above-described first embodiment, in the right side region of the game board 13, a distribution member 700 that alternately distributes the game balls and the flow down of the balls distributed by the distribution member 700. The ball is configured to reach the electric accessory 640 through the rectifying means (bending path 701a or the direct passage that does not reduce the flow velocity of the ball) for keeping the interval constant, so that the right-handed game is achieved. It is possible to further improve the accuracy of the interval at which the ball that is fired reaches the electric accessory 640a when the ball is continuously executed.

When such a configuration is used, it may be configured to execute a suggestion notification for suggesting the opening timing of the electric accessory 640a to the player. By executing this suggestion notification, it is possible to allow the player to play the game at a timing at which the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player to determine that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation, but other configurations It is also possible to use, and it is possible to determine whether the player has operated by tilting to the left or right or front and back, and operating means configured in the form of a lever, or when the player has touched or approached It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means capable of discriminating the operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like.

In each of the above-described embodiments, one display means (third symbol display device 81) executes the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player, but other configurations are used. Alternatively, for example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the main symbol displayed on the player and the display means for displaying the sub symbols. Further, the display means may have a configuration other than the liquid crystal display, and a display applying an organic electroluminescence (EL) phenomenon in which a layered structure using a certain organic compound emits light when a voltage is applied. The screen of the device (organic EL display) or various three-dimensional objects (features, etc.) provided on the pachinko machine 10 is used as a screen, and the position of the three-dimensional surface (protrusion, burial relationship) is identified, and then the image is displayed using the projector You may use the display apparatus (project mapping) which irradiates.

When the project mapping described above is used as the display means, the irradiation of the image data is performed based on the data of the three-dimensional surface of the movable accessory provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the position data of the movable accessory at the time of irradiation. By configuring so as to determine the position and the content, it is possible to perform flexible display and enhance the effect of presentation. In addition, it is determined whether the movable state of the movable accessory is normal in consideration of a case where the movable accessory that can be the screen is abnormal, and when it is determined that the determination result is not normal, the movable object is not movable. It is advisable to execute the control at the time of abnormality so that the image data is irradiated with the location as the screen. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player cannot grasp the display content displayed on the display means due to the abnormality of the movable accessory.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game is executed aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 in the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and in the normal game state, the left side area of the game board 13 is executed. Although the left-handed game aiming at is executed, the target area of the game board 13 may be changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, while in the normal state. The right-handed game may be executed. Further, it may be configured such that games in different game states can be executed while aiming at the same area.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot multiple times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time title, a three-time title, and May be implemented as). Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and by operating the stop button, the symbol is stopped and confirmed. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information is provided, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying a symbol after variable display of a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a ball launching handle is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Probably changed in the special 1 fluctuation period in the configuration of 1 type 2 types)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on establishment of a first acquisition condition, first determination means for performing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. When stopped and displayed, the first privilege granting means for granting the first benefit to the player, the second acquiring means for acquiring the second information based on the establishment of the second acquiring condition, and the second acquiring means. A storage unit that stores the acquired second information, and a second determination that executes a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the second information stored in the storage unit 2 determination means, a first state for restricting the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second state for setting the second acquisition condition more easily than the first state can be switched and set. A gaming machine having a state setting means, and a priority means for causing the second determination corresponding to the second information stored in the storage means to be executed with priority over the first determination. The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the first state is switched to the second state, the first determination is executed before the second determination is executed. A1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of the starting opening provided in the gaming board is changed from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. There is one that executes the first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional game machine, a lottery is executed a predetermined number of times by entering a game ball into the starting opening in a state that is easily changed to the second state, and until the result of the predetermined number of times is displayed. A gaming machine for continuously setting has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the probability that the determination that the lottery is advantageous to the player is executed in a state where the lottery is executed a predetermined number of times is constant, and the game becomes monotonous and There was a problem of getting tired of it.

According to the gaming machine A1, the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed even in the special state where the second acquisition condition is easily established, and the second determination is performed during the dynamic display period. Since the execution is restricted, at the start of the special state, the first determination, which is more disadvantageous than the second determination for the player, is executed, and then the second determination, which is advantageous for the player, is performed. Since the second determination is executed by the priority means having priority over the first determination with respect to the second information stored in the storage means, the second determination that is advantageous to the player continues. By switching to a period during which the game is easily executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player and suppress an inconvenience that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine A1, the first ball entering means that triggers the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition when the game ball enters the ball, and the second ball acquisition condition that satisfies the second acquisition condition when the game ball enters the game ball. The second ball entering means, a variable member that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball, and the game ball passes through a predetermined passage area. The detection means capable of detecting whether or not, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the detection of the game ball in the detection means, and the lottery information for dynamically indicating the lottery result by the lottery means are dynamically displayed. When the lottery information dynamic display means and the lottery information for indicating the specific lottery result are stopped and displayed, the variable member is brought to the closed state or the open state in a variable pattern set by a predetermined rule. A variable control means for varying the lottery means, and the lottery means is configured to be able to execute the lottery even during a period in which the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine A2 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, a special state is set and even during a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, a lottery can be performed by passing the gaming ball to the passage area. Since the second acquisition condition can be satisfied by executing the game ball into the second ball entering means, it is possible to achieve the second passing condition even during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to let the player play the game as if to pass the game ball.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a state in which a game ball can be entered, a variable winning means in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and a specific area through which the game ball entered in the variable winning means can pass. , A special game execution means for executing a special game that is advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the second judgment means determines that the result is a specific second judgment result. Based on the above, the variable game executing means for changing the variable ball entering means from the difficult ball entering state to the ball enterable state is provided, and the gaming machine A3.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the second determination is executed, whereby the game can be shifted to a game in which the game ball is allowed to pass through to the specific area. There is an effect that a game with a change can be provided.

In any one of the gaming machines A2 and A3, the variable pattern changed by the variable control means is set to be variable corresponding to a period in which the special state is set. Gaming machine A4.

According to the gaming machine A4, since the variable pattern is changed corresponding to the set period of the special state, there is an effect that the variable pattern can be executed according to the period in which the special state is set.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, first storage means for storing the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and the first identification dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A first dynamic display period setting means for determining a dynamic display period of information, wherein the first dynamic display period setting means sets the second state by the state setting means. As the dynamic display period of the first identification information, at least a first dynamic display period shorter than a dynamic display period in which the lottery information is dynamically displayed by the lottery information dynamic display means and the lottery information are A gaming machine A5, wherein a second dynamic display period that is longer than the dynamic display period that is dynamically displayed can be set.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the length of the dynamic display period set by the first dynamic display period setting means causes the second state to be the second entry. It is possible to set an advantageous state in which the game ball can easily enter the ball means and a disadvantageous state in which the game ball can hardly enter the second ball means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game so that the second state becomes the advantageous state.

The gaming machine A5 has display means capable of displaying predetermined information, and display control means for displaying on the display means the state information for indicating the state of the game set by the state setting means. The control means does not display the state information for indicating the second state when the second dynamic display period is set by the first dynamic display period setting means. Playing machine A6.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the gaming ball is entered into the second ball entering means as the dynamic display period of the first identification information, although the second state is set. When the difficult second dynamic display period is set, the state information for indicating the second state is not displayed, so that the information displayed on the display means impairs the expectation of the player. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6 has a game regulation means capable of regulating the game of the player based on the fact that the second acquisition condition is satisfied in the state where the first state is set. A gaming machine A7 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the player's player is based on the fact that the second acquisition condition is satisfied in the first state where the satisfaction of the second acquisition condition is restricted. Since it becomes possible to regulate the game, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the illegal establishment of the second acquisition condition.

In the gaming machine A7, the gaming restricting means restricts the launch of a game ball, wherein the gaming machine A8 is provided.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, the game regulation means regulates the emission of the game ball, so that there is an effect that fraud can be effectively suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the first ball entering means allows the first flow path in which the game ball does not easily enter the second ball entering means, and the game ball can enter the second ball entering means. The first ball entering means, which is respectively arranged in the second flow path and is arranged in the second flow path, allows a game ball to enter a ball entrance provided in the second flow path, thereby playing a game. The ball is in a state in which it can enter, and the game ball enters the first ball entering means arranged in the second flow path, thereby making it difficult for the game ball to enter. A game machine A9.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A8, by entering the game ball into the ball entrance, the second state is set and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Even when the game ball is flowed down to the second flow path to cause the ball to enter, the game ball enters the first ball entry port, so that the game ball easily enters the first ball entry means. There is an effect that the judgment can be easily executed and can be configured.

In the gaming machine A9, a holding means capable of holding the game ball at a position where the game ball can enter the ball entrance, and a holding release means for releasing the holding by the holding means based on the establishment of a release condition. And a gaming machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A9, there is an effect that the timing of causing the game ball to enter the first ball entering means can be controlled depending on the release condition.

In the gaming machine A10, the cancellation condition is canceled based on the first privilege being granted by the first privilege granting means.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A10, the cancellation condition is satisfied at the timing when the first privilege is granted, so that the first acquisition condition is easily satisfied after the first privilege is granted. The effect is that you can.

<Characteristic B group> (Regular 1 special prize regulation under normal conditions)
A first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, a second flow path through which the game ball that flows down through the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and a game ball that flows down through the first flow path is placed at a position where it can enter. The first ball entering means and the second ball entering means which is disposed in the second flow path and into which the game ball can enter, and the game ball enters the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. Obtaining means capable of obtaining information based on the sphere, a determining means for making a determination based on the information obtained by the obtaining means, and identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means are dynamic. A game machine having a dynamic display means to be displayed and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. By setting a special state that is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the game ball is flown down to the second flow path to execute the game, the game ball is flowed down to the first flow path to execute the game. In a state in which the game ball is flown down to the second flow path in a state where the special state is not set by the state setting means and the state setting means, the first entry A gaming machine B1 characterized by having a regulating means for making it difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means rather than a ball means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of the starting opening provided in the gaming board is changed from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. There is one that executes the first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional game machine, a lottery is executed a predetermined number of times by entering a game ball into the starting opening in a state that is easily changed to the second state, and until the result of the predetermined number of times is displayed. A gaming machine for continuously setting has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the probability that the determination that the lottery is advantageous to the player is executed in a state where the lottery is executed a predetermined number of times is constant, and the game becomes monotonous and There was a problem of getting tired of it. In addition, in order to have a change in the game, if the game ball is configured to be played by changing the flow-down route of the game ball, it is illegal for the player to profit by allowing the game ball to flow down a route different from the assumed flow-down route. There was a problem that was given.

According to the gaming machine B1, when the special state is set, the game can be changed by flowing down the second flow path so that the game can be changed, while the special state is set. If not, the game ball is regulated so that it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means than the first ball entering means, so when the special state ends, the first flow path is made to flow down to play the game. There is an effect that defects such as fraud can be suppressed by inevitably directing the player to perform the game.

In the gaming machine B1, in the second flow path, at least a third flow path through which a game ball can flow down and a fourth flow path through which a game ball flowing down the third flow path is difficult to flow down are formed. In addition, the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path has a distribution means that can distribute the game ball to the third flow path and the fourth flow path, respectively, and the second ball entering the fourth flow path. A gaming machine B2, characterized in that the means are arranged.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, among the gaming balls that flow down to the second flow path, the gaming balls distributed to the third flow path can enter the second ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of game balls that can enter the second ball entering means can be reduced more than that of the first ball entering means.

In the gaming machine B2, the third flow path is provided with a third ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, and based on the fact that the game ball enters the third ball entering means, Information is acquired by the acquisition means, and an advantage determination means for performing an advantage determination that is more advantageous to the player than the determination based on the information obtained by the game ball entering the third ball entering means. , The special state is set, and the variable control means for changing the state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the third ball entering means to the state in which the game ball is easy to enter is included. A gaming machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, it becomes easy to enter the third ball entering means in the special state, so that the player can cause the game ball to flow down to the second flow path. There is an effect that the player can be encouraged to play a game.

In the game machine B2 or B3, the distribution means distributes the game balls to the third flow path and the fourth flow path alternately.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, by alternately allocating, it is possible to cause half of the gaming balls that have flowed down to the second flow path to flow down effectively, and the second ball entry means is effective. This has the effect of reducing the number of game balls that enter.

In the gaming machines B1 to B4, a holding means capable of holding the game ball flowing down the first flow path or the second flow path and a state in which the game ball held by the holding means flows down to the downstream side are switched. Switching means, an opening into which the game ball that has flowed down due to being switched to the flow-down state by the switching means can enter, and the game ball enters the opening, the second entrance ball A gaming machine B5, characterized in that the gaming machine B5 has a variable means for bringing the gaming ball into a ball-enterable state.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the holding means and the switching means restrict the entry of the gaming ball into the second entry means, so that the timing is not intended. There is an effect that the problem that the game ball enters the second ball entering means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B5, the switching means switches to a state in which the gaming ball can be held after a lapse of a predetermined period after switching to the flow-down state.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, it is possible to define the period during which the gaming ball can enter the second ball entering means, so that the game ball enters the second ball entering means. There is an effect that can be regulated more.

In the gaming machine B5 or B6, the second ball-in means is variable by the variable means into a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter on the basis of the fact that the game ball has entered. A gaming machine B7.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5 or B6, the gaming ball enters the second ball entering means even during the period in which the switching means is switched to the sulfurizing state. In this case, since the game ball can be changed to a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from entering the second ball means in succession. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player.

In any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the game ball held by the holding means is provided in an area where the game ball can flow down, and the flown down game ball can be guided to a first flow path, and the first position. Variable guide means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to guide the flow path, and variable guide means that variably controls the variable guide means to the first position and the second position at predetermined intervals. A gaming machine B8 having means, and the opening is arranged in a region into which a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the timing at which the gaming ball held by the holding means by the switching means can flow down, and the variable guiding means is in the first position. It is possible to enter the game ball into the opening only when the timing varied to a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the player is motivated to play the game while being aware of the game timing. The effect is that it can be done.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, when the special state is set by the state setting means, the identification information is dynamically displayed so that the remaining period of the special state is shortened. A gaming machine B9 having variable means for performing.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the remaining period of the special state is shortened by dynamically displaying the identification information, so that the player dynamically displays the identification information. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player interested in the period and improve the interest of the game. The longer the dynamic display period is executed, the longer the special state that is advantageous to the player becomes, so that the player can expect the long dynamic display period.

<Characteristic C group> (Control for continuing one game)
A first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, a second flow path through which the game ball that flows down through the first flow path becomes difficult to flow down, and a position where the game ball that flows down through the first flow path can enter. A first ball entering means arranged, a second ball entering means arranged in the second flow path, into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball in the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. The acquisition means that can acquire information based on the fact that the player has entered the ball, the judgment means that executes the judgment based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the identification information that indicates the judgment result by the judgment means are dynamic. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display means to be displayed and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed, 2 The variable means for changing the first state in which the game ball can enter the ball entering means and the second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the variable means from the second state to the above Variable execution means for changing to the first state based on the satisfaction of the variable condition, and based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, the game ball is flowed down from the first flow path to the second flow path to execute the game. Special state setting means for setting a special state for facilitating execution of a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and the identification information is dynamically displayed after the privilege game is executed, and a dynamic display period thereof And a variable condition determination means for determining whether the variable condition is satisfied when the privilege game is executed, A gaming machine C1 to play.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a lottery by entering a game ball into a starting opening provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed and a winning probability is increased depending on the type of the winning game so that the lottery probability after the winning game is increased to facilitate continuous execution of the winning game. (For example, JP 2012-147965A).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is difficult for the player to play the game after confirming whether or not the lottery is actually drawn in a high probability state, and there is a problem that the interest is likely to be lowered.

According to the gaming machine C1, when the privilege game is executed, it is determined whether or not a variable condition for deciding whether to change the variable means to the first state is satisfied. Therefore, when the privilege game is executed, By changing the variable means to the first state, the identification information can be easily dynamically displayed, and the special state can be easily released. If the variable means is not changed, the identification information can be hard to be dynamically displayed. The special state can be easily set continuously, and there is an effect that the interest can be improved depending on whether or not the variable condition is satisfied when the privilege game is executed.

The gaming machine C1 has a type determining means for determining the type of the privilege game when the privilege game is executed, and the variable condition determining means sets the type of the privilege game determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine C2, which determines whether the variable condition is satisfied based on the above.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, it is determined whether or not the variable condition is satisfied based on the type of the privilege game to be executed. Therefore, the variable condition is satisfied depending on the rate at which the type of the privilege game is determined. There is an effect that a ratio can be set and stable game contents can be set.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the privilege granting means executes the privilege game as one of the benefits, and the type determining means determines the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege granting means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the special state is set based on the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege granting means.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the ratio at which the special state is set can be changed by designing the type of privilege game, and the design can be easily adjusted to design. There is an effect that can be.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a third ball entering means capable of entering a game ball is arranged in the second flow path, and the acquiring means is a game ball in the third ball entering means. Is to acquire the information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entering means, the determination means acquires the information based on the information acquired by the game ball entering the third ball entering means. It is to perform an advantage determination that is advantageous to the player, and has a regulation means that can be changed between a state in which the game ball is prevented from entering the third ball entering means and a state in which the game ball is allowed to enter. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the restriction means is configured to be easily changed to a state in which the entry is allowed by setting the special state.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming ball is easily entered into the third ball entering means for executing the advantage determination that is advantageous to the player in the special state. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to encourage the game ball to flow down to the second flow path to perform the game.

In the gaming machine C4, a variable ball entering means capable of changing between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball does not enter, and a specific area through which the game ball entered in the variable ball entering means can pass. And a privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game when a game ball passes through the specific area, and when the advantageous result is determined to be a specific result, the variable ball entering means is changed from the closed state. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being changed to an open state.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the bonus game is executed by passing the game ball through a specific area, so that the player can be interested in the ball flow. There is an effect that the interest of can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, a first storage means capable of storing the information obtained based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means, and the first storage means stores the information. And a determination condition determination means for determining the information for which the determination means executes the determination based on the information, and the type determination means stores at least the information in the storage means during the privilege game. To determine a first type corresponding to a first privilege game that is easy to store, and a second type corresponding to a second privilege game that is harder to store the information in the storage means than the first type. Characteristic game machine C6.

According to the gaming machine C6, it is possible to execute a privilege game in which information is easily stored in the first storage device and a privilege game in which information is difficult to store during the privilege game, depending on the type determined by the type determination device. Thus, when a special state is given after the bonus game is finished, it is possible to set a state in which the identification information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means is dynamically displayed and a state in which the identification information is not displayed. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to dynamically display the identification information based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means during the special state, and it is possible to diversify the game executed during the special state.

In the gaming machine C6, the special state setting means is a first special state in which identification information based on a game ball entering the first ball entering means is dynamically displayed during the special state, and the first special state. The second special state in which the identification information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the 2 ball entering means is dynamically displayed is set, and the second special state is a game rather than the first special state. A gaming machine C7 characterized in that a privilege game that is advantageous to a player is easily executed.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C6, the degree of advantage provided to the player can be varied depending on the type of identification information dynamically displayed during the special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game.

<Characteristic D group> (Direction of end of continuous Chang mode)
A first determination based on a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. And a determination means for performing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entry means, and a determination result by the determination means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating, and variable from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entering means to the second state in which the game ball can be entered Changing means, a state setting means capable of setting a special state capable of changing the second ball entering means to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied, and the special state by the state setting means. When the state is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, a releasing unit that releases the special state, and the special state is set. In this case, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and a performance executing means for performing a performance based on the information determined to satisfy the specific condition based on the remaining dynamic display period is provided. Characteristic game machine D1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a lottery by entering a game ball into a starting opening provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed and a winning probability is increased depending on the type of the winning game so that the lottery probability after the winning game is increased to facilitate continuous execution of the winning game. In such a gaming machine, after the symbols for notifying the player of the lottery result are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result If it is a hit, it is known that a hit game is executed (for example, JP 2012-147965A).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets tired early because the variable display of the symbols based on the lottery result is repeated.

According to the gaming machine D1, the remaining period of the special state is changed according to the lapse of the dynamic display period of the identification information executed when the special state is set, so that it is specified by the effect executed by the effect executing means. There is an effect that it is possible to recognize the establishment of the condition and the remaining period of the special state, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early.

In the gaming machine D1, there is a detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passage area, and a determination means for determining whether or not the specific condition is met when the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means. The game effecting device D2 is characterized in that the effect executing means executes an effect for indicating a result of the determination based on the determination being performed by the determining means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, even when the identification information is displayed in the special state, the determination of the satisfaction of the specific condition is executed by passing the gaming ball through the passage area. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the effect executing means executes a specific effect based on that the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information has become equal to or less than a predetermined period, the gaming machine D3. ..

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, it is possible to determine that the remaining period of the special state is equal to or less than the predetermined period by executing the specific effect. ..

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the second judgment is executed by the judgment means out of the information acquired by the acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means. Storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of the information before being stored, the effect performing means stores the information in the storage means when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information is equal to or less than the predetermined period. A gaming machine D4, characterized in that the specific effect is not executed on condition that it is stored.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, even if the special state ends because the information is stored in the storage means, it is based on the information stored in the storage means. Since it is in such a state that it is easy to make an advantageous judgment, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress unnecessary anxiety to the player by executing the specific effect.

In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the result information for indicating the determination result by the determination means for a predetermined period and then stopping the display, and the second dynamic display means. And a period determination means for determining a remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the time when the result information is stopped and displayed by the effect execution means, the determination result of the period determination means is a predetermined period condition. The game machine D5 is characterized by switching the stop display mode of the result information to a stop display mode based on the determination result of the identification information when the above condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the stop display mode can be switched when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information satisfies the period condition. It is possible to provide a person with an unexpected effect and enhance the effect of the effect.

In the gaming machine D5, the period condition is satisfied when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the time when the result information is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display means is within a predetermined period. A gaming machine D6 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D5, it is possible to suppress the problem that the result information and the identification information are stopped and displayed at short intervals, which makes it difficult for the player to grasp the display content. There is an effect that a game that can be easily understood by a player can be provided.

<Characteristic E group> (Change the universal figure fluctuation period in a time-saving state)
A first determination based on a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. And a determination means for performing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entry means, and a determination result by the determination means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating, and easier entry of the game ball from the first state where the game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entry means than in the first state. Changing means for changing to the second state, state setting means for setting a special state that can be changed to the second state by the changing means when a specific condition is satisfied, and state setting thereof When the special state is set by the means, dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, the canceling means for canceling the special state, and the changing means. A lottery means for performing a lottery for deciding whether to change from the first state to the second state, and lottery information dynamic display in which lottery information for dynamically showing lottery results by the lottery means is displayed. Means, a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period during which the lottery information is dynamically displayed, and a dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. Based on the storage means in which a plurality of display period groups are stored, the selection means for selecting the type of the special state set by the state setting means, and the type of the special state set by the state setting means A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the dynamic display period determining means has a dynamic display period group setting means for setting the dynamic display period group for determining the dynamic display period.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a lottery by entering a game ball into a starting opening provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed and a winning probability is increased depending on the type of the winning game so that the lottery probability after the winning game is increased to facilitate continuous execution of the winning game. In such a gaming machine, after the symbols for notifying the player of the lottery result are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result If it is a hit, it is known that a hit game is executed (for example, JP 2012-147965A).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets tired early because the variable display of the symbols based on the lottery result is repeated.

According to the gaming machine E1, the lottery information can be drawn in the special state period if the dynamic display period of the lottery information is determined to be short, and the interest of the game can be improved by the determined dynamic display period group. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

In the gaming machine E1, an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entrance unit or the second ball entrance unit, and the information acquired by the acquisition unit are stored. And a storage unit that performs the first determination or the second determination based on the information stored in the storage unit.

According to the gaming machine E2, the information obtained by the obtaining means can be stored in the storage means in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, so that the player can continue the operation regardless of the determination status of the determining means. Thus, the game can be played and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the determination means determines whether to perform the first determination or the second determination even when the information is stored in the storage during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. An amusement machine E3, characterized in that it stands by for execution.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, execution of the determination based on the information stored in the storage means is awaited while the identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the memory is stored. A plurality of judgments based on the information stored in the means are not executed at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, it has a detection means capable of detecting that the game ball has passed a passage area through which the game ball can pass, and the lottery means detects the passage of the game ball by the detection means. The gaming machine E4, which executes the lottery based on the fact that the game is performed.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the passage area, the lottery means executes the lottery, so that the game is played. There is an effect that a player can enthusiastically play a game using the game ball.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the dynamic display period group set by the dynamic display period group setting means is a short dynamic period in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as a dynamic display period. A gaming machine characterized in that at least a display period group and a long dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period shorter than the short dynamic display period group is hard to be determined are set. E5.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the length of the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period group set by the dynamic display period group setting means is set. It can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of times of lottery executed by the lottery means can be varied during the special state that is advantageous to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E2 to E5, the dynamic display period determination means is based on the number of the information acquired based on the fact that the player has entered the second entry means stored in the storage means. 2. A gaming machine E6, wherein one dynamic display period is determined from the determined dynamic display period group.

According to the gaming machine E6, the dynamic display period is determined based on the number of pieces of information obtained based on the fact that the player has entered the second ball-entering means, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E2 to E5. Therefore, it is possible to associate the game in which the game ball is inserted into the second ball entering means with the number of times of lottery executed by the lottery means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machines E1 to E6, there is a notifying means for notifying that the special state is set, and the notifying means dynamically displays the lottery information determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The gaming machine E7, wherein the notification is made only when the period is shorter than the remaining period of the special state set by the state setting means.

According to the gaming machine E7, the informing means informs that the current state is the special state only when the dynamic display of the lottery information ends in the state where the special state is set. Therefore, even if it is in the special state, by notifying the player of the special state during the remaining period of the special state in which the changing means is not changed from the first state to the second state, the player is distrusted. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a feeling.

<Characteristic F group> (Special per 1 time performance during time saving)
A first determination based on a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. And a determination means for performing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entry means, and a determination result by the determination means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed In the gaming machine having the privilege game executing means, the changing means for changing from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entering means to the second state in which the game ball can be entered. And a lottery means for executing lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the specific lottery result. When the lottery information indicating that is displayed in a stopped state, a special state that can be changed to the second state by the changing means, and a state setting means that can set the special state When the state is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the releasing means for releasing the special state based on the end of the dynamic display period, and the special state is not set In this case, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is executed on the basis of the special state being set, and an effect executing means. And the production execution means specifies from a state in which the production corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is executed to a production corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information when the special state is set. A gaming machine F1 which is switched and executed based on the condition being satisfied.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a lottery by entering a game ball into a starting opening provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed and a winning probability is increased depending on the type of the winning game so that the lottery probability after the winning game is increased to facilitate continuous execution of the winning game. In such a gaming machine, after the symbols for notifying the player of the lottery result are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result If it is a hit, it is known that a hit game is executed (for example, JP 2012-147965A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets tired early because the variable display of the symbols based on the lottery result is repeated.

According to the gaming machine F1, since it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means in the special state, it is easy for the player to enter the second ball entering means. Since it is possible to switch to the effect corresponding to whether or not it becomes possible to provide the player with an effect corresponding to different information in the special state and the state other than the special state, it is possible to change the game and the player can quickly This has the effect of suppressing the problem of getting tired of.

In the gaming machine F1, the information acquisition means for acquiring the information determined by the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance means or the second ball entrance means, and the information acquisition means. A gaming machine F2, comprising: a storage unit that stores the acquired information.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, even when a large number of gaming balls enter the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, the information acquired by the memory means is obtained. Since this is stored, it is possible to give the player more chances to be judged.

In the gaming machine F2, the determination means is based on the information obtained based on the fact that the determination condition is satisfied and the fact that the player has entered the second entrance means stored in the storage means. A gaming machine F3, characterized in that the determination is executed with priority over the information acquired based on the fact that the player has entered the first entering means.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, when there are a plurality of pieces of information acquired based on the fact that the player has entered the second ball entering means, the plurality of pieces of information can be continuously determined. You can Therefore, it is possible to continuously perform the determination that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, when the special condition is set in the specific condition, the remaining period of the dynamic display period of the identification information for which dynamic display is started is equal to or less than a predetermined period. A gaming machine F4, characterized in that the fact that it has become a condition is set in at least one of the conditions.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, a production corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information executed when the special state is released before the special state is released. There is an effect that the effect can be switched to when it is smoothly released.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, in the specific condition, the identification information for which the dynamic display is started when the special state is set is stopped and displayed as the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. A gaming machine F5, characterized in that it is set as at least one of the conditions.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with the identification information indicating that it is a specific determination result, At first, the production corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is performed, and the player is informed of whether or not the game ball can easily enter the second ball entering means, and then the specific determination result. Since it can be notified by means of the effect, it is possible to provide the player with an effect in which the dynamic display period of the identification information is effectively used.

<Feature G group> (Game support)
In the ball entry means having an opening into which the game ball can enter, the open state in which the game ball can enter the opening of the ball entry means, and the closed state in which the entry of the game ball is restricted. A variable member that is variable, a determination unit that performs determination based on passage of a game ball, and when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result, the variable member is changed from the closed state to the open state. And variable control means for changing the variable pattern in a specific variable pattern, wherein the variable pattern is brought into the open state through a first open pattern which is in the open state, and then a closed pattern which is in a closed state for a predetermined period. A gaming machine G1 characterized by being configured at least with a second opening pattern.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a passage area through which a game ball can pass, and when the game ball passes through the passage area, a predetermined first lottery is executed and the lottery result is a win. In this case, there has been proposed one in which the variable member is changed so that the ball can easily enter a specific entrance. In such a gaming machine, when a ball enters a specific entrance, a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery is executed, and a symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. It is known that the winning game is executed if the lottery result is notified by displaying the lottery result in a stopped state with a symbol indicating the lottery result, and the winning game is hit (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the variable display of the symbols based on the second lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, there is a problem that the player may overlook the result of the first lottery. It was

According to the gaming machine G1, since the first opening pattern and the second opening pattern are configured, the player who notices that the variable member is variably controlled by executing the first opening pattern On the other hand, the game ball can be inserted into the ball entering means during the second opening pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported to the player who does not understand the game content.

In the gaming machine G1, a closing discriminating means for discriminating that the closing pattern has been executed among the variable patterns, and a predetermined first when discriminating that the closing pattern has been executed by the closing discriminating means. A gaming machine G2, comprising: a notification executing means for executing notification.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the first notification is executed by the notification executing means based on the completion of the execution of the first opening pattern and the execution of the closing pattern. The player can easily recognize that the variable control of the variable member is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported to the player who does not understand the game content.

The gaming machine G2 has a game area in which the variable member is provided and an operating means for shooting a game ball in the game area, and the period set as the closing pattern in the variable pattern is: A gaming machine G3, characterized in that the ball shot by the operating means is set to be longer than a period until it reaches the variable member.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the period set as the closing pattern is set longer than the period until the ball fired by the operating means reaches the variable member. Even if the player who recognizes that the variable control of the variable member is being executed by the first notification by the notification executing means starts the operation of the operating means, the ball entering means is executed while the second opening pattern is being executed. It is possible to enter a ball into. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported to the player who does not understand the game content.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the variable control means has an end condition determining means for determining that an end condition for ending the operation of changing the variable member is satisfied, and the end condition determining means is configured in advance. A gaming machine G4, which determines that the ending condition is satisfied when the predetermined variable pattern is executed or when a predetermined number of balls enter the ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the ending condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of balls enter the ball entering means, and thus the predetermined number of balls in the first opening pattern. By causing the ball to enter the ball entering means, it becomes possible to end the variable control of the variable member by the variable control means without executing the closing pattern. As a result, one variable control period can be shortened, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game. In addition, even if the closing pattern is set for a long period of time, by allowing the ending condition of the variable control to be satisfied during the period in which the first variable pattern is being executed, it is possible for the player who is executing a normal game to Therefore, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction caused by the execution of the closing pattern for a long period of time.

In the gaming machine G4, of the variable patterns, the period set as the first opening pattern is set longer than the period until the predetermined number of balls shot by the operating means reach the variable member. A gaming machine G5 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G4, it is possible to enter a predetermined number of balls into the ball entering means during the period in which the first opening pattern is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who is playing a normal game can be prevented from feeling dissatisfied due to a closed pattern being executed for a long period of time.

In the gaming machines G1 to G5, the notification executing means gives a predetermined second notification when a ball enters the ball entering means while the second opening pattern of the variable patterns is being executed. A gaming machine G6 characterized by executing the following.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the second notification is executed when the ball enters the ball entering means while the second opening pattern is being executed. Therefore, the player can correct the operation method of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported to the player who does not understand the game content.

In the gaming machines G1 to G6, in the variable pattern, a period set as the first opening pattern is shorter than a period set as the second opening pattern.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entering means during the period in which the variable pattern is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be supported to the player who does not understand the game content.

<Characteristic H group> (Direction just before the end of the time-saving game)
A first determination based on a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. And a determination means for performing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entry means, and a determination result by the determination means. The dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating, and the bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means, lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition and lottery information for dynamically displaying lottery information for showing a lottery result by the lottery information Dynamic It is a display means, a variable member that is changed from a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entering means to a second state in which a game ball can be entered, and the specific lottery result. State setting means capable of setting a special state that allows the variable member to be changed to the second state when the lottery information indicating that the special display is stopped is displayed, and the special state is set by the state setting means. When the state is set, the identification information is dynamically displayed a predetermined number of times, and the special state is released based on the predetermined number of times of the dynamic display period ending, and the special means. When the dynamic display of the lottery information is started during the state, the performance of executing the production is based on the information that the timing at which the lottery information is stopped and displayed corresponds to the period in which the special state is set. And a gaming machine H1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a lottery by entering a game ball into a starting opening provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed and a winning probability is increased depending on the type of the winning game so that the lottery probability after the winning game is increased to facilitate continuous execution of the winning game. In such a gaming machine, after the symbols for notifying the player of the lottery result are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result If it is a hit, it is known that a hit game is executed (for example, JP 2012-147965A).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets tired early because the variable display of the symbols based on the lottery result is repeated.

According to the gaming machine H1, since the effect is executed based on the state set to the stop display timing of the lottery information that is dynamically displayed during the special state, when the lottery information is stopped and displayed from the effect. It is possible to recognize the timing of, the player can be interested in the state when the lottery information is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine H1, the effect executing means executes an effect corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information in a state where the special state is not set, and the effect is generated based on the setting of the special state. A gaming machine H2, characterized in that the gaming machine H2 is executed by switching to an effect corresponding to a dynamic display period of lottery information.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the corresponding dynamic display period is switched between the special state and the state other than the special state, so that the performance is executed. There is an effect that the interest of can be improved.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, an acquisition unit that can acquire information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entrance unit or the second ball entrance unit, and the information acquired by the acquisition unit are And a storage means to be stored, wherein the determination means, based on that a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, of the information stored in the storage means, the game ball to the second ball entering means. A gaming machine H3, characterized in that the determination is performed with priority on the information acquired based on the fact that the player has entered the game.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, when there are a plurality of pieces of information acquired based on the fact that the player has entered the second entering means, the plurality of pieces of information are consecutively determined. can do. Therefore, it is possible to continuously perform the determination that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

In the gaming machine H3, in the determination condition, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed with the identification information for indicating the specific determination result, and the undetermined information is stored in the storage means. The gaming machine H4 is characterized by being set at least as a condition.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, it is difficult to meet the determination condition during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, so the memory is stored during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that the player can be given an opportunity to store information in the means and the game can be played efficiently.

In the gaming machine H4, when the special state is set, a regulation unit that regulates that the storage unit stores the information acquired based on the fact that the player has entered the second entry unit. A gaming machine H5 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H4, it is regulated that information acquired based on the fact that the player has entered the second ball entering means is stored when a special state is set. Therefore, at the timing when the special state is set, the identification information for indicating the determination result based on the information obtained by entering the first entering means can be easily displayed dynamically, which is advantageous for the player. There is an effect that it is possible to delay the execution of such a determination and increase the interest of the player.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, if the special state is set for the variable member during the period when the lottery is performed by the lottery means, the lottery information indicating the particular lottery result is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine H6, wherein the gaming machine H6 is changed to the second state when played.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, it can be changed to the second state based on the setting status of the special state in the lottery period, which is advantageous for the player. There is an effect that it is possible to easily provide such a state and to increase the interest of the player.

<Feature group I> (Yamato specifications)
A first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. An information acquisition means for acquiring information based on that, and a first determination is executed based on the information acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means by the information acquisition means, Judgment means for executing a second judgment that is more advantageous to the player than the first judgment based on the information acquired based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entrance means, and the judgment means. The dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by, and the privilege granting for granting the privilege when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. In a gaming machine having means, a normal state in which a game ball is easier to enter the first ball entering means than the second ball entering means, and the second ball entering is more than the first ball entering means. And a state setting means capable of setting at least a special state in which a game ball easily enters the means, and when the special state is set by the state setting means, the special state is set. As the release condition for releasing the state, it is possible to individually set the number of times of dynamically displaying the identification information corresponding to the first determination and the number of times of dynamically displaying the identification information corresponding to the second determination. A gaming machine I1 characterized by being configured as follows.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a lottery by entering a game ball into a starting opening provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed and a winning probability is increased depending on the type of the winning game so that the lottery probability after the winning game is increased to facilitate continuous execution of the winning game. In such a gaming machine, after the symbols for notifying the player of the lottery result are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result If it is a hit, it is known that a hit game is executed (for example, JP 2012-147965A).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets tired early because the variable display of the symbols based on the lottery result is repeated.

According to the gaming machine I1, the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first determination and the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the second determination can be set as the conditions for releasing the special state. , The expectation that the second determination will be executed can be changed and set. That is, if the number of times of dynamically displaying the identification information corresponding to the first determination is set to be large, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to execute the second determination, and conversely, the identification information corresponding to the first determination. If the number of times of dynamic display of is set to be large, it is possible to set the number of occasions in which the second determination is executed to be small, and it is possible to change the interest of the player.

The gaming machine I1 has a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means has entered the second ball entering means out of the information stored in the storage means. Based on the above, the gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the information acquired by the information acquiring means is preferentially determined.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1, the determination is preferentially executed for the information for which the determination that is advantageous to the player is executed, so that the determination that is advantageous to the player is continuously executed. There is an effect that it can be easily played and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the special state is set, a restricting unit that makes it difficult to store the information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entering unit in the storage unit. A gaming machine I3 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the identification information based on the first determination can be easily displayed dynamically in the special state, and the second entry is made during the dynamic display period. There is an effect that a game ball is inserted into the ball means to store more information, and advantageous judgment can be easily executed continuously after the dynamic display of the first judgment is completed.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the cancellation condition is configured such that the number of times of dynamically displaying the identification information corresponding to the first determination is larger than the number of times of dynamically displaying the identification information corresponding to the second determination. A gaming machine I4 characterized in that it has been played.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, it is possible to prevent the special state from being canceled by executing only the first determination, which is disadvantageous to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to easily execute the second determination that is advantageous to the player during the state.

In the gaming machine I4, the cancellation condition is set such that the number of times of dynamically displaying the identification information corresponding to the second determination is set to one.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I4, it is possible to limit the number of times the second determination, which is advantageous to the player, to be executed during the special state to one. There is an effect that it can be suppressed from being given to.

The gaming machine I6 according to any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, wherein the storage means is configured to store the information up to an upper limit number.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, it is possible to store up to the upper limit number of pieces of information for which the second determination that is advantageous to the player is executed, so that the special state ends. The second determination can be executed even after the above. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected even after the special state ends.

In the gaming machine I6, the upper limit number is the first upper limit number for the information obtained based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. A gaming machine I7, wherein a second upper limit number for the information acquired based on the above is set.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine I6, information obtained based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first ball entering means and the game ball entering the second ball entering means Since the upper limit number that can be stored can be set with the information obtained based on that, regardless of the number of stored information obtained based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means. The information acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means can be stored up to the upper limit number. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game ball in the second ball entering means during the special state.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I7, a variable ball entering means for changing a game ball into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which it is difficult to enter, and a game ball entered in the variable ball entering means can pass through. The gaming machine I8 is characterized in that the privilege granting means is configured to grant a privilege when a game ball passes through the specific area.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7, a privilege is given by passing the gaming ball through a specific area, so that the player is interested in the ball flow. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I8, the special status is set by the status setting means after the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I8, a special state is set after the privilege is given, so that it is possible to enhance the gaming property by allowing the gaming ball to pass through the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I9, the state setting means has a setting determining means for determining whether to set the special state, and the setting determining means determines whether the first determination or the second determination is performed by the determination means. A gaming machine I10 for determining whether or not to set the special state based on the execution.

According to the gaming machine I10, whether or not the special state is set after the privilege is given is determined at the timing when the determination is performed by the determination means. Therefore, depending on the timing at which the game ball is passed through the specific area, Whether or not the special state is set is variable. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting the timing of passing the game ball through the specific area.

The gaming machine I11 has a suggesting means for suggesting the determination information determined by the setting determining means during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine I11, it is possible to recognize by the suggesting means whether the special state is set after the privilege is given, and therefore, the game is performed so that the game ball passes through the specific area or the specific area is reached. There is an effect that the player can decide whether to play the game so that the game ball does not pass by referring to the content of the suggestion.

In any one of the gaming machines I7 to I11, the release condition is set to the number of times of dynamic display for the first identification information, which is larger than the first upper limit number, and is set.

According to the gaming machine I12, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I7 to I11, when the special state is entered, the information already acquired for the entry into the first entry means is the first information. Even when the upper limit number is stored, even if all the information is first judged and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, the special state is not released, so that the second judgment is executed in the special state. There is an effect that it can be given by the player and the value of the special state can be increased for the player.

<Characteristic J group>
A first determination based on a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. And a determination means for performing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entry means, and a determination result by the determination means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating, and variable from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entering means to the second state in which the game ball can be entered Changing means, a state setting means capable of setting a special state capable of changing the second ball entering means to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied, and the special state by the state setting means. When the state is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, a releasing unit that releases the special state, and the releasing unit causes the special state to change. After being released, a determination unit that determines whether the special state is set by the state setting unit before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and based on the determination result of the determination unit, A game machine J1 characterized by having a performance executing means capable of varying and executing a performance.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a lottery by entering a game ball into a starting opening provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed and a winning probability is increased depending on the type of the winning game so that the lottery probability after the winning game is increased to facilitate continuous execution of the winning game. In such a gaming machine, after the symbols for notifying the player of the lottery result are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result If the hit is a hit, it is known that a hit game is executed and an effect is executed during the hit game (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, further interest in the game has been demanded.

According to the gaming machine J1, even when the special state is released, the effect is changed based on the information indicating whether the special state is set again before the identification information is dynamically displayed. It is possible to distinguish whether the special state is continuously set from the effect, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine J1, the effect executing means executes an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result based on the second determination.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the determination result based on the second determination, which is advantageous to the player, is executed. Moreover, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the expectation for the determination result of the second determination.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the effect execution means is configured to be able to execute an effect capable of identifying information based on the number of times that the special state has been continuously determined by the determining means. Gaming machine J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the number of times the special state is continuously set by the effect can be identified, so that the player can set not only the game but also the special state. There is an effect that the number of times played can be made interesting and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machines J1 to J3, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the information for executing the first determination is acquired, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized by having information acquisition means for acquiring information for executing the second determination, and information storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means. J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J1 to J3, information is acquired at the timing when the gaming ball enters the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, and the information is stored in the information storage means. Since it is stored, the opportunity to be judged by the judging means can be saved, and there is an effect that many benefits can be given to the player.

In the gaming machine J4, the effect execution means is configured to be able to change the effect based on the number of pieces of the information stored in the storage means for executing the second determination. A gaming machine J5 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J4, the effect can be varied depending on the number of pieces of information for which the second determination that is advantageous to the player is executed. Therefore, the information easily retained by the player It is possible to inform the number of the above, and it is possible to increase interest in the production.

<Characteristic K group>
A first determination based on a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. And a determination means for performing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entry means, and a dynamic display of identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means. Gaming machine having a special display means and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine K1 has a state setting means for setting a gaming state advantageous to the player during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed based on the establishment of the specific condition.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine executes a lottery by entering a game ball into a starting opening provided on a game board, and moves a symbol indicating the result of the lottery to a liquid crystal display device or the like. The symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner of notifying the lottery result at the timing when the dynamic display period ends. When the notification mode indicated by the symbol is a win, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the winning probability after the winning game is increased to a high probability state, and the winning game continues. Some have been proposed that are configured to be implemented easily. (For example, JP 2012-147965A).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the dynamic display period for showing the lottery result is long, it is disadvantageous for the player because the number of times of lottery is reduced, and the longer the dynamic display period, the more boring the player becomes. There was a problem that I got tired of playing games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game.

According to the gaming machine K1, the player is expected to execute the dynamic display having a long dynamic display period because the player is in an advantageous state during the period in which the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K1, the determination means executes a determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination with respect to the second determination, and that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means. Information acquisition means for acquiring information for executing the first determination based on the information, and acquiring information for executing the second determination for the basis of the game ball entering the second ball entering means. And a storage unit that stores the information acquired by the information acquisition unit, wherein the determination unit is stored in the storage unit based on the end of the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine K2, characterized in that a determination is executed for the information that is present.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1, even if the information is acquired during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, the information is stored in the storage means, so that the determination opportunity by the determination means is increased. The effect is that you can.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the variable means for changing the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the second ball means to the second state in which the game ball can be entered, and the lottery conditions are established. Based on the lottery means for executing a lottery based on the lottery information, the lottery information for displaying the lottery information by the lottery means is dynamically displayed, and the state setting means has the player. As an advantageous game state, when the lottery information for indicating the particular lottery result is stopped and displayed, it is possible to change it to the second state by the changing means. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, in a special state, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the second ball entering means, and it is possible to change the game playability. There is an effect that can increase.

In the gaming machine K3, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed when the game state advantageous to the player is set by the state setting means, and the dynamic display period ends, and the dynamic display period ends. A gaming machine K4 having a releasing means for releasing a game state advantageous to a player.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K3, it is advantageous for the player based on the end of the dynamic display of the identification information executed when the gaming state advantageous for the player is set. Since such a game state is released, it is possible to make the player interested in the end timing of the dynamic display of the identification information, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored even if a long dynamic display period is set. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, a first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and a second flow path through which the game ball flowing down the first flow path becomes difficult to flow down, the first ball entering Means are respectively arranged at the second flow path and at a position where the game ball flowing down at least the first flow path can enter, and the second ball entering means is arranged at the second flow path. A gaming machine K5, which is characterized by being

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, even if a game is attempted to enter the game ball into the second ball entering means, the game ball will enter the first ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate the state in which the player is allowed to enter the ball and only the judgment that is advantageous to the player is easily executed.

In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, when a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, it has a performance executing means for executing a performance corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information. A gaming machine K6 characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, if a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display period is executed, The effect is that the interest can be improved.

In the gaming machine K6, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes an effect for urging the game ball to enter the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. Game machine K7.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K6, the gaming ball is put into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means during the game state advantageous to the player, and the first judgment or the second determination is made. Since it is possible to easily give the opportunity to execute the determination, there is an effect that the game can be efficiently played.

The gaming machine Z1 according to any one of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine Z2 is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine Z3 according to any one of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of the starting opening provided in the gaming board is changed from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. There is one that executes the first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional game machine, a lottery is executed a predetermined number of times by entering a game ball into the starting opening in a state that is easily changed to the second state, and until the result of the predetermined number of times is displayed. A game machine for continuously setting has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-147965A).
However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of the technical idea 1 has a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the first ball entering means. A first judgment is executed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball means, and a player is more advantageous than the first judgment based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball means. 2 Judgment means for executing judgment, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing the judgment result by the judgment means, and stop of the identification information for showing the specific judgment result And a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, and entering the game ball from the first state where the game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entering means. Variable means for changing to a second state in which it is possible, lottery means for executing lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and lottery information for dynamically displaying lottery information for indicating the lottery result by the lottery means A dynamic display means and a special state can be set in which it is possible to change to the second state by the changing means when the lottery information for indicating a specific lottery result is stopped and displayed. State setting means, and when the special state is set by the state setting means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the special state is released based on the end of the dynamic display period. If the special state is not set, the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the setting of the special state, the dynamics of the lottery information. And an effect executing means for executing an effect corresponding to a display, wherein the effect executing means changes from a state in which an effect corresponding to a dynamic display of the lottery information is executed when the special state is set, The effect is switched to the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of the specific condition.
The game machine according to the technical idea 2 is determined by the determining means based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means in the game machine described in the technical idea 1. It has an information acquisition means for acquiring information, and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means.
The game machine according to the technical idea 3 is the game machine according to the technical idea 2, wherein the determination means enters the second ball entering means stored in the storage means based on the determination condition being satisfied. The determination is executed with priority over the information acquired based on the fact that the player has entered the first entrance means based on the information acquired based on the fact that the player has hit a ball.
The gaming machine of technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, in which the dynamic display is started when the special condition is set in the specific condition. It is set as at least one of the satisfaction conditions that the remaining period of the dynamic display period of the identification information is equal to or less than the predetermined period.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein the specific information is the identification information whose dynamic display is started when the special state is set. Is set as at least one of the conditions that it is set to be stopped and displayed with the identification information for indicating the specific determination result.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game to the first ball entering means. The first determination is executed based on the ball entering, and the second determination which is more advantageous to the player than the first determination is executed based on the game ball entering the second entering means. And a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and a case where the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. And a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and it becomes possible to enter the game ball from the first state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. Variable means for changing to the second state, lottery means for executing lottery based on establishment of lottery conditions, and lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for indicating the lottery result by the lottery means. And a state setting means capable of setting a special state that can be changed to the second state by the changing means when the lottery information for indicating the specific lottery result is stopped and displayed. And, if the special state has been set by the state setting means, dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and release means for canceling the special state based on the end of the dynamic display period. When the special state is not set, the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the setting of the special state, the dynamic display of the lottery information is supported. Production effect executing means for executing an effect, wherein the effect executing means moves the identification information from a state in which the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is executed when the special state is set. Based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied, the effect corresponding to the dynamic display is switched and executed.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the information acquisition means for acquiring the information judged by the judgment means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance means or the second ball entrance means, and the information acquisition means. Storage means for storing the information.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effect is exhibited. That is, the determination means is configured to perform the first determination based on the information acquired based on the determination that the determination condition is satisfied and the determination that the second determination means is stored in the storage means. The determination is executed with priority over the information acquired based on the fact that the player has entered the ball entering means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play the game can be increased.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the specific condition, when the special state is set, at least one of the satisfaction conditions is that the remaining period of the dynamic display period of the identification information for which dynamic display is started is equal to or less than a predetermined period. It is set as one.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific condition is set so that the identification information whose dynamic display is started when the special state is set is stopped and displayed as the identification information indicating the specific determination result. It is one that is set as at least one of the conditions.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
6 4b Right first ball entrance port (input sphere means)
113 voice lamp control device (production execution means)
S 402 Determination means S 406 First dynamic display means
S 908 determining means S914,915 second dynamic display unit S1704 benefits game execution hands stage

Claims (1)

And inlet ball means playing ball capable ball entrance,
And executable decision means for determine a constant based on the game ball has ball entrance to the ball entrance means,
A first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displayed on the display unit identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means,
A discriminating means capable of discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition;
Second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means discrimination information for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means,
When the specific identification information for indicating that the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result is stopped and displayed by the first dynamic display means, or by the second dynamic display means, A privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game corresponding to the specific determination information indicating that the result of the determination by the determining means is a specific determination result,
In a gaming machine having a production effect executing unit capable of at least executing a first production effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information and a second production effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information ,
The effect execution means,
It is possible to execute a first execution that emphasizes the second effect over the first effect and a second execution that emphasizes the first effect over the second effect.
When the first effect is being executed and the special condition is satisfied at the timing at which the effect result of the second effect that is being emphasized by the first execution is being displayed. In addition, the gaming machine is capable of executing a special effect for displaying the effect result of the first effect regardless of the remaining period of the first effect .